IN MEMORIAM- BERNARD MOSES (/ -J -^ ITALIAN L I > • CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR.. y[jj^./r kAMAJUlL ^'^S^-^-iMLU>^^ By L. B, CUORE. -^-a' -^ -. FIFTH EDITION, REVISED BOSTON: 8. R. URBINO, 14 BROMFIELD STREET. NEW YORK: LEYPOLDT & HOLT ; F. W. CIIRISTERN. 1870. B€RNARD MOSES Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1864, by S. R. URBINO, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. Presswork by John Wilson and Son. ' ) rJ PREFACE. This Grammar, based on that of Robello and others, claims to be all that is necessary for the study of the elements of the Italian lano^uas^e. Great pains have been taken to present the verbs in a clear, concise manner ; and though, for the sake of easy comparison, they are placed at the end of the book, the student is requested to study a part of them with every lesson. It is hoped that this little work will fill the place for which it is intended. THE AUTHOR. 7749M TABLE OF CONTENTS. Paob Italian Gramimar 1 CHAPTER I. Pronunciation 1 Etyimology 15 CHAPTER n. The Article c . . 16 CHAPTER m. Union of the Articles and Prepositions 21 CHAPTER IV. The Noun 26 CHAPTER V. The Plural of ITouns and Adjectives 32 CHAPTER VI. The Cases of Nouns 40 CHAPTER Vn. Pronouns 46 CHAPTER Vin. Pronouns: Personal and Conjunctive 65 [y] Vi TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER IX. PAOB The Adjective 61 CHAPTER X. Adjectives : their Compahatives » • 67 CHAPTER XI. The Adjectives : Superlatives • 72 CHAPTER Xn. AUGMENTATIVES AND DiMHSfUTIVES 76 CHAPTER Xm. The Numeral Adjectives • • • • 82 CHAPTER XIV. Relatr^e Pronouns 89 CHAPTER XV. Possessive Adjective Pronouns . • • 96 CHAPTER XVI. Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns 103 CHAPTER XVII. • Indefinite Adjective Pronouns •"•••109 CHAPTER XVHL Indefinite Adjective Pronouns (continued) 115 CHAPTER XIX. The Prepositions, Bi, A, Da 121 TABLE OF CONTENTS. viJ CHAPTER XX. r^oH The Prepositions Con, In, Per 129 CHAPTER XXI. The PREPOgiTiONS (continued) 135 CHAPTER XXn. The Verbs Essere and Avtre 141 CHAPTER XXm. The Verbs aj^td their Syntax 146 CHAPTER XXIV. The Verb: The Subjunctive Mood 153 CHAPTER XXV. The Infinitive, Gerund, Present and Past Participles 159 CHAPTER XXVI. The Verbs Anddre, Bare, Fare, and Stare 166 CHAPTER XXVn. Adverbs 171 CHAPTER XXVm. Conjunctions and Interjections 179 VERBS. Auxiliary Verbs 186 Regular Verbs 188 Irregular Verbs 214 Defective Verbs 246 Proverbs 259 Idioms » 263 voc^vbulary 266 Index 275 • • t •■ • ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Italian Gramihar teaches the principles of the ItaHan language. These relate, — 1. To its written characters ; 2. To its pronunciation ; 3. To the classification and derivation of its words ; 4. To the construction of its sentences ; 5. To its versification. The first part is called Orthography ; the second, Orthoepy ; the third, Etymology ; the fourth. Syntax ; and the fifth. Prosody. CHAPTER I. PEONUNCIATION. The Italian alphabet consists of twenty-two letters : — A, a ; B, b ; C, c ; D, d ; E, e ; F, f ; G, g ; H, h ; I, i ; J, j ; L, 1; M, m; N, n ; O, o; P, p; Q, q; R, r; S, s ; T, t; U, u ; V, V ; Z, z. The letters Jc, iv, x, and y, sometimes occur, but only in words derived from foreign sources. SOUNDS OF THE ITALIAN LETTERS. In Italian, every vowel must be distinctly sounded. The five vowels, a, e, i, o, 7i, are thus pronounced : — 1 2 IT^O^IAN GKAIVIMAR. SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. A, as E, as I, as O, as U, as a ee o ou in father ; in made ; in eel; in Rome ; in sowp. REMAllKS. E has two different sounds, — open and close : E close, as in grey, pain : Tema, fear. Venti, twenty. Mela, apple. E open, as in mate, name : T'ema, subject. Venti, winds. Avena, oats. O has likewise two sounds, — open and close : open, as in cord : Botta, blow. Rosa, rose. close, as in bone : Botte, cask. Ora. hour. To become thoroughly acquainted with the open and close sounds of E and O, three things are especially necessary: 1. Practice ; 2. Peactice ; 3. PRACTICE. sounds of the consonants. The greater portion of the consonants in the Italian language are pronounced as in English, are the exceptions : — The following c and ff before e of speech. It is C, which takes the sound of ch before i or e: otherwise it sounds like k. H, which is used only to harden the sound of and ^, and to distinguish different parts never sounded. J sounds like ee. Q is never used without u, and is sounded like q in the English word quire. R, which is sounded as if rolled on the point of Z, which is sounded like ts and ds. L, M, N, and R are liquids, or semivowels. the tongue. PRONUNCIATION. COMPOUND SOUNDS. Ch i sounds Gh » Gn jj Gli 5) Sci )) SCE J) SCH ?) like k in English. hard as in English. like 71 in the word onion. like // in the word William. like SHE. like SHA. like SK. Cc, followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like tch in the English word match. Gg, followed by e, «', sounds like dg in the word lodge. The exact sound of the letters can be obtained only by hearing good pronunciation, and by repeating after the teacher, as almost every language has some sounds which can only be learned by practising with an experienced teacher. But, as an Italian teacher is not always to be found, we shall endeavor to give a few concise and practical rules, by which the student may make himself familiar with the language of Dante, Alfieri, Boccaccio, Ariosto, Tasso, Petrarca, MafFei, Manz6ni, and a host of other writers, whose works will never cease to form part of the belles lettres of every country. Diphthongs, as we understand them in English, do not exist in Italian. Dr. Bachi, in his excellent Grammar, speaks gf diphthongs and triphthongs, by which he means such a blending of the vowels that each is but faintly lieard. The apostrophe (') indicates that a vowel is omitted ; as, Voro, instead of lo dro, the gold ; deW dnhna, instead of della dnima, of the soul ; &c. The_^ra\'e_accent (') i^s jused on the last vowels of some words ; as, cittd (formerly cittade) : or as a termina- tion which must be pronounced sharply; as, avrd, amoy resso. ITALIAN GRAMMAR. EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION. A Casa, musica, danza. A Felicita, dara, sara. E (close) Bene, pedone. E (open) Tema, pena, erba. J Principj, proverbj, compendj. I Inimico, clbo, ripieno. O (close) Corso, amore, fonte. O (open) Povero, tolto, popolo. U Duo, tiio, siio. Ce Cento, cece, fellce. Ci Pacifico, dieci, cibo. Ch Chiodo, chi, che. Ga, Go, Gu .... Gamba, pago, gusto. Ge, Gi Germano, digito, legione. Gn Campagna, magnetico. Gli (liquid) .... Figlio, figlia, gli, meglio. S (strong) Santo, studio, senso. S (soft) Guisa, casa, cosa. ScA, Sco, Scu . . . Scabro, scolare, scuola. ScE, Sci Scena, scinto, fascia. Zz {z like ts) ... Nozze, fazzoletto. Zz {z like ds) . . . Azzurro, mezzo. REMARKS. Double consonants must be very flistinctly pronounced, thus: im?nenso, im-ynen-so ; innocente, in-7io-cente ; &Q.. Jivery syllable must contain a vowel, and cannQt^cceiye more than one consonant afler it in the same syllable, but may be preceded by one, two, or three. All Italian words end with a vowel, except z'Z, the ; con^ witli ; non, not ; per^ for ; and a few others. The final vowel is, however, very often dropped for euphony. READING EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION. To impress the following exercise on the memory of k the pupil, many English words are omitted. The pupil is required to fill them up : this can be done with the help of the dictionary. PEONUNCIATION. 5 LA FANCIULLA DI BUON i'nDOLE. THE GIP.L OF GOOD DISPOSITION. La Marchesa Giulia andava in carrettella a far visita alia The went little carriage to make to the sorella die stiiva in villa, e aveva con se solamente una sister who was country, and had with her only a cameriera e uno staffiere. Una ruota della carrettella si riippe, chambermaid and a footman. wheel of the ^^ '' :^ broke, e benche per budna sorte non rimanesse ferito nessuno, although by good fortune remained wounded no one, bisogno scendere, e adattarsi di andare a piedi ad un it was necessary to descend (adapt) prepare to go on foot villaggio lontano di li quasi tre miglia. La Marchesa distant from there almost three miles. mando innanzi il servitore per fare avvisare un carrozziere sent before the servant for to make to give notice carriage-maker clie venisse ad accomodare la carrettella ; il cocchiere rimase which should come mend coachman stayed con i cavc411i, e la signora prese a braccio la cameriera, e si with the horses lady took arm avvio. set forward. Era sul mezzogiorno, e il sole dava lore molta noja ; It was mid-day sun gave to them much inconvenience; dimodoche la signora, non avvezza a camminare a piedi, presto so that accustomed walk on foot vciy soon presto si stracco, e per riposarsi ebbe ad uscir di stnida, ed was tired for to repose had leave street entnire in un prato dove erano delle querce. La si mise a enter meadow where there were of the oaks. There she put herself sedere all' ombra sotto uno di quegli alberi, e guardo con sit to the shade under one of those trees observed piacere il bel prospetto die le era dinanzi. A un tratto clla pleasure fine prospect which her was before. all at once she vide passar pel prato una ragazzina con un fjistt'llo di legna saw to pass through little girl faggot of wood m capo, ou head. 1» 6 ITALIAN GRAMIVIAR. Ragazzina piu bella di quella non era mai passata sott' Girl more beautiful than that was ever before occhio alia Marchesa. Le sue carni parevano latte e r6se, i suoi eye her cheeks appeared milk roses her grand' occhi celesti erano pieni di dolcezza, e sotto una pezzuola great eyes blue were full sweetness under handkerchief di cotone giallo, annodata intorno al capo, venivan fuori le cambric yellow, tied about the head, came out ciocche de' suoi biondi capelli, e davan grazia vieppiu a quella tufts fair hair gave grace much more that bella fisonomia. La signora non aveva figli, e se ne had children herself of it addolorava. A veder dunque quella cara fanciullina, non pote grieved. see then dear girl was able a meno d'invidiarelamadresiia; e disse alia cameriera di andare at least to envy said * go a chiamar la bambina e condurgliela. Questa si avvicino con un call child conduct her to her. advanced contegno modesto ma franco, poso il suo fastello, fece un countenance but put down made inchino alia Marchesa, e le domando se avea qualcosa da bow to her asked if she had something to comandarle. Niente, rispose la dama ; voglio soltanto parlare command of her. Nothing, answered lady ; I wish only to speak un po' con te : mettiti a sedere qui sulF erba, e prima di tutto little thee : put thyself sit here grass before all dimmi come tu ti chiami ? Rosa Liici, al comando suo. tell me how thou thyself callest? at 3^our. II babbo e la mamma li hai vivi ? II mio babbo e morto ch' e papa them hast thou alive ? my is dead un pezzo ; la mia mamma ha me sola e si sta qui in un villaggio has alone is here vicino. M' immagino che non siate molto feli'ci. Oh, perche ? near. I imagine maybe very happy. why? Noi ci vogliamo bene, e siamo contente. Ma mi pare We ourselves wish well are to me it seems che voi siete molto povere ! you are very poor! Noi ci guadagniamo il pane con le nostre fatiche: We to ourselves gain the bread the our labors: PRONUNCIATION. 7 abbiamo delle galline che ci fanno le uova ; e la mia mamma we have some hens which make eggs oggi e andata al paese a venderle, ed i quattrini si serbano to-day is gone to the country to sell them the money serves per la pigione di casa. E in che lavorate voi per guadagnarvi rent house. work you gain da mangiare ? Nell' estate noi andiamo a sarchiare, e dopo la to eat ? In the summer we go to weed after mietitiira andiamo a spigolare. Ma se durate tanta fatica, harvest glean. But if endure so much fatigue, mangiate male e andate mal vestite, come potete voi essere you eat badly go ill dressed, how can you be contente ? Noi a tutte queste cose non ci pensiamo We (of all these things not ourselves think nemmeno ; quando s' ha fame si ringrazia Iddio di avere di at all ; when one has hunger one thanks God to have of che satollarsi, e ogni cosa par buona. Se noi non abbiamo what satisfy every thing seems good. If we not have vestiti belli, siarao pure coperte e decenti ; sono solamente i clothes fine we are yet covered are only })igri che vanno sempre strappati e siidici ; la mamma pensa a lazy who go always ragged dirty thinks rassettare le nostre robicciole, ed io gia comincio ad aiutarla. to repair our clothes I already begin to help her. Rosa, vuoi venir meco a quel villaggio ? Volontieri : tanto la wilt come with me to that Willingly whilst mia mamma fino a stassera non torna; ma bisogna che until this evening returns it is necessary intanto io porti a casa mia questo fastello. E se lo comprassi meanwhile carry house my if it should buy .0 ? Allora poi ! ma costa sei soldi, veh ! Eccoti sei soldi I? Then but costs six cents, hum! Behold (I'ispose la Marchesa alzandosi), posa li il tuo fastello, e vieni rising, put there como con noi. Ma s' ella 1' ha comprato, bisogna ch' io gliclo porti But if you have it bought, it is necessary tliat I it carry (e voleva ripigliarlo), ma la Marchesa glielo impedi, e prcse she wished to take it again prevented took ia via del villaggio, dove arrivata, entro in un albergo {hotel) way where entered d' apparenza assai decente. appearance enough 8 ITALI^^ GKAJiOIAR. Lo staffiere venne a dirle clie per accomodare la sua The footman came to tell her mend carrozza gli bisognavano cinque ore. La Marchesa ordino il needed five hours. - ordered pranzo, V ostessa la condiisse in una stanza pulita ove essa entro dinner hostess conducted room clean where she entered insieme con le altre due; diede poi segretamente degll ordini together other two; gave then secretly of the orders alia cameriera che usci per eseguirli. In questo frattempo la went out execute. meanwhile Marchesa continuo a parlare con Rosina, e si trovo contenta to speak found sempre piu del candore delle sue risposte, e sopratiitto della sua always more candor her answers above all tenerezza per la propria madre. tenderness own La cameriera torno carica de' vestiti che aveva comprati nel returned laden clothes she had bought villaggio; spoglio, per drdine della padrona, la picclna, e le imdressed, by order mistress little one mlse indosso una camicia di cotone, un sottanino ricaraato, e put upon her shirt cambric petticoat embroidered una vestina di seta color verde chiaro, con un ornamento di govra silk green light ornament merletti color di rosa ; poi le acconcio i capelli, colle trecce le lace then dressed hair braids formo una specie di corona sul capo, e vi pose una ghirlanda di formed sort crown head put garland fiori. Rosa dapprima faceva la ritrosa, e si vergognava a flowers. at first made shy was ashamed vedersi vestire da signora ; ma poi, siccome era di naturale to see to dress ' then, as she was by molto compiacente, si sottomise a tutto. Quando fu assettata very complaisant submitted all. When she was fitted out per bene, la Marchesa la condiisse davanti alio specchio, e le fully her conducted before her mirror and to her disse che si guardasse. La picclna si guardo sott' occhio said that herself she should look at. little one regarded n^llo specchio, sorrise ed arrosi. smiled and blushed. PRONUNCIATION. 9 V Che ne dici eh! disse la Marchesa ; non ci a^resti What to it sayest thou -would have gusto di star sempre vestita in questo modo? Si; ma come si taste to be always dressed manner? Yes how pu6 con questi abiti andar a tagliar 1' erba e sarchiare ? Vedi, se can clothes to go cut grass to weed ? See if tu fossi la mia figliuola, com' io lo desidererei, tu non faticheresti thou wert daughter as I it should desire fatigue thyself piu in questo modo ; tu impareresti a leggere, scrivere, e more shouldst learn to read write cantare ; e ti rimarrebbe anche tempo per divertirti ; io ti to sing to thee would remain even time to amuse menerei a spasso in carrozza, e ti farei giocare in tante would lead would make to amuse so many maniere. A me, la mia mamma ha detto sempre che Dio sa manners (ways). To me has said always that God knows quel che fa. Dio ha voluto che ella fosse Marchesa, ed io what he does. wished you should be lina contadina, ma io preghero Dio di darle una figliolina, ed will pray to give you ella e tanto buona che il signore la fara contenta. vou are so lord you will make La signora Giulia non si saziava di accarezzare Rosina: satisfied to caress faceva ammirare alia cameriera la gentilezza dei suoi modi, le she made admire gentleness grazie della persona ; e questa, per far la corte alia padrona la she to please the her lodava anche piii di lei, e la Rosina ascoltava queste Iddi tutta praise than she heard confusa. Vennero ad avvisare che il pranzo era all' ordine: They came inform dinner was ready la Marchesa passo in una piccola sala con Rosa per mano, e la passed into a little parlor hand he fece mettere a sedere a tavola accanto a se. La povera caused to put sit table at the side fanciuUina si vergognava talmente, che quasi piangeva ma bashful so almost to weep vedendosi trattatta con tanta bonta, comincio a rassiciirarsi un seeing herself treated kindness began re-assure poco. 10 ITALIAN GllAIUMAR. La minestra le parve si buona, che ne maiigio assai; soup to her seemed of it she eat enough e il lesso c.lie venne dopo, le parve una vivanda sqnisita ; e si boiled meat came after to her seemed food exquisite sazio afFatto ; dimodoche, quando vennero in tavola gli altri satiated so that when came the other piatti per quanto la Signora la pregasse, non pote piu mangiare. dishes begged was able to eat. 11 Vino poi non vi fu modo di farglielo bere ; appena Y ebbe wine then there was to make to drink; hardly had ella assaggiato si riscosse, e chiese che per carita le dessero she tasted shuddered asked for charity her should give deir acqua. Allorche ella vide venire le frutta e i dolci, mando When saw to come fruit sweets uttered un grido di sorpresa. Un altro pranzo ! eh ! Ella poteva cry surprise. dinner could chiamare tiitti i ragazzi del villaggio, v' era da sfaraarli tiitti call children there was to satisfy Ebbene Rosa, se tu viioi venire a star con me, tu sarai Well if thou wishest to come to be shalt be trattata tutti i giorni come oggi, e anche meglio. Per me, treated days as to-day even better. Signora mia, farei tutto per compiacerla; ma egli e I would do to please j'ou impossibile ch' io lasci la mia mamma, che non ha altro che should leave has other than me per ajutarla e vegliarla quand' e malata. Io paghero una to help her to care for her when sick. will pay donna perche la serva. Si, ma qu^sta donna non le vorra woman for her serve (that she may serve her). would wish bene come io gliene voglio e la servira solamente per well as to her wish her would serve only guadagnare. La mia mamma ha preso ciira di me quand' io to gain. taken care era piccina; ora ch' io sono grande, non voglio abbandonarla ; I wish quando ella sara vecchia, io lavorero per darle da mangiare will be old will work to give her to eat edme ella faceva per me quando io non mi poteva guadagnare il as did was able to gain the PRONUNCIATION. 11 pdne. La Marchesa era intenerita dai sentimenti di questa bread. affected by the fanciulla, e non ebbe piu il coraggio d' insistere : le permise di had permitted riprendere la sua vesticciola, e tornar dalla mamma, die doveva to take again dress return ought cominciare ad essere in pensiero per l^i. Innanzi di lasciarla to begin to be thought for her. Before allowing her partire, 1' abbraccio, ed empi le sue tasche di quei pasticcini to depart, she embraced her filled pockets cakes e di quelle pastine che essa non aveva neppure assaggiate. that pastry had not even tasted. La Rosina pareva un uccelletto scappato dalle mani di un appeared like a bird escaped hands ragdzzo che lo volesse ingabbiare : aveva pr^so i suoi zoccoli boy who it wished • to cage : she had taken wooden shoes in mano, e cosi scalza correva tanto lesta, che la cameriera, a hand so barefooted ran so quickly to cui la marchesa aveva comandato di tenerle dietro, duro fatica whom keep found it difficult a non la perder di vista. Essa nonostante arrive al casolare her to lose from sight. notwithstanding arrived house quasi subito dopo Rosa, la trovo nelle braccie della sua soon after her she found in the arms mamma, alia quale ella raccontava che una bella signora la related Toleva condurre con se, promettendole vestiti belli e tre wished to take her with her, promising her clothes fine three pranzi ogni giorno. lo nondimeno son venuta via (aggiungeva dinners every day. nevertheless am come added ^lla), perche sebbene io voglia bene a quella signora, la* non e although wish well poi la mia mamma, then La cameriera disse a quella contadina che dlla sua padr6na told era piaciuto tanto il buon cuore della Rosina, che voleva pleased wished • La for eWa, she. 12 ITALIAN GRAMMAE. assicurarle una pensione di dugento franchi, e al suo ritorno to secure to her two hundred francs return dlla citta ne avr^bbe segnato il contratto : le lascio 1' indirlzzo, would have to sign she left her direction e le raccomando di venirla a vedere la domenica prossima, e advised to come to see Sunday next menar con se la Rosina. La donna glielo promise, to bring with her it to her promised. La Marchesa Giiilia, benche non fosse avvezza a sentirsi although accustomed to hear herself contradire, sicc6me d' altra parte 411a era generosa e di cuor contradicted, on other hand heart buono riconobbe che non avea potesta di disporre di Rosa contro recognized power dispose against il suo volere, ne di obbligarla a preferir lei alia propria madre ; will, nor oblige her to prefer her to her own percio si determino a farle in altro modo tiitto quel bene ch' therefore determined another manner all the good ella poteva. Accolse dunque le contadine con m61ta alFabilita, she could. She approached then e ddpo cb' ella ebbe parlato con la madre, non si maraviglio piu after had spoken was astonished delle qualita buone della figliudla. Quella donna in fatti 4ra daughter. That lady fact was tutta probita e delicatezza : contenta del suo state, non invidiava all delicacy state . envy niente i riccbi, i quali diceva essa, son pur sottop(5sti, come tutti any one rich who said she are exposed gli altri uomini, dlle malattie ed ai dispiaceri, e dovrdnno rendere diseases and to misfortunes ought to render un gran conto delle loro ricchezze, dove non se ne servano in account riches where serve (use) for bene. good. La Marcbesa fece alia Rosina il regalo che le aveva made present for her she had destindto, ed erano ire vaccherelle, le quali ella fece consegndre three young cows which she made to consign jlUa madre perche le conducesse con se : ed aggiunse, essere should conduct added to be (it was) PRONUNCLVTION. 13 6U0 desidei'io che la piccina non antlasse piu a lavorare alia her desire should go work campagna, ma badasse soltanto a vendere il latte e le uova. country should care only to sell milk eggs. Siccome poi, diss' ella, non deve Rosina star mai disoccupata, But then, said ought to he ever unoccupied, andra alia scuola del vostro villaggio, il restante dclla giornata shall go school day lo passera da una maestra che le insegnera a far la trina : alle pass teacher her will teach to make lace spese che occorreranno per la sua istruzione pensero io. Rosa expense shall incur I will think. e la sua md,dre volevano ringraziare la Signora, ma vinte dalle wished to thank lacrime non poterono articolare parola. tears were able word. Questo 'benefizio non poteva essere fatto a persone piu degne : was able made any one more worthy r educazione sviluppo nella fanciullina tutte le buone qualita developed che tralucevano in lei fin dall' infanzia. Un anno dopo ella shone her from A year after porto in regalo alia Marchesa una trIna lavorata con somma carried present lace made finezza ed era tanta da guarnire un vestito. La Marchesa seppe enough to trim dress. knew che quella famiglia, resa da lei agiata, risparmiava per rendered saved • soccorrere i bisogndsi, e spiava tutte le occasioni per beneficare. succor needy spied (watched) Rosa era entrata appena ne' quindici anni, quando la entered scarcely fifteenth year Marchesa cadde in una gravissima malattia: suo marito era fell in very serious sickness husband in viaggio : e non aveva altro che la sua gente di servizio che absent she had no others than people service who r assistesse. Lo seppe Rosina, e subito, lasciando una sua vicina her could assist. knew left neighbor a giuirdia della casa e delle vaccherelle, parti per la citta guard cows, she set out 2 14 ITALIAN GRAlVniAR. insi^me colla mamma. Arrivate che furono, andarono alia together with Arrived they were, they went camera della Marchesa. Essa era fuori di se, ne riconosc^va chamber She was out of her mind, neither recognized alcuno ; e da quelle stato di delirio, cadeva poi in un profondo no one fell letargo che pareva morta. Tiitta la gente di casa era costernata, appeared dead. people confounded la cameriera, sommamente affeziooata alia sua padrdna, non greatly attached sapeva far altro che piangere, e non era buona a nulla. La knew to do than to weep she was for nothing. buona Liici fece rizfare accanto al letto della signora un made to be placed by the side bed letticciuolo : ed ella e Rosina vegliavano la signora dna notte little bed watched per una. I medici s' intendevano con loro per la ciira dell' ammalata ; depended upon them care sick (lady) e tutto era adempito con la massima puntualita. In capo a nove fulfilled greatest At the end of nine giorni la malattia piglio buona piega : la Marchesa ritorno in se e days took turn recovered conobbe. quanto doveva alio zelo e all' affetto delle sue amorose knew owed loving assistenti. La povera Rosina era scolorita dalle inquietezze e pale ddlle nottate perdute ; ma i suoi occhi abbattuti ripigliarono nights lost (sleepless nights) languid took again la loro vivacita appena ella comincio a sperare nella guarigione as soon as began hope cure della sua benefattrice. Ella con le sue premure rese meno cares rendered spiacevole alia signora il tempo della convalescenza ; ora le disagreeable now legg(^va un bel libro, ora le raccontava qualche fatto interessante read then related fact accaduto nel suo villaggio : voleva anche pensare a vegliarla, happened wished-— also - to take care of her ETOIOLOGY. 15 ne permetteva che altri le facesse i brodi e preparasse le others should make broths medicine. In questo tempo il marito della Marchesa torno, returned ed essa, ritornata in perfetta salute, gli mostro quanto doveva a returned health showed she owed Roslna ed alia madre di lei, e gli disse clie oramai non le dava now gave (had) piu il cuore di separarsi da loro. Concertarono dimque di heart They agreed then mettere la Liici alia direzione della casa, sicuri che non put sure potevano affidarla meglio: la figlia poi non doveva aver altro were able should have titolo che di compagna ed arnica della Marchesa. Voi vi potete can figurdre, figliuoli miei, quanto volontieri accettarono esse tale children they accepted proposizione. ETYMOLOGY. PARTS OF SPEECH. There are nine parts of speech in the Italian language : — 1. The Article; 2. The Noun; 3. The Adjec- tive; 4. The Pronoun ; 5. The Verb ; 6. The Ad- verb ; 7. The Preposition; 8. The Conjunction; 9. The Interjection. The fir st five are variable ; the four last, invariable. The change which the first four undergo by means of terminations is called declension : it refers to gender, number, and case. There are two genders in Italian , — the^ masculine and t he feminine. The re are also two numbers, — the singular and the plural : and five cases, expressing the different relations of words to each other ; namely, the nomina tive, genitive , cjative, accusative, and ablative. 16 ITALIAN GEAMMAR. The nominative case, or the subject, answers to the question who? or what? as. Who is reading? The hoy. The genitive or possessive case answers to the question whose? QY of which? as, Whose book? The hoifs book. The dative answers to the question to whom? as, To whom shall I give it? To the hoy. The accusative or objective case marks the object of an action, and answers to the question wliom ? or what ? as. Whom or what do you see? I see the hoy, the house. The ablative answers to the question from or by whom ? as, From whom did you receive it? From my father? CHAPTER n. THE ARTICLE— L' ARTICOLO. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. La domenica sento la messa . On Sunday I attend (the) mass.* Il lunedl spmdo IL dandro . On Monday I spend the money. Il martedl viene la serva . The servant comes on Tuesday. Il mercoledi stiro la hiancheria On Wednesday I iron the linen. Il giovedX pdgo il cameriere . On Thursday I pay the domestic. Il venerdi riscuoto l' entrdte . On Friday I receive the rent. It. sdbato aspetto il sdrto . . I expect ^/ie tailor on (the) Sat- urday.f The article is used much more frequ ently in _ Italian tha n m iiinglisJi. There are tw o articles, — Definite and Indefinite. J The Definite has several variations for the sake of eu iphony . * In the translation of the Italian examples, -words which cannot be expressed are inserted within marks of parenthesis. t The pupil is requested to commit to memory the Italian words occurring in Rules or Examples, as their meaning will be seldom repeated. The conjugation of the verbs will be found at the end of the book. X The indefinite article, tot, loio, ^tna^ a or an, will be treated of in a subsequent ."■bapter. (See chapter on Nximeral Adjectives.) THE ARTICLE. 17 DEFINITE ARTICLE. Singular, ^7, lo^ * masculine ; Ig^ feminine. Plural, e, gli (/^'),t masculine ; J^ feminine. REMARKS. I. The article ii, plural i, is most gener ally used as, II tempermo, i temperini ; il sigillo, i sigilU. The penknife, the penknives ; the seal, the seals.J II. The article lo, plural gli, is 2)laced, — 1st, Before ' nouns beginning with s followed by another consonant ; as, — Lo specchio, gli specchi ; lo spirito, gli spiriti. The mirror, the mirrors ; the spirit, the spirits. 2d, Before nouns commencing with a vow^el, eliding the 0, ari a replacing it by an apostrophe ; as, — X' occhio, gli bcchi ; V amico, gli amici. The ej^e, the eyes ; the friend, the friends. in. Thejvord del, g ods, takes the article ^li . We say, II Dio di Ahrdnio, gli del del paganesimo ; the God of Abraham, the gods of the heathen. lY. Xo, or ^7, is written before m asculine nouns com- mencing with _g^; as, Lo zio, or il zio, the uncle ; and after the'preposition pe ?- : Per lo ai6re, or per il cu6re, for the heart. But, in speakin g, il is generally used , excej^t in the phrases ^jer lo piu, at most ; per lo meno, at least. V. La before a feminine noun takes le in the plural ; as, — "^ La fenna, le penne ; la stanza, le stdnze. The pen, the pens ; the room, the rooms. * The Italians haye taken the articles il and lo from the first and last syllable of thq ablative La tin lil'o . In their use, euphony alone is consulted : lo I'lbro, lo ■padre^ il tihro\ ilpadre. t We find //, plural of 77, in classical works, especially in poetry ; but modoni writers Qse i in preference. t The article is given with every noun, so that the pupil may learn the gender of the noun. 2* 18 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. The a of la is elide d before a vowel, and replaced by an aj[)Ostrophe. It, however, takes le in the plural ; as, — X' isola, le isole ; V dnima, le dnime. The island, the islands ; the soul, the souls. VI. The ai^ticle il m ay ioseJt]le_^ if p rece ded by the words cAe7^r . amico. the friend. Di lo . . dell' amico. of the friend. Alo . . all' amico. to the friend. Da lo . . dale' amico, from the friend. In lo . nell' amico. in the friend. Con lo . . coll' amico. with the friend. Su lo . . sull' amico, upon the friend. Before nouns in the plural commencing with an i, we write degV, cugV, dagV , etc. ; as, CogV infelici, with the unhappy. UNION OF ARTICLES AND riiErOSIilOXS. 23 § III. 2d, Contraction of the article il, and its plural i 11 . . Dl il . A il . Da il , In il . Con il Sit il . DEL AL DAL NEL COL SUL SINGULAR. fazsolkto, the pocket-handkerchief. fazzolkto, of the pocket-handkerchief fazzolkto, to the pocket-handkerchief. fazzoJetto, from or by the pocket-handk. fazzolkto, in the pocket-handkerchief. fazzolkto, with the pocket-handkerchief. fazzolkto, upon the pocket-handkerchief. Di i . A i , Da i . In i . Con i . Su i . DEI or DE Ai or a' DAI or da' NEI or ne' COI or CO' sui or su' fazzolkti, fazzolkti, fazzolkti, fazzolkti, fazzolkti, fazzolkti, fazzolkti. PLURAL. the handkerchiefs, of the handkerchiefs, to the handkerchiefs, from the handkerchiefs, in the handkerchiefs, with the handkerchiefs, upon the handkerchiefs. § IV. 3d, Contraction of the article la, and its plural It SINGULAR. La, Di la A la Da la In la Con la Su la DELLA ALLA DALLA NELLA COLLA SULLA saccoccia, saccoccia, saccoccia, saccoccia, saccoccia, saccoccia, saccoccia, the pocket, of the pocket, to the pocket, from the pocket, in the pocket, with the pocket, upon the pocket. Before a vowel, write delV, aW, dalP, neU\ etc. PLURAL. Le . Dile Ale Da le In le Con le Su^le DELLE ALLE DALLE NELLE COLLE SULLE saccbcce, the pockets. saccbcce, of the pockets. saccbcce, to the pockets. saccbcce, from or by the pockets. saccbcce, in the pockets. saccbcce, with the pockets. saccbcce, upon the })Ockets. Before nouns commencing with e, write dcW , alV , daU\ etc. 24 ITALIAN GRA3IMAR. § V. The contraction of co7i and of su with t he ar ticles loo gli-, la-, and Ze. is used at discretion. We can say, Con lo studio^ con la j)e7ina, or cdllo studio, colla penna, — with the study, with the pen, — according to the harmony of the phrase. Instead of su, we can say sopra with all the articles , writing them separately ; as, Sul tetto, or sopra il tetto ; sulla tdvola, or sop'a la tdvola, — upon the roof, upon the table. § VI. The prepos it ion pei' may be united with the a rti;:- cles _z7 and i, thus; pel, plural pei^ or pe[ . In speaking, we say, ordinarily, per il, to avoid affectation. The pupil is required to supply the prepositions and articles in the following declensions : — // giardmo, the garden. „ of the garden. „ to the garden. from the garden. » I giardmi, the gardens. » of the gardens, to the gardens, from the gardens. Lo sptrito, the spirit, of the spirit, to the spirit, from the spirit. Gil spiriti, the spirits. of the spirits, to the spirits, from the spirits. X' dlbero, 99 n 9} the tree, of the tree, to the tree, from the tree. Gli dlberi, the trees, of the trees, to the trees, from the trees. La rosa, the rose, of the rose, to the rose, from the rose. Le rose, the roses, of the roses, to the roses, from the roses. X' anima, n J) the soul, of the soul, to the soul, from the soul. Le dnime, » the souls. of the souls, to the souls, from the souls. UNION OF ARTICLES AND rilEPOSITIONS. 25 READING LESSON. Andiamo nolle stracle della citta. La donna e partita. Non Let us go streets city. woman is departed. Not 2 andate colla cameriera. Prendo la chiave della camera. La go 1 chambermaid. I take key room. primavera della vita. Ella mori nel fior degli anni. Non dormite spring-time life. Slie died flower years. Not 2 sleep i air aria aperta. II gdtto e nella camera del padrone. II air open. cat master. lapis non e siilla tavola. Leggo con le ragazze. II calam{iio pencil not is table. I read girls. inkstand e sulla tavola. La cliiave e nell' iiscio. Si va alia caccia nell' door. One goes chase autunno. La penna e nel calamaio siilla tavola. La vita e autumn. breve, e 1' arte e liinga. La moderazione genera la felicita. L' oro short long. generates happiness. gold governa il mondo. La verita produce 1' odio. L' udmo propone, governs world. truth produces hatred. man proposes 6 Dio dispone. La voce, gli occlii, il cdrpo, 1' anima delF uomo. God disposes. voice eyes body soul La voce del popolo e la voce di Dio. 1/^^ */v|ui((,\ l^.w 'x^^ people EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. Italy is the garden of Europe. The passions are the Italia i/ /C giardino ? Europa. 6--£o passioni sono ^ '-^ elements of life. The voice of the people is the voice of God. element! vita. -\:< , voce cUJ^ popolo L j'jl, uirCe^ /^. Dfo. The whip (is) for the horse, the halter for the ass, and the stick frusta (f.) (the fii'st particularly being employed to indicate unmarried women in general, if young, f Obs. — Lapis, pencil ; rlbes, currants ; chermes, cochineal, and a few foreign uouns, end with a consonant. THE GENDEll OF iNOUNS. 29 II casdto, the family name. // canestro, the basket. II cioccoldto, the chocolate. II frutto,* the fruit. // leg7io,^ the wood. 11 mattino, the mornino;. // nuvolo, tlie cloud. X' omhrello, the umbrella. X' orecchio^ the ear. // ranbcchio, the frosf. i>o scritto^ the writinn;. // soffitto, the ceiling. Feminine : La casdta, la canestra, la fruUa, la legna, etc. IX. The names of fruit-t rees, ending in o, become femi - nine by changino- o into a : and then they serve to express the fruit. Ex. : — II pesco, the peach-tree ; La pesca, the peach. // melo, the apple-tree ; La mela, the apple. The words fico, p6mo, ardncio, fig-tree and fig, apple- tree and apple, orange-tree and orange, are an exception. X. Very few nouns end in u. These are alwjvys marked with a /{ 4- salute corpo. Hatred is the want of vengeance. The loss of liberty is the £. odio i- bisogno ^ vend(^'tta. -6*/ pdrdita .' liberta greatest of misfortunes. The philosopher seeks his happiness prfma disgrazie. /tc filosofo c^rca r- felicita In the study of (the) nature. (The) Innocence of life ->t ciUvCtvv -;.X.v'~^' natiira. innocenza > vfta takes away the fear of death. (The) Tears are tl>e tacit toglie spav(?nto . lagrime tacito 2 language of grief, linguaggioi dolore. Datemi dell' oro e dell' argento. L' aria della mattina e un Give me gold silver. air morning balsamo nella primavera. Non e arrivato oggi il padre del balm spring. Not Signor Duca? arrived to-day Noi ahhiamo, we have. Voi avete, you have. J^glino hdnno, m., they have. Elleno hdnno, f., they have. Abhidmo noi ? Avete voi ? Hdnno eglino ? Hdnno elleno'^ have we ? have you ? have they ? have they? CONVERSATION. Ohe avke nel canestro ? Ho deW uova net mio canestro. QuaV e ilnome della lavanddia^ H suo nbme e Gatarma. ivke veduto (seen) il cavdllo ? lo V (it) ho veduto. 2 Dove ? Ahbldmo noi sigilli ? SxoJii Dove sono inerti gli uomini ? A vete veduto la carta ? (yJd e quesC (this) Italidno'^ Chi e nel giardino ? Chi e questa ragdzza'^ Avete veduta la mia cdsa ? La cdsa nella strdda del Re ? Nella strdda. Voi 71071 avete sigilli, avete cdrta, Dove il siiolo e molto feriile. St, e nel cassettino. E il cameriere del medico. II cavadenti. E mia sorella. Qiidle cdsa ? No, Slg7i6ra, non V ho veduta. Avete frutta nel vostro giardino'^ No, ma (but) ahhidmo un pesco ed un 7?ielo die 7ie dardnno r d)ino ventiu'o 32 ITALIAN GRAIOIAK. / CHAPTER V. THE PLURAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. t Adjectives ag ree in g^end er and number with th e nouns tliey qualify. After having learned the rules upon the formation of the plural , the scholar will do well to change all the plural nouns of the following exercise into the singular. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. I ciechi hdnno hiioiiY. orecchi^, The blind have good ears. Le lenzuolA sono piditE, The sheets are clean. Le bellE antichit\ di Roma, The beautiful antiquities of Rome. Le hotteglm sono sotto ai-porlici, The shops are under the porticos. X' ardtro fa i solchi jjrofondi, The plough makes deep furrows. J^cco due pdiA. di stivah, Here are two pairs of boots. I fungln ndscono nei hoschi, Mushrooms grow in the woods. Mi dolgono le calcdgnx,^* My heels pain me. Benejici sono i rdggi del sole, The rays of the sun are beneficent. 3Iipidce il giuoco d'egli scdcchi, I like the play of chess. Le pioggE ristorano la terra, The rains refresh the earth. Altri tempi, dltri costumi, Other times, other manners. Imalvdgi non sono felici, The wicked are not happy. GENERAL RULES. I. The greater proportion of nouns and adjectives in Italian, whatever be their gender, form their plural by changing tiie last letter into i; as, — MASC. SINGULAR. MASC. PLURAL. // poeta celehre, the celebrated poet. I poeti celehj^i. II letto morhido, the soft bed. Il'etti morhidi. II mdre hurrascoso, the stormy sea. Imdri hurrascbsi. FEM. FEM. Lapassione infelice, the unhappy passion. Le piassibni infelici. La mdno debole, the feeble hand. Le mdni d'eboli. * The letter % indicates an idiomatic phrase. PLLTvAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 33 The following are exceptions : — n. Feminine nouns and adjectives endinp- in the singu - l ar in tf, m ak e their plural in ef as, — La Scarpa stretta, the narrow shoe. Le scdrpe strette. La bella donna, the handsome woman. Le belle dbnne, m. The nouns ending in 2, in ie, in an accented vowel, and the monosyllables, do not changejtheir termination in the plutali ^^•> ^^ crisi, the crisis ; le crisi, the crises : la citld, the city ; le cittd, the cities : il re, the king ; i re, the kings ; etc. IV. Nouns are also invariable when they immediately follow the ordinal numbers twenty-one, thirty-one, etc. ; as, Ventuno sciido, twenty-one crowns ; trcntimo dolldro, thirty- one dollars. But the noun takes the plural when placed before the number ; as, ScUdi ventuno, dolldri trentimo. Y. The words addio , adieu ; Idro^ their, are invariable ; as, Gli addio, i Idro amici. EUPHONIC RULES. YI. All the nouns, masculine or feminine, ending in m or ga, insert an h in the plural to preserve the hard sound of th e c or a: as, — II mondrca, the monarch ; i monarchi, the monarchs. La mdnica, the sleeve ; le mdniche, the sleeves. La Strega, the sorcerer ; le streghe, the sorcerers. YII. Nouns of two syllables, ending in co or go, tal^ a n h in t he plural ; as, — II bosco, the wood ; ^ bdscki, tlie woods. // Idgo, the lake ; i Idghi, the lakes. Except pdrco, greco, mdgo, — pig, Greek, magician, — which make, in the plural, 2^drci, greci, mdgi. / 34 ITALIAN GR.\j\niAR. VIII. Nouns of more than two syllables, ending in cc or go, also take an h, when these terniiii-itions are preceded by one or more consonants ; as, — U albergo, the hotel. - Gil alheryhi. n rinfresco, the refreshment. I rinfreschi. IX. Nouns ending in co or go, preceded by a vowejj* form their plural in ci ov^gij as, — 11 medico, the physician ; i medici, the physicians. Lo spdrago, the asparagus ; gli sparagi, the asparagus. X. Exception. — Several nouns talve an lb in the plu- ral, though preceded by a vowel ; as. Audio go, analogous ; antico, ancient ; decdlogo, decalogue ; demagdgo, dema- gogue ; etc. XI. Nouns ending in io l o se the final o in all ca ses where this termination is j)receded_by a vowel, or by two or three consonants forming a syllable with io ; as, — Fornaio, Gnoio, Fascia, Mdschio, Artiglio, Astuccio, Vidggio, baker ; leather ; bundle ; boy ; claw ; case ; voyage ; forndi, ciioi, fdsci, nidscM, artigli, astucci, vidggi, bakers. leathers. bundles. boys. claws. cases. voyages. XII. The following nouns, although comprehended m the above class, form an excepti on ^ by changing the io fin al into j : — will. vestibule. doubt. scratch. Improprio, improper. Pdtrio, of the country. Arhitrio, Atrio, Duhhio, Grd fjio ^ Oerchio, Doppio, Prajprio, Secchio, So^, ^ Spicchio, circle. double. proper. milk-pail. a blow. a clove of garlic. * Mend'ico, beggar; eqii'ivoco, eqiiivoke; dialogo, dmlogne; apdZogo, apologue, — are written with or witliout the h: as, Mendici or ynendicln. beggars. Obs. — Some nouns in the singular in ere also end in ero ; as, II pensicre, the thought ; il pensiero : il destricre, the steed ; il destricro : lo scolire. the scholar ; lo scolaro : it cdnsole, the consul; il cdnsolo. When said of bones cleared from the table, osso, bone, makes dssi ; when of a skeleton, it makes ossa. File, thread, makes /"j/a, threads Fill is used when speaking of the edge of cutting instruments. PLURAL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. Si These nouns make, in the plural, arbitrj, dtrj, cerchjf doppj, etc. XIII. This same termination, io, is changed into j when ever it is preceded by a sing le con.-^oiiaut, or two c onsonants not formino; one syllable ; as, — Giudicio^ judgment; giudicj, judgments. Principio, beginning; principj, beginnings. Proverhio^ proverb ; proverbj, proverbs. XIV. Except the following nouns , which make their plural by dropping the final o, because the i is used in the singular only to soften the sound of the c or g : — Pi^egio, Grigio, Indugio, ease. orange, kiss. Agio, _ Ardncio, JBdcio, Barhogio, dotard. ' ^g{o, gray. Cctcio, cheese. Cencioj rag. Disdgio, disquiet. Malvagio, Paldgio, Pertugio, Pregio, Soi^cio, ornament. gray. delay. wicked. palace. hole. merit. mouse. Plural : Agi, ardnci, bdci, cenci, etc. XV. The terminatio n io, in the syllable quio, changes int^_£; as, — Ossequio, respect; osseqiij, respects. Deliquio, fainting-fit; deliqvj, fainting-fits. XVI. If. however, th e a^lient falls on the i of the sylla- ble zo, then JO jj changed into ii for th e plural, aj id the soun d is a little longer tlian ;' ; as, — -rj. .' ,.' ..' /.' y pious, uncle, native, brook. Ptt, zti, naht, rii, ) ^ XVII. Pro per nouns ending in io likew ise take ii iq the ] )lural ; * as, — IDdrii imhii IGdudii h Darius, Tiberius, Claudius. * as proper In Thilian, lis in otlier liingn.a{i;cs, some nouns are vised only in the sin.i^ular number; per names; and the words ^sro/e, offspring; ??zane, morning ; ro6a, luggage ; rosol'ia^ 36 ITALIAN GRAMIMAR. XVIII. The terminatio ns cia and gia drop the i of the plural in the words in which this letter is but slightly pro- nounced.; as, — Z,a coscia, the thigh ; le cosce, the thighs. La spidggia, the shore ; le spidgge, the shores. La cdccia, the chase ; le cdcce, the chases. XIX. But in the words proviJicia, ciri eo^ia , franchigia , province, cherries, immunities, and some others, the i is retained in the plural, b ecause, being disti nctly pronounced in the sin gular, it is nece ssary that it should Ije heard in the plural ; as, Proftncic, ciriegie, franchigie, etc. XX. We must also preserve the i of cia and of gia when i t is accented, and the accent must be strongly marked HB y the voice ; as, — La hugia, the lie ; le hugie, the lies. La farmacia, the pharmacy ; le farmacie, the pharmacies. IRREGULAR PLURALS. XXI. The few nouns which have irregular plurals are : man ; uomini, men. oxen. Womo, LBue, ox ; buoi y\I6glie, wife; mogli, wives. vRfille, thousand ; onila^ thousands. ^L)io, God ; dei, gods. XXH. The possessive adjective pronouns mio. tuo, s^ . my, thy, his, make miei, tudi, su6i, in the plural ; and tlie adjectives tale or cotdle, such, and qudle, which, are in the plural ta li or tdi^ cotcili, or cotdi, qudli or qtiai, XXIII. The following nouns form their plur al in a , and become feminine : — measles. And some are used only in the plural; as, Icalzoni, the trowsers; le rent, the kidnej'S ; i dolci, the sweetmeats ; le forbid, the scissors ; i invert, the victuals ; le tenebre, darkness. Some nouns have a different signification in the plural ; as, II ccppo, the trunk c-f a tree ; i c&ppi, the fetters : il fcrro, the iron ; i firri, the fetters : la gcnte, the people ; le gcnti, the nations • la grcizia, the favor ; le grdzie, the thanks. PLUR^VL OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 37 Un miglidio, Tin centinaio, Un uovo, Un miglio, Un pdio, Uno stdio, j Un moggio, a thousand. a hundred. an e^:":. a mile, a pair, a bushel. a bushel. Le miglidia. Le centindia, Le uova. Le miglia. Le pdia. Le stdia. Le moggia. XXIV. The followino^ masculine nouns have a mascU" l ine plura l in ?*, and a feminine plural in a . The last is more frequently used. \V anello, II hrdccio, ^11 hudello, ' LI ccdcdgno, LI castello, )Ll ciglio, LI coltello, LI corno, LI dito, LI filo^ \Ll memhro, LI 7nuro, L' osso, II porno, II quadreUo, the ring, the arm. the intestine, the heel, the castle, the eyebrow, the knife, the horn, the finger, the thread, the member, the wall, the bone, the apple, the dart. LI fondamento, II fridtOj II fuso, LI gesfo, LI ginocchiOf LI gomito, LI grido, II Idhhro, II legno, LI lenzuolo, II riso, LI sdcco, Lo strido, LI vesiigio, LI vestimento, the base, the fruit, the spindle, the gesture, the knee, the elbow, the cry. the lip. the wood, the sheet, the laugjh. the sack, the cry. the vestige, the garment. Remark. — Coma, in the plural, sio^nifies horns ; cdr - m, instruments i^esta, exploits ; ^esti, gestures ; gdmiia, elbows; gomiti^GwhiU'. mem6ra, members of the body ; memhri, members of an assembly ^ mtiray rampar tsx JMil> walls . READING LESSON. Presso i Romani, i soldati erano agricoltori, e le casiite Among houses -J illustri conservavano sempre i cognomi dei friitti e dei legumi illustrious! preserved always surnames pulse che venivano, a preferenza, coltivati dai loro anten;iti ; t^i came (were) ancestors 38 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. furono i Lentuli, i Fabii, i Pisoni. I regdli pMcano non solo gli presents appease only uomini ma pur anco gli dei. I pittori antichi non usavano nelle even painters 2 ancient i used lore pittnre che quattro colori. Le dohne sono fatte per essere pictures four colors. women rnade to be le compagne e non le schiave degli uomini. Un parroco disse companions slaves curate said alia predica, la Domenica delle palme : lo vi avverto, fratelli, die sermon Palm: I you 2 inform 1 per isfuggire la calca, confessero Lunedi i bugiardi, Martedi to avoid confusion, I shall confess liars gli avari, Mercoledi i mormoratori, Giovedi i ladri, Venerdi avaricious slanderers thieves i discoli, e Sabato gli ubbriaclii. Non si sa s'egli ebbe molti libertines ' drunkards. "We do not know had penitenti. I fanciulli ed i pazzi si figurano che venti franchi e fools imagine francs venti anni abbiano a durar sempre. Ho veduto le dssa di tre years have last always. giovani elefanti. EXERCISE ON THE FORMATION OP THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. \_Tlie singular only is given.'] The face comprehends the forehead, the eyebrows, the eyelids volte eompr^nde palp^bre the nose, the lips, the mouth, the cheeks, the chin, and the ears. f. mdnto X (The) childi'en ought to obey their parents, scholars their fanciullo d^bbono ubbidire genitore teachers, and citizens (to) the laws. When we read certain maestro cittacfefno l<^gge. Quando si l(^ggono c^rti historians, we may say that the human species is composed stdrico, si dir^bbe h umana specie (consists of) consfste of only two or three hundreds of individuals decorated with soltanto di due o tre individuo decorato the title of emperors, kings, popes, generals, and ministers. Men tltolo imperatore ministro. PLURAI. OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 39 are generally idle in countries where the soil is very lertile. sono per lo piu in^rte pa^se dove suolo molto fertile. (The) stars, (the) animals, and even plants were (enumerated) astro animale anche fiirono annoverate among the Egyptian divinities. The walls of Thebes were fra le egiziane Tebe raised by the simple sound of the harp ; the walls of the city fabbricate semplice suono c^tra of Jericho fell down, on the contrary, at the sound of (the) J^rico caddero, in v^ce trumpet. The large sacks are filled with grain. My sisters corno. empiuto grano. have some silver spoons, alcuno arg^nto JVoi sidmo, we are. Voi slete, you are. J^glino sono, they are. CONVERSATION. Chi e questa donna ? ±jla madre del poeta celebre, Avete veduto il re ? Abhidmo veduto il re. E egli Fr anche ? No, e Tedesco (German). Sono i poeti felwi (happy) ? Generalmente non sono felwi. Che hdnno i ciechi'^ I ciechi hdnno huone orecchie Dove ndscono i funahi ? '^fUiUot'tfKXtj I funghi ndscono nei hoschi. Qiidnti cineJl i avete ? /vmU*^^ Ne ho due. Mangidte friitti ? Si, qudndo sono maturi. Qudnti (how many) gibrni fa una settimdna ? Sette. Come si chidmano ? (How are Domenica, Lunedl, Ifartedi^ they called ?) Mercoledl, Giovedi, Venerdi, Sdhato. Ed i mesi qudnti sono ? Dodici. Come si chidmano ? Genndjo, Fehhrdjo, Mdrzo, Apiile, Mdggio, Giugno, LugJio, Agosto, Setteuthre, Ottohre, Novembre, Decern- hre. E le stagioni (seasons) ? Sono qudttro : Primavevd, Es- tdte (or) Stdte, Antunno, Inverno o Verno. 40 ITALIAN GRAIklMAR. / tL CHAPTER yi. THE CASES OF NOUNS. MNEMONIC EXERCISE UPON THE USE OF DI, A^ DA. VI pidce la citta di Parigi ? Does the city of Paris please you ? II fitto DELLE case e cdro, The rent of the houses is dear. VI dico die non ho dandri, I tell you that I have no money. Spoleto non e lontdno da Roma, Spoleto is not far from Rome. Voglio scrivere delle Uttere, I wish to write some letters. lo non voglio hrj£he^ I do not wish cares. Voi non avete fratelU, You have no brothers. Z' uo7no Vive delle sue fatiche, Man lives by (of) his labors. lo non temo puntp di voi, I do not fear you at all. Ecco un diziondrio da tdsca, Here is a pocket dictionary. UAribsto e ilpittore dell A na- Ariosto is the painter of nature. tura, Z' occhio del padrone inqrdss g' The eye of the master fattens il cavdllo, ^ the horse. Mi e, sorella dal Igip del pddre, She is a sister on my father's e non dal cqMq della md- side, but not on the side of dre, my mother. Egli ha posto della polvere da He has put (some) gunpowder f^UiAJkJ^scjnoppo in una scdtola da in a tobacco-box. tobacco, The several relations of the Italian nmiTia ^ rp expressed by the prepositions di, of; a^ tox da. from, or by . The nominative and obiective are distinguished by the pla ce they occupy in the sentence . 1. The nominative denotes the relation of a subject to a finite verb ; as, Maria dma, Mary loves. 2. The genitive denotes origin, possession, and other re- lations, which in English are expressed by the preposition of, or by the possessive case ; as, I libri di "into fratello, my brother's books. THE CASES OF NOUNS. 41 3. The dative denotes that to or for which any thing is, oris done; as, JEgli mi ddva il libro, he gave me the book. 4. The accusative is either the object of an active verb or of certain prepositions, or the subject of an infinitive. 5. The vocative is the form applied to the name of any object addressed. 6. The ablative denotes privation and other relations, expressed in English by the prepositions with, from, in^ or by. Prop er_no uns are varied with the prepositions only ; common nouns, with the preposition and article^. Variation of the proper noun Boston : — Nominative Boston, Boston. Relation of Possession . Di Boston, of Boston. „ „ Attribution . A Boston, to Boston. „ „ Derivation . Da Boston, from (or by) Boston. Accusative Boston, Boston. Variation of a common noun in the plural : — Nominative Ilihri, the books. Relation of Possession . Dei libri, of the books. „ „ Attribution . Ai libri, to the books. „ „ Derivation . Dai lihri, from (or by) the books. Accusative I libri, the books. I. Di, the sign of the genitive, is used , — 1st, When it denotes possession ; as, La cctsa di mio pddre, my father's house ; di chi e questo cappello ? whose hat is this? e del servitSre, it is the servant's. 2d, W hg^n the noun or verb that follows di expresses a quality, limitation, or modification of the noun that pre - cedes_ it ; as, Qucchidio d' argento, a silver spoon; e tempo di pranzdre, it is dinner-time. II. The pr eposition d i, with or without the definite article, translates the words some ^nSTany when they do not_express a determinate quantity^ of a certain thing ; as, — / 42 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Dcitemi del pane, Give me some bread. Non hevete di quel vino. Do not drink any of that wine. III. If some and any have the signification of a .f&w, various, certain, a little, &>q.., they are rendered in Italian h^qualche before a singular noun ;„ by tin poco di^ or tin po' di, before a collective noun ; and by certi, divcrsij, alcuni, and vdrii, or their feminine form, before pjui'al nouns, according to their gender; as, — Ho pranzato con qualche amico, I have dined with some friend or con alcuni amici, or friends. Prendete un poco di vmo. Take some wine. IV. ^^en ther e is only a simple designatio n of the object, without any idea o f quantity , — that Fs to say, when the word some or any is omitted in English, — generally no art icle is used in It al ian . Bevete vino o hirra'^ Do you drink wine or beer? Chi ha dandri ha amici. He who has money has friends. V. The preposition di is often used after w ords requir- ing a diit'erent preposition, and after verbs requiring a direct object. In such cases, the word that governs di is understood, and the phrase is elliptica l, as may be seen in tlie following sentences : — Temere del popolo, for temere To fear the anger of the peo- LO SDEGNO del popolo, pie. Saper di musica, di algebra, etc., To know a little music, alge- for sap ere UN Poco di, etc. bra, etc. YI. Sometimes, especially in familiar conversation, the preposition di takes the place of the article il or lo before an infinitive, which, being the subject of a sentence, does not com e at the b eginnino; of it ; as, — E facile DI studidre, di parldre. It is easy to study, to speak, for e fdcile lo studidre, IL parldre. When the preposition di is thus substituted for the arti- cle, the phrase is elliptical, and stands for JS fdcile l'azione di studidre. ~~~ 4 THE CASES OF NOUNS. 43 YII. It is verj comm on in It alian to use di instead of da whenever euphony requires it, particularly if the defi- nite article can be omitted after the preposition^ This, however, is never done unless fu6ri, via, or some such word requh'ing di, is easily understood. Thus they say : — Venire di casa ; that is, fuori To come out of the house. or via di casa for ddlla casa, or da casa. VIII. The preposition di is also frequently translated after verbs l 3y/b/% meaning on account of', by in, when it does not signify within ; by icith^ not expressing the idea of company or union / and occasionally by on . Ella vesfe di nero, She dresses in black. JVon mi biasi7ndte di questo, ' Do not blame me for this. Furono provveduti di tutto, or They were provided luith every d' ogni cosa, thing. Tl bambino fu nutrito di Idtte, The child was fed on milk. IX. ^, or ad, the sign of the dative, expresses direc- tion or aspiration towards some object, a nd correspo nds to the preposi tionT to , Andidmo a Ndpoli, Let us go to Naples. Scinvete ad un amico. Write to a friend. X. The preposition A is also translated in, for, from, and of after a verb, when it represents an action done against, towards, or to the damage of a person ; the direct object of such a verb being easily understood ; * as, — Non pdsso credere a quel che I cannot believe in what you dite, say. Pensdte a lui e provvedete ai suoi Think of him, and provide for bisogni, his wants. XI. JDa, the sign ofjhe_ablative, expresses derivation, separation, or dependence, and corresponds principally to the preposition from, which In most cases is translated; as, — * Remark. —The expressions, little BT little^ two BY two, etc., are rendered in Ital ian, poco A poco^ due A due, etc. 44 ITALIAN GRAMVIAE. Da un giorno alV ctltro, From one day to another. Noji dipendo da nessuno, I do not depend on any one. XII. Z)a is used before a noun which indicates use, employment , or the destinat ion of a thing; ; as , — Cavdllo da sella, saddle-horse. Carta da Uttere, letter-paper. Xm. The English p r epositions a t and with, meaning " at the house of;" and by, either expressing the relation between a passive verb and its subject, or conveying the idea of solitude and exclusion, — are translated by da, Sta DA mio padre. He lives at my father's. Lo fara da se, He will do it by himself. XIV. Li]c e_ and as^ when thev signify ^ in the manner of," "as it becomes," and followed by a noun used in an indefinite sense, are generally rendered by da; as, — Portdtevi da udmo, Bear yourself like a man. Fdtela da padrone, Act as a master. Xz^e, followed by the pronouns himself, herself, our- setves, etc., is thus translated in Italian: Like himself, DA quel che e, or DA queW u6mo cK egli e, etc. READING LESSON. Molte commediole, compdste dall' Ariosto che le recitava in Many little comedies, composed • them recited compagnia de' sudi fratelli e delle siie sorelle, fiirono il preludio brothers his sisters, were prelude delle immortali sue dpere. Finalmente V elegante orazidne, che his works. pronuncio intdrno alle regole che si deggiono seguire, ed he pronounced concerning rules one ought to follow intdrno alio scdpo che ogniin propdrre si debbe nei prdpri stiidi, scope every one proposes ought own fece condscere alia citta di Ferrara, sua patria, ch' essa allevava made to know country reared THE CASES OF NOUNS. 15 un genio, il quale avrcbbela illustmta; ed il padre siio god(';va genius who -would have (her) enjoyed in segreto della consolazidne d' iidire da' suoi coiicittadini hearing fellow-citizens proporre il pioprio figliuolo ai loro, come un modello da imitarsi. to propose own son as model imitate. EXERCISE. 1. Ill Italy there are immense plains, majestic rivers, very high mountains, lakes, cascades, forests, volcanoes, and beauty in all varieties. 2. A lady, speaking of a preacher whom she had heard from a great distance, said, " He spoke to me with* his hand, and. 1 listened with^ my eyes." 3. It is difficult to satisfy every one's desire in (the) great enterprises. 4. May God send us good princes, and may the devil not give them the fancy of wishing to be heroes ! 5. (The) hypocrites cover themselves with the mask of (the) devotion. 6. Never leave flowers in a sleeping-chamber. 7. The greater part of (the) men live like crazy people, and die like fools. 8. One of the miseries of the rich is to be always deceived. VOCABULARY. 1. There are, vi sono ; immense \Aams, pianura stermindta; majestic rivers, Jiume maestoso. 2. A lady, una Signora ; speaking, parldndo ; a preacher whom she had heard, un predicatbre cli ella avea inteso ; far off, inolto distdnte ; said, disse ; he has spoken to me, egli mi ha parldto (with the hands) ; I have listened to him, lo V ho aS' coUdto (with the eyes). 3. Great enterprises, grdnd^ impresa ; it is difficult, e cb&a difficile ; to satisfy, secondare ; desire, desiderio ; all, tutti. 4. May God send us, Dio ci mdndi ; good prince, huono principe ; devil, didvolo ; not give them, non d'la loro, 6. Cover themselves, si c6p7^ono. 6. Never leave, non lascidte jndi. 7. Live, vivono ; die, mubiono. 8. Always deceived, sempre inganndti. 46 ITALIAN GRAMaiAR. Dove ? where ? Che ? what ? a^? who? Sovente, often. CONVERSATION. Dove era la Signora ? Molto distdnte dal predicatore. Con che si coprono gV ipocriti ? Colla mdschera delta divozione. /hO: Qudnti sensi avete ? Come si ckidmano ? Ahhidmo del vino ? E tempo di pranzdre ? Che cdne e quesfo?' Che 7'ecitdva Aribsto in com- pagn'ia cZe' suoi frateUi e delle sue sorelle 2 Dove sono maraviglie in bgni genere f Che sono esse (tjiey) ? Cinque. Udito, vista, odordto, gusto, tdtto. Avete una hotte di vino. lo ho pranzdto con alciini amici, E un cdne da cdccia. Mblte commedible, che furono il preliidio delle immortdli sue op ere. In Itdlia. Fiumi maestbsi, cascdte, selves volcdni, etc. Egli mi ha parldto cblla mdno. Che disse una Sigtibra dJ un predicatore ? Qiidli 'persbne sbno sovente in- ganndte ? Qudli ubmini vivono come La maggibr parte degli ubmini. Le persbne ricche. pazzi r? CHxiPTER yil. PRONOUNS. PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE. lo, tu, egli, esso, ella, essa, nrji, voi, eglino an d essi, cUeno and ess e. I, thou, he, he o;- it, she, she or it, we, you. they, m., MNEMONIC EXERCISE. they, f. Chi hdtte ? Son lO, Who knocks ? It is I. Se non voictc cantdr vox, can- If you do not wish to sing, / tero lO, will sing. Non duUtdte : pejiseremo Noi ad Do not fear : we will think of ogni cosa, every thing. PRONOUNS. 47 Cost diceva ancbr lO, Vol farete quel die vorro lO, lo voylio fare come fate voi, Non ci va egli, e non ci andrete nemmeno voi, Avete voi roha'^ Avete quat- trini ? Che bella cosa il poter dire, Co7iidndo lO ! Gli farete conoscere chi sono lO e 'chi siete voi, Siete vol il padrone di questo albergo ? Pqiche volete che dica lO, diro 10, Vol avete miglior vista che non ho 10, / also said so. Tou will do what / wish. / wish to do as you do. He will not go ; and you will not go either. Have you pro[)erty ? Have you money ? How beautiful it is to say, / command ! Let him know Avho / am, and who you are. Are you the master of this ho- tel? As you wish that / say it, / will say it. You have better sight than L PEONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE (CLASS I.). Me, te, Kii, lei, noi, vol, Idro ; se.* iie, thee, him, her, us, you, tiiem ; "himself, herself, itself, themselves. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Che cosa volete da me ? Ella, e fiiQri di se ddlla rdbbia, Or ora sono a vox, Fdtemi la jinezza di pranzdr MECO, lo dmo il mio amico quanta me STESSO, Si, fate voi, io mi rimetto in VOI, mi confido in voi, Egli non sa far niilla da SE, Lascidte fare a me, non dubi- tdte, Degnate far colazibne con N(5i, What do you wish of me ? She is beside hei'self with anger. I am with you in a moment. Do me the pleasure to dine with me. I love my friend as much as myself. Yes, do what you will, I agree with you, I confide in you. He does not know how to do any thing by himself Let me do it: never fear (do not doubt). Have the kindness to breakfas; with us. * These pronouns are called disjunctive. 48 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. jEgli non domanda voi, Non dlco a voi, Signor mio, Verrd co7i voi se volete, To non voglio partire da VOI, Qudnto avete sj^eso per lei, He does not ask for you. I do not speak to you, deai' sir. I will go with you, if yon w^ish. I do not wish to leave you. How much have you spent for her. PRONOUNS* m THE OBJECTIVE (CLASS II.). Mi. ti , gli. lo Me, thee, him, xncl.^ hii la. Li, Them, m.. CI w ne, VI, you, him or it, her, ind., her or it, us^ le, loro : si. them, f., them, ind. ; himself, herself, itself, themselves. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Voi VI siete dimenticdto di me, Non MI dimenticherb DI VOI, Gli e nolo un jiglio , Che male vi lio jdtio io ? Davvero, io non vi capiscOy Mi place la 7nia libertd,'\ Fate pur quel che vi pare, La fortuna (yi_vu6l bene, Vi raccomdndo di far questo, Che cosa yi ha egli detto Di me ? Potete dir loro che entrino, Io VI Idscio, perche ho fretta, Ho scritto una lettera che mi prenu comdnda il Signor Aiutaii che ti aiu- Chc mi Tizio"^ Dio dice tero, Domdni gli daro da prdnzo Mi ricordo cid che mi avete detto, Amico, CI rivedremo stasera, Ti accerto che non le diro nidla, You have forgotten me. I will not forget you. A son is born to him. What ill have I done you ? Truly, I do not understand yow. I love my liberty. Do as seems good to you. Fortune wishes us well. 1 recommend you to do this. What has he said to yon of rne f You can tell them to come in. I leave you, for I am in a hurry. I have written a letter which is important to me. What does Mr. Tizio wish of me? God says, Help thyself, and I will help thee. T will give hifn dinner to-mor- ro^\\ I remember what you have said to me. Friend, we shall see each other this evening. I assure you that I shall say nothing to her. * These pronouns are called coDJunctive. t Mi place, it pleases me. PRONOUNS. 49 PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE NOMINATIVE. I. lo, Til, JEgli, esso a. essa. N6U Vol, £!c/lino, essi, Elleiio, esse, lo dor mo, Tii prdnzi, Egli balla, Ella ride, Noi cantidmo, Voi pens cite, Essi scrivono, Esse pdrlano, I sleep. Thou dinest. He dances. She laughs. We sing. You think. They write. / ±JUeno, esse, j 'i'hey, f. ; Esse pdjiano, They speak. Remark, — Of these pr onouns only Esso in all its forms, Ndi and ^di, can be used as o1)jcctive. II. jSj^-Zz, with its feminine and plural forms, can only be used for persons. It translat es the subiecti ve pronoun U before verljs used impersonally ; and it is often, for euphony, contracted to di, or e'. Very seldom it is ex- pressed with really impersonal verbs. Ex. : Egli e difficile, it is difficult ; Pidve e tudna, it rains and thunders. III. Ella mayjbe used to translate it before the verb s essere, jpdfere, e semhrdre when followed by a feminine n^urT; as, Ella mi sembra disgrdzia inaudita, it seems to me a misfortune unheard of. In every other case, Esso and Essa with their plural must be used.^as they can represent both persons and things, whilst Egli and Ella only represent persons. lY. The use of gli for egli, of gli diW^ egli for e^l ino^ and of ia or le for ella or elleno^ is jusftfiedbj the_ex- ample of good writers, ancient and modern, and by the ])ractice of good society. In addressing persons, the Tuscans employ the contractions la and le for dlla and elleno in the sense of you : as, La 7ni perddni, I beg your pardon; Le mi dicano, (ladies or gentlemen), tell me. v. If _the num be r of the person is sufficiently indicated, cither by the termmation ot the verb, or by any othcr_cir- cumstance, tlie subjoctivc pronou n is gcncrally^ omittcd. 5 50 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. But when there is antithesis or contrast implied between two or more verbs in different persons, then the pronouns representing the various subjec ts c annot be suppressed. Ex. : JEssa uscird e voi sta?'ete in cdsa, she will go out and you will stay at home. VI. The preceding rule must be observed when the stress of the voice is to belaid on the subjec t of a ver b, iiT which c ase the~i3 ronoun is often put after j/t. Ex. : J^ssa sola pud dir queste cose, or qiicste cose le pud dir essa, she alone can say such things. VII. Tlic eni})liasis often expressed in English hy do or did, and the exclusive meaning given to a pronouja Jjy the word self, are rendered in Italian, either by merely placing the subject after the verb, or by the adjectives stesso and medesimo,^ Ex. : Dite ora cid che pensdte v6i, or dite cid che voi stesso pensdte, say now what you do tliink ; Lo fard egli, or egli medesimo lo fard, he will do it himself. This rule applies also to nouns, as may be seen in the following examples : Aspettdte che venga il padrSne, or che il padrone stesso venga, wait until the master comes himself. VIII. The words himself^ herself, itself, and themselves ^ can always be translated by stesso and medesimol after a n oun or a pronoun, and must agree with it in 8;ende r and number . JbJx. : iSuo pddre stesso lo dice, his father him- self says so. After the verbs essere and par ere , the same pronouns can be translated by desso, dessa, dessi, aiid desse, according to the gender of the noun to which they are put in apposition. Ex. : Non e piil desso, he is no longer himself ; Mi par dessa, it seems to me it is she, or she herself. IX. In interrogative phrases, implying the desire ainl purpose of obtaining information about any thing, the subjective pronoun is either placed after the verb; as, Anderd egli domdni ? shall he go to-morrow ? — or it is suppressed altogether, and the question marked by the inflection of the voice, which is always very distinct in Italian. But if the question is put by persons acquainted already with tlie fact inquired about, the pronoun sliould PRONOUNS. 51 be expressed and placed before the verb. Ex. : EHi anderci domdni ? Tutti lo aspettano, he will go to-mor- row ? Every one expects him. X. The subjective pronouiis are replaced l)y the o23- jectiye^ in the following cases: 1. After t lie adverbs covie, siccdme, and qndnto^ when no verb follows them : as, Erano maliziosi come lai, they were malicious as he was ; Se cg-Ii fosse come te, if lie were like thee. 2. VVhen they govern an infniitive: as, Sapendo me dmar lei, knowing that I love her ; Udendo lui con gli dltri esser morto, hearing that he died with the otliers. 3. After the verb esse re preceded by its su bject : as, S' io fossi l{d, if I were he ; Credeva che Pietro fosse te, I thought Peter was you. XI. In addressing, the Italians employ either the second perso n'or the t hird' Tlie second person singular, repre-i sented by Tu, Thou, denotes affection and familiarity, and always implies that the speaker is equal or superior to tlie individual thus addressed. Great love can only justify an inferior in using it towards a superior, — children, for instance, towards their parents and grand- parents. The second person plural corresponds to it when several persons are spoken to ; and it is also used generally with any class of society, correcting its apparent familiarity with some expression of respect when address-, ing a person entitled to some consideration, as, foi' in- stance : Cchne state, Signore? How do you do, sir? Che mi commanddte, Signdra ? What can I do for youJ my lady ?" In poetry and elevated prose the rules are the' same as in Enoiish. o s XII. Thejhird person sin gular is used in addressing any one that doe's not TjcTon g to the low classes ; and it is expressed by the feminine pronoun J5^/fe, repres-enting the words Vdstra Signoria, or their contraction A^ossignorfa (V.S.), which would sound too formal if used very fre- quently in conversation. The same feminine pronoun precedes the verb in the third person when the individual addi'cssed is entitled to be treated as Eccellcnza, Altrzza, Grand^zza, or witli some other feminine word. IT many 52 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. are to be addressed in this way, the third person plural iis substituted for the singular. PERSONAL PRONOUNS IN THE OBJECTIVE. XIII. The pronouns of the first class may be used as direct or indirect regimen ; that is, they may be governed by the verb, or by a preposition, as the following exam- ples will show : — CerccHe me ? Are you looking; for me ? PenscHe a 7ne ? Do you think of rae ? When the prono uns me, te, a nd se are governed by tjie preposition con, they may be prefixed and joined to it, tTmsjijrriicQy teco, seco. JSfosco and vdsco, for con ndi and con vol, are now entirely left to poetry. XLY. The pronouns of the second class are employed either as direct or indn-ect regimen of the verb ; but they can never be governed by a preposition. They serve to conjugate pronominal or reflective verbs, and in such case mi, ti si, ci, vi, si, mean respectively myself, thyself, him- self; or, herself, ourselves, yourself ; or, yourselves and themselves. Ex. : — lo mi ricordo, I remember. Mi mando dei fori, He sent me some flowers. TliS-Ii ronoun l6ro belono: s to b oth classes ; it can there- fore be us ed for the direct or the indirect objec t, with a pre position or witEbut, as the case may require. XY. When the objective pronoun is emphatic, when the preposition cannot be suppressed, and when the re is antithesis between two pronouns, a proiiomi of the first class must be used ; in other cases, one of the sec.ond class is to be preferred. READING LESSON. L' uomo scioperato e 1' uomo piu affaceendato. Egli ha idle most occupied. cinquanta amiei che si crede in obbligo di coltivare. fifty friends whose (friendship) '^ believes obliged PRONOUNS. 53 Vi dira il iiome di tiitti i ricamatori, di tutti gli spcziuli dclla will give (tell) embroiderers apothecaries citta. Egli vi provvedera il sarto, il calzolaio, la lavandaia ; se will procure siete ammalato, condurra da voi un medico ; siete addolorato, sick, will conduct afflicted egli non vi lascia, fintantoche non vi abbia veduto ridere. leaves, until have seen to laugh. S' incaricliera di tutte le vostre compre, e finira coll' andare a will take charge purchases will finish going letto stracco di aver lavorato tanto. L' allegrezza ci consola e bed tired worked so much. joy ci tiene in sanita ; le cure vane ci opprimono, distiirbano 1' animo keeps health cares oppress nostro e ci traggono tosto nella tomba. drag quickly EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. When Paulus Emilius repudiated Papiria, his wife, some persons were astonished that he should separate himself from so modest and so handsome a w^oman ; but Emilius, showing them his shoe, said, " You see that it is well made, but none of you know where it hurts me." 2. It was reported to Frederick the Great, that some one had spoken ill of him. He asked if this person had a hundred thousand men. He was answered, "No." — "Ah! well," added the kino-, " I can do nothinsj with him : if he had a hundred thousand men, I would declare war against him." 3. A young man who passed for rich, but who was laden with debts, sat very pensive, the evening before his betrothal, in his fu- ture mother-in-law's parlor. Several times she said to him, " CJie cosa avete ? " " What have you ? " (meaning, " What is the matter with you ? ") To which he continually answered, " No7i ho nienfe" " I have nothing, " (meaning, " Nothing is the matter with me.") Eight days after his marriage, his mother-in-law, seeing a crowd of creditors, said to him, " Sir, you have deceived me." — " Mad- am," added he, "I well informed you that I had notliing; and T repeated the same thing to you more than ten times in your parlor before my betrothal." 5* 54 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. VOCABULARY. 1. Repudiated, ripudio ; some persons, alcuni ; were aston- ished, si maraviglidvano ; should separate himself, si separasse ; so pretty a woman, una donna cost vezzosa ; modest, modesta ; showing, mostrcindo ; his, la sua ; said, disse ; you see, voi vedke ; well made, hen fdtta ; however, ^e;'o ; no one, nessuno ; knows where, sa dove ; hurts, offenda. 2. It was reported, yi6 riferito ; Frederick the Great, Fede/ico i! Grande ; had spoken ill, sparldto ; if this person, se costiii ; a hundred thousand, cento mila ; he was, gli fu ; no, di no ; well, bene ; added, soggiunse ; I cannot, non posso ; nothing, nulla ; had, avesse ; would declare war, inuoverei guerra. 3. A young man, un giovinotto ; who passed for, tenuto per ; laden, cdrico ; debt, debito ; was pensive, stdva tutto pensieroso ; evening before, vigilia ; of his betrothal, dei suoi spojisdli ; par- lor, salotto ; of his future mother-in-law, della sua futura suocera ; many times, parecchie volte ; sir,, signore ; always, sempre ; eight tlays after, otto giorni dopo ; seeing arrive, vedendo capitdre ; a crowd, una turba ; deceived, inganndta ; I well informed you, vi feci pur avvertita ; repeated, ripetei ; more than, j^mrfi; ten, died ; in your, nel vostro ; before, prima de\ CONVERSAZIONE. CM bdtte ? Son io. Che cdsa volete da me ? Voglio far colazione con voi, Che cbsa mi avete detto ? Non me ne ricordo. Pa gate voi il prdnzo ? Si, lo pdgo io. 3Ii aspettdte ? Non vi aspetto. Di chi pdrla egli? Egli pdrla di noi. Come si chidma questa ragdzza ? Ella si chidma Carolina, A chi scrivero io? Al pddre di 3£aria. Ti penti tu ? • Io mi pento. Ci divertidmo noi ? Noi non ci divertidmo. Chi vi dira il nome di tutti gli X' uomo scioperdto vi dira il spezidli della cittd ? nome di tutti. Siete voi il padrone di questa Sono il padrone di questo at- cdsa ? bergo. Avete il bastone di mio fratel- Io non ho il suo bastone, voi lo ? V avete. Volete ddrmi un anello ? Non voglio ddrvi un anello^ vi darb (will give) un libra. PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. 55 CHAPTER VIII. PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. [ Continuation of Preceding Lesson.'] To avoid several monosyllables, and for the sake of e \ iphony, tlie Italians unite several words togethe r. This union constitutes one of the chief beauties of the Ian2;ua2:e. For exainple : th e imperative ddteinelo is composed of date 'iiie loj^ give it to me ; and, because the accent falls on the first syllable, the word has all the strength of the imperative, the desire of prompt obedience. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. La riverisco divotamente^ In die pbsso servirLA ? Come VE LA passdte ? To ME LA pdsso benone, Vi do la huona notte, Non VI voglio incomoddre, IhrudtevENK indietro, Glielo posso dir lO, AnddteQ.\.\YA.O a dir VOI, L'evawi'^i dindnzi, temerdrio^ Non MI comparke piu dindnzi, Ohe VE NE pdre ? RagionidmoLA. qui fra di NOI, Faccidmo'LA da hubni amici, Foi non me la darete ad in- tendere, I have the honor to salute you. How can I serve you ? How do you do ? I am very well. I wish you good night. I do not wisli to trouble you. Turn back. I can tell it to him myself. Go tell it to him yourself. Go out of my sight, insolent one. Never appear before me again. How does it seem to vou ? Let us reason here together. Let us act like good friends. You will not make me believe it I. A pronoun stands for a person or thing Lo or iV, Le, Ne. him, it; To lo ret/o, her, it ; Tu la conosci, them m. ; JVoi li vedidmo, them, /. ; lo le aspelto, of it ; Voi N E riderete, I see it or him. Thou kiiowest her. We see them. I expect them. You will Uiu^h about Oi or vi^ of it it. To CI or VI penso,l think of it. r- ft b ITALIAN GRAMMAR. • II. Tliej)ronoun il or lo may be contracted and blouded with the negative non into the monosyllable nol: as, JVol so, I do not know it ; Nol vedo, I do not see him. When not thus contracted, lo is used, as it always is before verbs beginning with s impure, or a vowel. Before other verbs lo is generally preferred to z7, unless euphony should otherwise require. Ex. : Lo riconobbi siibito die 7 vidi, I recognized him as soon as I saw him ; Nol vidi e per conseguenza non lo salutdi, I did not see him, and conse- quently I saluted him not ; 11 chiese e lo spedi a suo fratello^ he asked for him and sent him to his brother. III. It is also by euphony that we should be guided i n the elision of pro nouns before verbs, whenever t h e niea ii- ing allows it. The rules that govern the elision of the article apply also to pronouns, with the exceptions__that may result from the verbs having no gender. Lo vide e V amo is properly said, because the gender of the pronoun elided is already determined by the object of vide. U amo qudnto una mddre pud amdr-e would not be correct, owing to the double meaning that the pronoun thus elided as- sumes ; vfz., She loved him or her as much as a mother can love. lY. Though the pronoun gli signifies to jiini^ it is als o u sed for ^ie feminine le w hen prefixed to an d blende d with lo, la, lih ,J§: ^^' In sucli case, the letter e is in- serted between the two pronouns ; thus : — Glieio ; V6i glielo darete, You will give it to him or her. Giiela ; lo (jU^U manderb, I will send them to her or him. Glie'le; Glie'le vendera, He will sell them to liim or her. Gliem; Vdi gliene comprerele, You will buy her or him some. Lene ^nstQSid of gliene is o ccasi onally used forjth e feminine. Y. In a grea,t number of Italian phrases, the pronoun la refers to a feminine noun which is not expressed, but it is easily supplied bjjhe reade r or listener . Ex. : — lo ve LA dico schietta, I tell it to you frankly (the truth). Voi ve LA godete, ITou enjoy it (life). lo me LA bdtto, I beat it (retreat) ; I run away. Tlie words veritd, vita, and ritirdta are understood. PROJSOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. o7 VI. Eii]jh oiiy r equ ires th at the i of tlie^ pronouns mi, tij^si, tu',_iii,_jihould -GhangeL the i into e when they are followed by the pronouns /o, l a, li, ne; as, — Jlfe Zo, it to me ; Tu me lo ddi, Thou givest it to me. Te la, it to thee ; lo te la do^ I give it to thee. Se li, them to him ; Egli se li fard dare, lie will cause them to be given to himself. Ce lie, us of it ; Noi ce ne occupidnio, We occupy ourselves with it. Vele, them to you ; lo ve le presto, I lend them to you. VII. M d, tel, selj^cel ,jvely are written befbrea word which commences Avith a conso nant , instead of me lo, teloj^ etc. ; as, EgTTTe I figura , "oY^seTo Jig ura , he iigures it to himself; io vel diceva, or ve lo diceva, I said it to you. VIII. Some ancient authors have often pl acgd_the pro- nouns lo, la, li, le, before 7ni, ti, si, ci, vi^\\Q,u. euphony permitted. Tlius7~instead of "saymg, Uio te lo perduni, may God pardon you ; they have said, Dio il ti perdoni. IX. All th e_pron() u ns mi, ti, si, ci, vi, lo, la, gli, le^ ne, me To^ telo^ se lo Tetc., whe ther simple^ or compoun d, are generally pla ced before the ve r b, except when used with an infiniti ve, a gerund, the second person singular , and the first and seco nd plural of the imperative : in w liich cases they are placed after the verb to which they ara joined, so as to make o ne word ; thw s, — Parldr'n.i., To speak to me. ParZdrMENE, To speak to me of it. ScriveteL^, Writ« to her. KicordidmoCl, Let us remember. CotnprdteG'LlEL.O, Buy it for him. GuarddteLO, Loolc at him. Cercdndo'LO, Seeking him. VendcndoGX,lBljA, Selling it to him. ilfosiraZeCENE, Show us some. DdfeMELO, Give it to me. I-cmieGLlELA, Take it from her. PensidMOCl, Let us think of it. Observe that the infinitive loses the final e when the pronoun is joinedjto^it ; ahd^TTlTie'infinitrve terminates in ri'e, as cond'Orre, it loses the syllable_rej and we say, Condurmi, conduct me. X. To express " give it to me," "give it to us," etc., the conjunctive pronoun is placed after the personal in this way ; Ddte^iFJjk ddteCVA^O. 58 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. XI. The pronoun is likewise placed after the word ecco, to which it is joined; ixs,' Eccomi, eccolo, behold me, behold him. XII. Withjthejie.2:ation non, these p ronouns are^ plagad before the verb, except when the verb is in the infi nitive ; as, — Non GLiELO domdndate, Do not ask it of him. Non ME NE date, Do not give me any. Non LO faccidmo, Let us not make it. Non LO facendoj or non faceiidoh, Not making it. Xm. These pronouns are also jo ined to the past par- ti ciple when' th e auxiliary is understood; as, MaUegrdtosi^ having rejoiced! Remark. — These pronouns admit of other transposi- tions, and very much assist in expressing an energetic, rapid, or gentle sentiment. For example, the phrase " I say it " may be constructed thus : — Lo dico, to express a grave sentiment. 11 dicOf to give a mild form to the phrase. Dicolo, to impress with the rapidity of the thought. Dicol, to join rapidity with sweetness. The learner should, however, be careful not to place the ^^ronoun after any other than the imp erative, in fixiitiye, and o^erund.. XIY. The first con sonant of the pronoun should b e doubled whenever it is joined to a verb of one syllable, or one_which li as the grave accent upon the fin al vo \yel ; as, Dillo, ddmini, fdllo, tell it, give me, do it^ XY. The posi tion of the pronoun can be changed f or the sake of eup hony ; as, — To lo voglio vedere, or io vbglio I wish to see him. ved'erlo, lo gliene posso parldre, or to I can speak to him of it. posso parldrgliene, PRONOUNS, PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE. 50 XVI. In certa in cases, the personal pronoun is chang ed into the possessive ; as, Mio *wxilqrddo , in spite of me : and, on the contrary, the possessive is sometimes changed into the personal; as, Cavdtevi il vestito, take off your coat. READING LESSON. Tra le varie nazloni del mondo la pulltezza lia introdotto politeness introduced infiniti iisi di salutare. Plauto parla di popoli che si salutavano modes salutation. Plautus speaks tirandosi forte 1' orecchia. I Franchi si strappavano un pulling strong (hard) ear. pulled out capello, e lo presentavano alia persona che volevano salutare. hair presented they wished Al Giappone un conoscente vi saliita togliendosi dal piede lina Japan acquaintance taking foot pantofola ; e nelle Indie, egli viene a prendervi per la barba ; slipper comes to take beard ; altri si salutano voltandosi la scliiena. Gl' isol;ini del grande others turning back. islanders oceano fregano il lore naso con quelle della persona salutata, rub ~ ' nose that oppiire gli soffiano nell' orecchio. GU abitanti di Horn si or blow inhabitants coricano col ventre a terra, e la maggior parte dei negri si lie down belly greater negroes prendouo a vicenda ledlta e le fanno schricchiolare. L' Inglese take turn make crack. Englislnnan ■t)' in un eccesso d' amicizia vi afferra per la mano e ve la scuote fit friendship seizes shalces vigorosaraente come se volesse strapparvi il braccio. Questa if he wished to pull out arm. This gentilezza fa la veci degli abbracci dei Frances! e degl' Italiani. courtesy takes the place embraces EXERCISE. 1. A thoughtless wag saw three blind peoj)lo in the street, wliOj keeping together, went begging. " Stop," said lie to thcni ; "take this crown, divide it between you, and [)ray God for me." 60 ITALIAN GllAJVIMAR. As to the crown, he gave it to neither of them. The blind men all thanked him at once, and ran quickly into a tavern, where they ordered a breakfast. When they were well satisfied, one said to the others, " Let him who has the crown pay the fare ; '* but each one answered, "I have it not: thou hast it." From hard words they came to blows ; and gave so many blows with their sticks, that they broke every thing that was on the table, to tJie great detriment of the host. 2. The authors of the century of Louis XIV. have expressed great thoughts in simple words. VOCABULARY. 1. Humorist, hurlone ; thoughtless, spensierato ; saw in, vide per; keeping together, stretti insieme ; went begging, se ne anddvano accattdndo ; stop, fermatevi ; take, togliete ; divide it, spartitelo ; neither of them, nessuno ; thanked, ringraziarono ; all at once, concordemente ; they ran, corsero ; a breakfast, da cola- zione ; well satisfied, ben satolli ; let him who, dii ; pay, pdghi ; but each one answered, al die ciascuno risjyondeudo ; thou hast it. tu V hai ; they came, vennero ; they gave, diedero ; so many, tcinte ; blows with a stick, bastoncHe ; everything that was, futto cio die si trovdva ; to the great detriment, etc., con gran ddnno deir oste. 2. Have expressed, hdnno espresso. CONVERSAZIONE. Che e V Italia ? H giardmo d* Europa. Che avete ? Ho una rbsa, Avke il libro ? Non ho il libro, ho la penna. E giovane la sorella del Signbre ? Si, ella e giovane. Che fdnno gV isoldni del grdiide J^glino fregano il loro ndso con oceano qudndo salutano ? quello della persona^ salutdta. E gli ahitdnti di Horn ? Si coricano ventre a terra. Che vide un burlone ? J^gli vide tre ciedii. Che dfisse il burlone ? Pregdte D'lo per me. A dii diede egli uno scudo ? Egli non lo diede a iiessuno. Come saliitano gli Inglesi ? Vi afferrano per la mdno e ve la scuotano. QudV e la prima legge ? La legge di Dio e la prima legge. Tribnfa essa sempre ? Si, tosto o tdrdi. THE ADJECTIVE. 61 CHAPTER IX. THE ADJECTIVE — L' " ADDIETTIVO. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Godo di vedervi in hiiona salute, I am glad to see you well. Passeremo per la piu corta, We will take the shortest. Parlidinoci schietto, Let us speak clearly. Perche avete tanta premura'^ Why are you so hurried? Quanti rinni avete ? How old are you ? I rtcchi hdnno molti amici, The rich have many friends. II hello pidce a tutti, The beautiful pleases all. 3I6lfi pochi fdnno un assdi^ * A little repeated makes much. GV ingrdti hdnno poca memoria, Ungrateful people have short memories. Chi perdona ai catiwi, nubce ai He who pardons the wicked, huoni, injures the good. Buon dl, hiiona sera, felice notte, Good day, good evening, good night. Per molti lafatica e poco sdna, Labor is not healthy for many ^ people. E uno che ha pocJii pari, He is a man who has few equals. ADJECTIVES : THEIR NIBIBER, GEXDEE, ETC. I. Italian adjectives a ll end in o or e. Those ending in o ch ange the o into a for t h e Feminine : those in_g preserve the same form in both genders. " The plural of adjectives is formed like that of iiouns ; as, — SINGULAR. Popolo libero ed indipendente, Free and independent people. Nazione libera ed indipendente, Free and independent nation. PLURAL. Pbpoli liberi ed indipendenti, Free and independent peoples. Nazibni lihere ed i7idipendenti , Free and independent nations. * Idioms and proverbs are marked i 62 ITALIAN GRA31MAR. II. Some adjectives end either in e or in o ; as, Via- lente oFmoIenfo. In this case one might say, Uu uo'ino violente, una ddnna viole7ite^ or un uomo violento, una d6nna violSnta^ a violent man, a violent woman. III. The only adjectives terminating in i are pdri^ equal, and disp dri or iini :)dri^ unequ al. These are inva- .'i'iable, whatever be the gender or the number of the noun (to which they belong. IV. The word 'pdi^i is^ often used as a noun . It then has a possessive adjective aft er i t ; as, Tin pdri mio^ un l^dri vostro, del j)dri nostri, a man like me, like you, persons like us; cosi si trdtta cdn un pdri mio? is it thus that one acts with a person of my rank ? V. Substantives used as adjectives, ending i n t(^re , change tpt'e i nto trice forme fem inine ; as, A.ut6re, au- thor ; autince, authoress, — except dottdre, fattore, doc- tor, farmer ; which make dottoressa^ fattoressa. Other substantives used as adjectives form their feminine in essa. Such are, Poeta, poet ; poetessa^ poetess ; bar one, baron ; baronessa, etc. YI. Adjectives of q ri ant ity, — as, Qudnto, how much; tdnto, so much; altrettdnto, as much; tr6j)po, too much; pdco, little; tnolto, much, — ag ree with thei r TTpun s ; as, — Tdnto orgoglio ; tdnta paura, So much pride; so much fear. Tanti sciocchi ; tdnte volte, So many fools ; so many times. Poco sdngue ; poca came, Little blood ; little meat. Molti disgusti., Much (or many) chagrins. Altrettanti solddti ; altrettdnte As many soldiers ; as many donne, women. Trdppo vento ; troppe ceremdme, Too much wind ; too many ceremonies. Qudnto vino ? qucinte honta ? How much wine ? how much kindness ? VII. ' ^e word " such " is sonietime s translated hj ^^si fdtto, a; si fdtto, a; as, — TPIE ADJECTIVE. 63 Guardatevi da cosi fdtta rihal- Guard yourself against such a ddglia, rabblti. VIII. The adjective alqudnto ( ^m^ul^r) signifies a lit- Jle_; alqudnti (plural), some . ~ Parecchi , jKirecchieJ^f^ m^y_ahojiULUJ^ ami c^\ be replaced by tlie word piu, more; as, Vi erano pakecchie hallerine, or Piu bai- ler ine, there were many dancers. IX. Tl ie adjective mezzo always precedes and ap^ee s w ith tlic no un which it limits ; but it may be invariable wlien tiie Tioun is understood : as, ^Tna mezza bottisrHa, half a bottle ; ilna botifg-lia e mezza or mezzo, a bottle and a half. If the noun is not „£xpresscd, the adjective mezzo takes no article . X. The last syllable of the words hello ^ ^^jj:^£^gl^^j^« must be suppressed before niasculine nouns commencing_ with a consonant. The adjective grdnde, great, is written gran before masculine and feminine nou ns, both in the singular and plural ; as7 SINGULAR. Bel giardhio, Quel pcddzzo, San Pietro, fine garden, this palace. Saint Peter. Gran hirhone, Gran regma, great villain. PLUKAL. JBei or he'' giardini. Quel or que' paldzzi, Sdnti Pietri. Gran birboni. Gran regine. great queen. XL Biiono^ g^Qo d, loses the o before a consonaj it ; as, II huoh vino fcTTudn sdiigue, good wine makes good blood. XII. To avoid the union of too many consonants, the last syllable of these adjectives is not retrenched before (nouns commencing with 5, when followed by another con- sonant; as, — SINGULAR. Bello sposo, Quello straniero, Grande strepito, Grande spdda, Son to Stefano, Bnnno snolare. handsome spouse, that stranger, great noise, great sword. Saint Stephen, good scliolar. PLURAL. Begli sposi. Quelli stranieri. Grdndi strep'iii. Grdndi spade. Sd?iti Stefau'L Budni scoldri. 64 ITALIAN GllAMMAR. XIII. T he final vowel o.f the preceding: adjectiv es ia retrenclied be fore a vowel, and replaced by a n apostroph e ; as, BelV ucchio, fine eye ; quelV dsino, that ass ; grdnd' ^w^^9(??'c>, great emph-e ; etc. / XIV. No fixed rules can be given to determine the place of the adjective, the Italians being guided by the ear. Usage generally places the adjectives expressive of form, color, and savor, after the noun; as, — Tavola quadrdta, Ahito turchmo, Color giallo, Un Signore italidno, Acqua inzuccherata, Una rosa hidnca, square table. blue coat. yellow color. an Italian gentleman. sugared water. a white rose. REMARKS. The following observations will assist the student : — The Italian adjective can be pl aced before or after the noun, andmust^ a ^ree with it in gender and nuiniBer : euphony determines its pos itipirr~' Adjectives de noting materials, nations, dignity, color, taste, et c., are placed afteFlhe nouns ; as, (Jajppello bianco, white hat ; un udmo cieco, a blind man. Parti ciples and adjectives, preceded by an adverb, may be ])lace d after the noun ; as, Una cdsa trdppo piccola, too sniiill a house. The position of some adjectives alters their signification ; as, — a certain (that is any) thing. a certain (sure) thing. something important. a great thing. an honest man. a polite man. my only daughter. my daughter alone. Una certa cosa, Una cosa certa, Gran cosa, Una cdsa grdnde, Un galantudmo, Un udmo galdnte, La sola mia ftglia, Mia figlia sola, Un jier udmo, Un udmo Jiero, Un pdvero udmo, Un uomo povero, a savage man. a proud man. an unhappy man. a poor man. THE ADJECTIVE. 65 READING LESSON. Giambattista Pigna, scrittore celebre del fortunato secolo writer century decimo sesto ci ha tramandato il ritratto seguente dell' Ariosto. sixteenth transmitted portrait following L' Ariosto,* in quanto alia forma e all' aspetto del corpo avea la had statura alta, la testa calva, i capelli neri e crespi, la fronte tall bald black ciu-ly spaziosa, le ciglia alte e sottili, gli occlii in dentro, neri, vivaci, thin e giocondi, il naso aquilino grande e curvo, le labbra raccolte, lively lips contracted i denti bianchi ed equali, le guance scarne e di colore quasi cheeks hollow almost olivastro, la barba un pdco rara cbe non cingea il mento iuf ino olive-colored thin covered chin alle orecchie, il collo ben proporzionato, le spalle larghe e neck well shoulders alquanto piegate, quali sdgliono avere quasi tutti quelli che, somewhat curved, as are accustomed to have those da fanciulli, hanno cominciato a stare inchiodati in sui libri : Le nailed mdni asciutte, i fianchi stretti. Egli dipinto dalla mano dell' thin hips narrow. painted eccellente Tiziano, pare che ancor sia vivo. Un popolo fanatico seems still alive. e superstizioso e un arma terribile nelle mani d' un ddspota. Ove la pdlle del leone non basta bisogna aggiiingervi quella When skin sufficient to add della volpe. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. Osley, a famous beggar of London, made a fortune by using the following stratagem. He placed himself in streets -where there was the greatest concourse of fashionable people ; and, when he saw elegant ladies, he asked charity of them. If they refused, * A few proper nouns of very remarkable people take the definite article in Italian ; as, II Dante, VAridstOj etc. 6* Q6 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. " Madam," said he to one, " in the name of your beautiful black eyes ; " to another, " in the name of your fine hair ; " to this one, " in the name of your rosy lips ; " and, to that one, " in the name of your admirable figure." Finally came the divine legs, the charming feet, the majestic carriage : nothing was forgotten, and he returned home with his purse well filled. 2. A drunkard, who wished to excuse himself to his confessor for his too great love of wine, reasoned thus singularly : " My father, good wine makes good blood, good blood produces good humor, good humor creates good thoughts, good thoughts produce good works, and good works conduct man to heaven : then (the) good wine leads man to heaven." VOCABULARY. 1. Made, fece ; following, seguente ; he placed himself, egli si appostava ; where there was, ove era; fashionable people, hel mondo ; when he saw, allorche vedeva ; refused, ricusavano ; admirable, mirdbile ; came, venivano ; forgotten, dimenticato. 2. Drunkard, hevitore ; wished, voUa ; too great love of wine, troppo grdnde amore del vino ; reasoned thus singularly, facea questo curioso arg omenta ; makes, fa; produces, produce; creates, y*a ndscere ; conduct, menano. C ON VERS AZI6nE. Sono gli Americdni Viberi ? Si sono liheri ed indipendenti. Che proclamazione e quella di Si parla molto deW eniancipa' cid si pariah zione dei poveri* neri. Che predicatore avete ? Ahhidmo un hrdvo predicatore. Come si chidma (called) ? Z' amico dei pbveri. Dov* e la rostra Signora mddre'? E nella chiesa di San Paolo, ' Cosa e il V astro Signor pddre'^ E autdre. E sua mdglie (wife) ? E dottaressa. Qudnti dnni ha Maria? Ha ndve dnni. Che statura ha ella ? Ha la statura piccola. Di che colore e il sua dhito ? H sua nudvo dbito e turchino. Che hudna cdsa ha egli fdtto f Nan pdsso (I cannot) dtrvelo (tell you). Chi € questa cdra Janciidlina? Luisina. Ella e mia nipdte. Che dcchi celesti / Si, ella ha V ciria d' un angio- letta. * The repetition of the objective strengthens its expression ; as, Povero^ poor ; pdverc pdvero, very poor ADJECTIVES : THEIR COMPARATIVES. 67 CHAPTER X. ADJECTIVES: THEIR COMPARATIVES. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Vi sono piu poveri die ricchi^ There are more poor than rich. Le donne sono piii compassio- Women are more compassion- nevoli degli uommi, ate than men. E meglio morire die temer sem- It is better to die than always pi'e, to fear. Quanto piit vi 2)6)iso, tdnto piii The more I think of it, the mi vien rdhhia, more I am enraged. Tali dohhidmo essere qudli vo- We ought to be such as we glidmo comparire, wish to appear. 11 sole e piii grdnde della terra,, The sun is larger than the earth. La terra non e cost piccola The earth is not as small as the come la lima, moon. La fdma di sua hellezza e mi- The renown of her beauty is nore assdi della verifd, much below the truth. / creditori m.iglior 7nem6ria Creditors have a better memo- hdnno die i debitori, ry than debtors. E meglio fare invidia die pieta, It is better to cause envy than pity- V usurdio e peggiore del Iddro, The usurer is worse than the thief. II vmo e il mio maggior ne- Wine is my greatest enemy. mico, THE COMPARISONS OF ADJECTIVES. I. A comparison can only be made between two objects. An object may be more beautiful, less beautiful, and as j beautiful as another. There are, therefore, tlu-ec degrees ': of comparison, — the degrees of superiority, of inferiority, I and of equality. II. The comparative^ of_superiority is indicated by the 'Words pill, more; molto piit or assdi piii ov vie piii, much more"; miglidre, better (a.) ; maggidre, greater; \ meglio, better (ad.). QS ITiy:.IAN GRAJNOIAR. III. The comparative of inferiority is expressed by the words mefio or mdnco^ less ; molto meno or assdi 7neno or vie meno, much less ; pe^^zore, worse (a.) ; mindre^ smaller; peggio, worse (ad.). lY. The conj unction than, which joins the two term s of comparison, is jbranslated by di when it is followed by a pronoun or a possessive or dernonstratis^Ljadjeiitiv He is much happier than you, E molto piii felice di voi. Your sister is prettier than Vostra sorella e piu hella delhi mine, mta. There are no people more cred- No7i v' e gente piii creduJe di ulous than those who have an quella die ha interesse di es- interest in being deceived, sere inganndta. V. Than is_sometimes translated by che, especially if the pTirase is elliptical. Di, however, may always b e used. YI. If thayi is followed by any other word, and there is a complement of the phrase understood, it can be trans- lated by di or .by che; as in the following examples : — Is man more happy than wo- E V uomo piiu felice della don- man (is happy ) ? na'^ or che la donna ? The stomach digests water more Lo stomaco diger'isce piii facil- easily than wine, mente V dcqua che il vino. YII. It is better to use che for than, when the compari - son is made between two verbs, twoadiecti yes. or tw o adverbs ; as, — ""'^ There are more poor than rich, Y^' sono piib poveri che ricchi. It is better late than never, E meglio tdrdi che mai^ It is better to save a culpable E meglio salvdre un colpevole, person, than to condemn an che condanndre un Innocent e innocent one, YIIL. If the natural order of the words is inverted,— that is to say, if the verb is placed before the subjec t. — it^ is better to use che. This rule may be applied to phrases where than is~Tollowed by a demonstrative ad- jective ; as, — ADJECTIVES : THEIR COMrAIlATIVES. 69 He who attacks, always has Piu cinimo ha scmpre colui ^he more courage than he who assdlta, che coliti che si di- delends himself, fende, IX. To translate " more than three years," " more than j twenty thousand men," etc., we say, Three years and I more, tw enty thousand men and more, t7'e dnni e pin; ' venti mila udmini e piit, or j^'^u di tre anni, qIq., piil che tre anni. X. The comparative of equality is indicated by cosi o r tdnto: and the conjunction than is translated by cdme^ i cosi has b een used; and by qudnto, if ja2?/_Q_has been used r~as, — The eye of the domestic never Z' occhio del servitore non vede sees as well as the eye of the mdi cosi bene come V occhio master, del padrone; or, non vede 7nui tdtito bene qudnto V occhio, etc. XL Sometimes the word cosz or tdnto is suppressed; as, — ~ A skin as white as snow, Una p'elle bidnca come or qudn- to la neve. XII. When the words as many and as refer to a noun, as many mustl5e rendered by tdnto, and as by qudnto^ makin o' them agree in gender and number with the noun ; as, — He has as many debts as there £gli ha tdnti ; or, altrettanti are stars in the sky, debiti qudnte sdno le stelle net cielo. See_ the strawberries. Take as Ecco delle frdgole. Prendetene many as you wdsli, qudnte volete. XIII. In English we say (with the complement under- stood) , — I have as much money as you Naples is not as populous as (have). Paris (is). In Italian, the complement is generally expressed in similar phrases ; as, — lo ho tdnti danciri qudnti ne Ndpoli non ha tdnta jmpola- avete voi, zione qudnta ne ha Par'iyi. 70 ITALIAN GRA^BLiR. XIV. Sometimes tdnto or qudnto is placed before moi'c or less, so as to gi\Q more ene ro\y to the expression ; as in the fo llowino- phra ses : — Qudnto j^/w uno e ignordnte, The more ignorant a person tdnto piu egli e pronto nel is, the more ready he is to giudicdre, " judge. X' aria e tdnto piu densa qudn- The air is much more dense as to e piii propinqua dlla terra, it is nearer the earth. XV. As well as, and as much as, signifying as, are t ranslated by co s i, cdtne, or qudnto, and are invariab le ; as, I know him as well as you, io lo condsco cdme or qudnto vdi. One can say, also, lo lo condsco al 'par di vdi, READING LESSON. I Romani, nei loro stravizzi, bevevano tanti bicchieri di vino banquets, drank quante erano le lettere del nome dei loro amici ai quali face- they vano brindisi. Catone, il censore, che vedea (sorgere) made (drank) honor (health). saw to come la pompa della mensa, disse, che era assai malagevole il salvare difficult save una citta dove un pesce si vendeva piu caro di un bue. Di fish was sold due negoziatori in polltica vince sempre il piu scaltro ; cioe chi conquers alwaj^s sharp ; that is sa meglio ingannare 1' altro. II diavolo non e cosi briitto come to cheat si dipinge. Non e cosa nel mondo piu preziosa del tempo. La painted. noja e forse il maggior male che sia uscito dal vasello di Pan- ennui went dora. I sogni sono le immagini del di, gUc4ste e corrotte. L' dro, spoiled corrupted. come il fuoco, e buon servitore ma cattivo padrone. Gli deste una gave llbbra, datemene altrettanto. ADJECTIVES : THEIK COMPARATIVES. 71 EXERCISE FOR TRA*NSLATION. 1. It is difficult to decide if irresolution renders man more unhappy than despicable, and if it is more inconvenient to take a bad part than not to take any. 2. Usage is always introduced by the ignorant, who form the greatest number (in society). 3. Two consolations solace the heart of the unhappy : one is, to recall the time when he lived more happily ; and the other, to see that there are some in the world more unhappy than he. 4. The city of Naples is more beautiful in darkness than London is when the sun shines. 5. The fatter the kitchen, the leaner the testament. 6. Since we cannot make men what we would have them, it is necessary to bear with them as they are, and make the best of them. VOCABULARY. 1. Man, se; renders, ya; unhappy, infelice ; despicable, dis- jpregevole; if there are, se vi sono ; to take a bad part, appigli- drsi ad un cattivo -partito ; not to take any, non appiglidrsi ad alcimo. 2. Usage, iiso ; introduced by, introdotto da. o. Solace, sollevano ; is to recall, il rimemh-arsi ; when (in which), in cm ; he lived, visse ; to see (to think), i^e/isc^re; more unhappy, con ynaggior doglia. 6. Since, poiche ; we can, possidmo ; we would, vorremmo ; we must, conviene ; bear with, tollerdre. CONVERSAZIONE. Chi e pill feltce, V udmo o la 1/ uno non e piii felice che V donna ? dltra. Qudl e meglio per lo stdmaco, Per i giovani V dcqua e 7neglio V dcqua o il vmo ? che il vino. Vi sono molti ricclii in Lon- Si^ ma vi sono piii poveri che dra ? ricchi. Pensdte (do you think) che io Siete molto piii infelice di me. ^ sono infelice? E hella la Signorina Rosa ? Si, ma vdsfra sorella e piii hella ancora. E hrutta la Ibro zia ? Non e cdsi hrutta come si dice (they say). 72 ITALIAN GRAMMAK. Hdnno i creditori huona memO' JEssi hdnno mvglior memoria ria'^ die % dehitori. Avete nemici ? II vino e il m'lo maggior nemtco. Qucd e la cosa piil preziosa net Nel mondo non e cosa piu pre- mondo ? ziosa del tempo. Qudnte hrdccia (yards) di ques- Ne ho quante ne voglio (I W'ish). to pdnno volete ? Luigi, siete studioso ? ' Si, ma qudnto piil studio (I study) tdnto meno impdro (I learn). CHAPTER XI. THE ADJECTnrES: SUPERLATIVES. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Parigi e una bellissirna cittd, Paris is a most beautiful city. Avete pochissimi rigudrdi, You have very little regard. Fu ubmo integerrimo, He was an upright man. Di cattivo egli diventb pessimo, From bad he has become worse. Godo mH ottima salute, I enjoy excellent health. E uomo di pochissime parole, He is a man of very few words. Ho veduto una helVissima ragdz- I have seen a very beautiful za, girl. Vi serviro puntualissimamen- I will serve you most punctu- re, ally. Infelicissimo e V uomo die non Very unhappy is the man who ha amici, has no friends. Mi rincresce assaissimo dH egli I am very sorry that he is porta, goiiig away. Quella gente e di ottimo cuore, These people have an excel- lent heart. Notdte dgni minima cosa, Take notice of the smallest thing. A tutti il riso e gratissimo, A smile is very agreeable to everybody. Venne una dirottissima pidg- There was a pouring rain. THE ADJECTIVES : SUrEKLATIVES. 7a THE SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 1. Cattivissi?no, 2. Savissimo, 3. Fresclmsimo, 4. Larghissimo, 7n6lto cattivo, molto sdvio, 7n6Ito fresco, molto Icirgo, asscd caitivOf asscH sdvio, assdi fresco, assdi Idrgo, very bad. very wise, very fresh, very large. I. We see, by the above examples, that the superla- tive is formed by issimo, molto, or assdi. Issimo, taken from the Latin, is united to the adjective, the final vowel of which is retrenched. When the adjective ends in to, both vowels are dropped. If the adjective ends in co or go, the letter h is placed after the c or g, to preserve the hard sound of these letters. The words amwo and nemico, friend and enemy, are exceptions : they make ainicissi' tno, nemicissimo. II. Verii, before a past par ticiple, is rendered by mdlt o or assdij as. He is very much esteemed by every one, egli e nidlto stimdto da tfdti. We cannot say, Egli e stiniaf issimo da tutti. But, if the past participle is used simply as a qualificative adjective, then it receives the superlative issimo; and we say, Mlo sti')natissi7no si- giidre, III. The following words express the superlative of themselves : — Ottimo, very good. Infimo, Pessimo, very bad. Egregio, Sommo, highest. Mdssimo, Estremo, extreme. Miserrimo, Acerrimo, Integerrimo, Stupendo. Insigae, very good. very bad. highest. extreme. wonderful. renowned. very low. very noble, supreme, very unhappy, very bitter, entirely honest. rV. The particle s^ra (extra) is prefixed to a few- words, giving them a superlative signification ; as, Stra- i'icco, very rich ; stincdtto, very much cooked. Y. The adverbs terminating in meiite (corresponding to ly in English), from tlie Latin mens, which is femi- nine, form their superlative missima; as, grandissima- Mirnte. 74 ITALIAN GRAjVOIAR. Remark. — The termination issmio serves in Italian for the superlative absolute, and can never be translated in English by those superlatives ending in st or est, which are of the relative kind. The latter must be rendered by the adjective, preceded by il pih, la piii, etc. ; as, H jnu cdrto p)oema (not cortissimo poe'ma), the shortest poem. THE SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. VI. This superlative is formed by the words il piil or il nieno, suppressing the article when jdiu or me no comes after the noun ; as, Demdstene fu V oratdre jnil eloquhite della Grecia, Demosthenes was the most elo- quent orator of Greece. But, if the adjective is placed before the noun, then the article is used ; as, Demdstene fu il pih eloquente oratore della Grecia. The words mdssimo, injimo, are also superlative rela- tives, and signify the gi^eatest, the lowest; as, — To lo vedro col mdssimo pia- I shall see him with the great- cere, est pleasure. READING LESSON. D Duca d' Epernon, prima di morire, scrisse al cardinale di before dying, wrote Richelieu, e termino la lettera col " vostro umilissimo ed obbidi- entissimo servo," ma ricordandosi che il cardinale non gli avea remembermg dato die dell' affezionatissimo, mando lino apposta per given sent on purpose (an express) trattenere la lettera che era gia partita, la principio da 6apo, to retain recommenced sottoscrisse affezionatissimo, e mori contento. subscribed died Un cattivissimo autore diede in luce un libro, che avea gave (brought) light per titolo, " dell' anima delle bestie : " Voltaire, avendolo letto, disse ad un amico che gliene chiedeva il suo parere, 1' autore e un asked t. THE ADJECTIVES : SUPEIILATIVES. 75 ottimo cittadino, ma non e abbastanza informtito della storia del sufficiently informed siio paese. lo non conosco miglior preservativo contro la noja che di know against ennui adempire esattissimamente i proprj doveri. to fulfil own duties. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. Louis XI. and Ferdinand of Arragon were both cruel and perfidious, notwithstanding the first took the title of Very Chris- tian, and the second that of Catholic. 2. The study of languages is very useful and very agreeable. 3. It has been said, that a nation of wise men would be the most foolish people in the world, as an army of captains would be the worst army. 4. When there was an eclipse of the moon, the Romans were accustomed to recall its light by beating upon copper vases in a very noisy manner, and by raising towards heaven a great num- ber of fiambeaus and lighted firebrands. 5. A three days' ftist would make a coward of the bravest man on earth. 6. The language of a people is the most important monument of its history. VOCABULARY. 1. Louis XL, Ludovico undecimo ; Ferdinand of Arragon, Ferdindndo d' Arragona ; notwithstanding, nonostdnte ; took, prese ; that, qiiello. 2. Agreeable, piacevole. 3. It has been smd, fit detto ; foolish, pdzzo ; as, come; worst, il jnu cattivo. 4. There was, succedeva (succeeded) ; were accustomed, sole- vano ; recall, richiamdre ; light, cldarbre ; by beating, col hat- fere; very noisy, strepitosamente ; copper, 7'dme; to raise, sollevdre; flambeau, face ; lighted, acceso. 5. Three, w whatever, whatsoever. 7) 5> whosoever, whatsoever. nothing. one. another. some, some one, somebody. every one, everybody. j> J) » no one, nobody. J) 3J J) 3> II. The following are used in both numbers : — SINGULAR. Tale, m. and f. Gotdle, m. and f. Alcuno, m. Taluno, m. Oer^o, m. Stesso, m. Medesimo, m. Altro, m. Tutto^ m. Alqudnto, m. Tdnto, m. Cotcmto, m. Altrettdnto, m. Molto, m. Troppo, m. alcwia, f. taluna, f. certo, f. stessa, f. medesima, f. a^i^ra, f, . n the earth, others upon the waves. These words all require the verb in the singular. INDEFIJSITE ADJECTIVE PliONOUNS. 117 VII. The word " nothing," employed negatively, may sometimes be translated by che; the verb being preceded by non, and sometimes by c6sa. The idle have nothing to do, I pigri non hdnno che fare. He who is innocent has nothing Chi e innocente non ha che to fear, temere. VIII. Nulla and niente are sometimes used with an article ; as, Sempronio rose from nothing, Seawprdnio ^ sdrto dal nulla. The following phrases are thus trans-* lated : — He is a man of nothing, E un iiomo di niente. A man good for nothing, Un uomo da niente. He has quarrelled with us for a S^e corrucciato con noi perim trifle, mdla, or per una hngatteUa. This man is nothing to me, Non ho alcana ajjinita, or re- lazione con lid. IX. Si is generally considered as an indefinite pro- noun, and is used both for the masculine and feminine gender, singular and plural : it is equivalent to the Eng- lish words " one," " we," " people," " they ; " as, — Come si e detto, As we have said. Si parldva di guerra^ People talked of war. Si loderd molto il suo co7^dggio, They will praise his courage very much. Si vede che'siete un galantuomo, One sees that you are a gentle- man. But, in these and similar phrases, si holds the place of a passive proposition, and may be equally well rendered in English by " it is," " it was," " it will be ; " as, — Si cred'evi cosi general nieiite. It was genei-ally so believed. Si dice che la pace e gia fer- It is said that the peace is mdta, already (oncluded. X. JSFon, when need in a sentence expressing an in- definite meaning, is always placed at the commencement ; as, Non si jmo far mdla, one can do nothing. 118 ITALIAN GkAJ^LMzVR. XI. "To US," "to you," is rendered by c^, vi, and is placed before the indefinite pronoun si; but "of it," "of him," "of her," ^*of them," is translated by we, and is placed after si, which is changed into se; as, — They do not speak to you, Non vi si p aria. They do not speak of it, Non se ne pdrla. Xn. The indefinite pronoun cannot be translated by si when it is followed by the reflective pronoun si, as si si would not be euphonious. It is then necessary to adopt another form, according to the sense of the phrase. Thus, to translate "Man believes himself happy when he lives in opulence, but he deceives himself," we can say, Uno or tale or dltri or V u6mo si crede felice qudndo vive nelV opulenza, ma s^ ingdnna; or gli udmini, or alcimi si credono felici qudndo essi vivono nelV opidenza; or n6i ci credidmo felici qudndo vividmo nelV opidenza, inia g' ingannidmo. READING LESSON. voi, chiunque slate, poveri o ricchi, pdpoli o principi, you may be ricordatevi che la falce della morte miete nell' iimile capanna remember harvests come nei superbi palagi. Un gentiluomo era travagliato dalla podagra. Tutti gli tormented consigliavano di lasciar 1' uso delle carni salate, ma egli rispon- advised leave off salted deva che nei dolori della sua malattia era assai contento di potersela pigliare con qiialche cosa, e che arrabbiandosi quando to be able to blame getting angry col presciutto e quando col salame si sentiva bello e confortato. felt Nei paesi dispotici si sofFre m61to e si grida poco ; nei paesi suffers complains liberi, si softre poco e si grida molto. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 119 I grandl sono cdme quel mullni eretti siille montagne, i quali erected non danno farina se non quando si da loro del vento. give gives Alcuni si divertivano in casa di una sigiiora a troviire delle differenze ingegnose da un oggetto ad un altro. " Qual difFe- renza," disse la Signora, " si potrebbe fare fra me ed un oriuolo." — could make " Signora," egli le rispose, " un oriu61o indica le ore, e appresso near di v6i, si dimenticano." forgets. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. There is not a man who can say, I have need of no one. 2. There is nothing more dangerous than to have for enemies those whom we have laden with benefits. 3. Every man may presume with reason, that no one can ever attain to a perfect knowledge of all the secrets and all the riches of nature. 4. The same deed, the same word, awakens remembrances agreeable to some, and sad to others. Whosoever looked at Ca- ligula's forehead, excited in him sudden anger, because this action reminded him of his baldness, which he wished to conceal from everybody ; but he who looked at the forehead of Scipio Afri- canus, gave him great pleasure, because he had a warlike wound there, — a witness of liis valor and his glory. 5. Some one, in speaking of a tyrant who enjoyed the reputa- tion of liberality, said, "Judge how much liberality dominates in this man ; Avho gives not only his own spoils, but even those of others." 6. Envy is certainly the basest and the most cruel of all the passions, since there is hardly any person who may not have in himself something to excite the passion of the envious. 7. Never do to others that which you would not wisli others should do to you. 8. One day a lady wrote to her husband this letter, which may serve for a perfect model of laconism : " Having nothing to do, I write to you : leaving nothing to say to you, I finish." 120 ITALTAN GRAMMAR. VOCABULARY. 1. There is not, non v* e ; can, possa ; need, hisogno. 2. Laden with benefits, henejicdto. 3. May, puo ; presume, presumere ; attain, pervemre. 4. Same deed, stesso,fdtto ; awakens, svecjUa ; looked at, guar- ddva ; excited in him sudden anger, suscitdva in lui suhito sdegno ; reminded him of, gli rammentdva ; to conceal, nas- condere ; Scipione V Africdno ; great pleasure, inagndnimo pia- cere ; warlike, marzidle. 5. Judge, pensdte ; dominsites, regna ; not on\j, non solamente ; gives, dona ; his own spoils, la roba sua ; even, a7ic6ra. 6. There is hardly, v' e quasi ; to excite, da suscitdre ; envious, invidioso. 7. Never do, non fdte ; wish, vorreste, 8. Wrote, scrisse ; may serve, pud servire ; I write, scrwo. CONVERSAZIONE. Con cM siete venuto ? Con nessuno. Avete dltre amiche ? Non ne ho dltre. Chi ha detto cid ? Ognuno lo dice. Sdno le vdstt^e dice sorelle ricche ? U ima e ricca, V dltra e pdvera. Come sdno i commanddnti ? Geldsi gli uni degli dltri. Volete (will you) aver qudlche No, vi ringrdzio (thank you), cdsa ? ^ non vdglio niente. Qualcuno picchia, anddte a ve- E la Signora K. dere chi e ? Non credesi die avremo (shall Non e prohdhile, have) la pdce'^ Avete ritrovdtolelettere per dute? Ne ho ritrovdte alcHne, ma la maggidr parte sd7io perdute. Sdno fratelli que sti due uomini'^ Non so (I do not know); si rassoraigliano (resemble) V uno air dltro. Che si dice (say) di nudvo ? Non ho letto (read) nessun giorndle dggi, ma si dice che ci sdno cattive nuove. Dove V avete inteso ? In cdsa d' un amico e per via d' una lettera privdta. PREPOSITIONS. 121 CHAPTER XIX. THE PREPOSITIONS DI, A, DA. A thorough acquaintance with these prepositions is abso- lutely necessary, and therefore requires the attention of the pupil : first, because the English and Italians differ some- what in the use of them ; and, second, because they are the signs which establish the connection between our ideas, and the slightest error in their interpretation would en- tirely change the sense of a phrase/ * MNEMONIC EXERCISE. 10 son DEL vostro parere, I am of your opinion. • Vol J7ii pagdte Bi cattiva^noneta/ You pay me with ingratitude. 11 mondo va da se stesso, The world goes by itself. Si e caccidto a ridere^ He burst out laughing. Le Alpi sepdrano V Italia dIl- The Alps separate Italy from LA Frmicia, France. Lapolvere da ccinnone fu inven- Gunpowder was invented by a tdta DA un frdte, friar. Voi non avete ragione da far You have no good reason to valere, give. Anddte A vedere die cosa c' e, Go, see what it is. Voi mi trattdte per da piu die You do me more honor than I sono., deserve. lo ho ditto da scherzo e voi fdte I said it in joke, and you took davvero, it in earnest. Dutemi la mia veste da camera Give me my night-gown and e il herrettmo da notte^ night-cap. D All.' opera si condsce il tnaes- We know the master by the tro, work. Sieie voi maritdta o da mari- Are you married, or to be tdre ? married ? E venuto nessuno a domanddre Has no one come to ask for me ? di me ? * Observe that some of the prepositions govern one, two, or three cases. 11 122 ITALIAN GEAMIklAR. PKEPOSITIONS IN COMMON USE. Di,* of. Accdnto, aside, about, near, by. A,\ to, in, at. Alldto, 5' 55 JJ J> Da,X from, by, on. at. Attorno, about, around. I^h^ in, on, upon. Dattorno, 55 55 Oo?i, with. Addosso, on, upon, about. Per, through, by. on ac- Presso, near, almost. count of, in rder Appresso, 55 55 to, for. Vic (no. 55 55 Su, on, upon. Lungi, far, from. Sopra, JJ 55 Lontdno, 55 55 Sotto, under. Appo, at, with, in compari Fra, amongst, within. son with. Tra, 55 5 5 Verso, ^ towards. Infra, in, in about. Oltra, beyond, besides. Intra, 55 55 55 Oltre, 55 W Prima, before. Lungo, along. Dopp, after. Fino, till, until, as far as. Anzi, before, in presence of. Sino, 55 55 55 V 55 Inncmzi, 55 55 55 55 Infino, 55 55 55 55 » Dindnzi 5 55 55 55 55 Insino, 55 55 55 J> » Avdnti, 55 55 55 55 Contra,** against. Davdnti 5 55^ 55 55 55 Contro, 55 Dikro, behind. A-frbnte,^\ ■ opposite. Didietro ' . " . Rimpetto, 55 Entro, in, within. Dlrimpetto, „ Dentro, 55 55 Senza, ' \ without. Fuora, out of, without, besides. ^dlvo. except, excepted. Fuori, 55 55 55 55 Fccetto, 55 55 Infuori, except, excepted. Tranne, 55 J5 The pupil is requested to commit to memory the phrases given under the various prepositions. * From the Celtic rfe, a sign of qualification. t Prom the Celtic a, near, joining with. i From the Celtic da, at. § From tlie Celtic en, in. II From the Latin apud, Celtic ap, joint, attached. IT From the Latin versus, Celtic gicero, to turn. ** From the Celtic con, a sign of opposition ; and track, side. tt From the Latin frons, Celtic fron, hefore. %% And sanza and san (used by old writers). From the Latin st»e, Celtic sy, "want priyation. — Bac/ii. PREPOSITIONS. 123 DI.* I. Domanddre di iino, donianddi'e la presenza di iino, to ask the presence of some one ; fdr d' occhio, fare un cenno d^ occhio, to make a sign of the eye ; far di cajopello, fare un saldto di capj)ello, to salute with the liat ; dare di penna^ dare un colpo di penna^ to eiface with the pen ; dare del hriccdne, ddre il titolo di bric- cone, to treat as a viHain ; pimire di mdi^te, punire cdlla pena di mSrte, to punish with penalty of death ; accu- mre di furto, accusdre per delitto di fdrto^ to accuse of theft. n. Many adverbial phrases are formed with the prepo- sition di; such as di rdro^ rarely; di soppidtto, di nas- c strdda, street. It w^ill be seen that all the verbs of motion, which ex- press a direction towards some object, are followed by the preposition a, * The preposition di may express a relation of possession, of extraction, or of qxialifl- cation, as in English. 124 ITALIAN GRAiMMAU. IV. There are many other expressions in Italian in which the preposition a is likewise employed ; such as — Taglidre a fette, To cut in slices. Anddre A due a due, To go two by two. Morivano A miglidia, They died by thousands. Impardre A mente, To learn by heart. Stare all' erta,* To be upon one's guard. Anddre, parldre AL huio, To walk, to speak in the dark. Tenete le rndni a voi, Keep your hands off. Stare A capo chino, A hocca To be with the head down, aperta, and mouth open. V. The Italians say, adverbially, dlla sfuggita, by stealth ; alV impyazzdta, foolishly ; alV hnjjensdta, sud- denly ; dlla rinfusa, pell-mell ; dlla pteggio, at the worst ; dlla meglio, at the best ; dlla grSssa, nearly. DA. YI. Da is the sign of the ablative : it is used to express the point from which persons or things depart ; as, — Allontandrsi da Parigi, To go from Paris. Liherdrsi da un impegno, To get out of a difficulty. I piaceri ndscono dai bi'sogm, Pleasures spring from wants. Separdrsi d^lla fam'iglia, To separate from one's family. Astenersi dal rulere, dal par- To abstain from laughing, from Idre, talking. Ripardrsi dal vento, d^lla To shelter one's self from the piioggia, wind and from the rain. Dall' anno or sin dXll' dnno Since last year. scorso, La carita comincia da se me- Charity begins at home. desimo, La moglie dipende dal marito, The wife depends on her hus- band. Staccdre una cosa da un dltra, To detach one thing from another. Venire dal tedtro, da cdsa, To come from the theatre, from the house. * AlP erta. This aW erta has given rise tn the English word " alert." ! PEEPOSITIONS. 125 Essere incalzato dal nemico, To be pursued by the enemy. Giudicdre dXlle cqyparenze, To judge by appearances. Anddte da quella parte, Go on that side. Che voUte da me ? What do you wish of me ? Fare una cosa da se, or da per To do a thing aloue, or by one's se, self. Guarddrsi da uno, To be on one's guard against one. Distinguere il vero dal fdlso, To distinguish the true from the false. Cader da cavdllo, dIll' dlbero, To fall from a horse, from a tree. Difendersi Dj(gli ipocriti, Dii To defend one's self against Iddri, DAL nemico, hypocrites, thieves, and ene- mies. VII. The verbs usctre, venire, nntovere, levdrsi, to go out, to come, to move, to rise, etc., sometimes take di for the sake of euphony, particularly when the article is not used ; as, Esgo di chiesa, si leva di tdvola, I go out of church, he rose from the table. With the verb ca- der e, the Italians say, Cader di mdno,* di bdcca, to fall from the hand, from the mouth ; but with the article, and, above all, in the plural, they say, Uscir ddlla chiesa, cader ddlle Tndni, to go out of the church, to let fall from the hands. VIII. "Out of" is translated \>j fuor di, because it sounds better than fuor da; as, Fuori di pericolo, out of danger. IX. Da is likewise used before words marking the use, employment, or distinction of a thing ; as, — Carta DA scrivere, writing-paper. Carta da lettere, letter-paper. A.cqua DA here, water to drink. Casa DA vendere, house to sell. Sotte DA olio, oil-cask. Camera da letto, bed-chamber. Ragdzza da maritdre, a marriageable girl. * Mano admits of various significations in idiomatic phrases. (See list of idiomfl.) 11* J26 ITALIAN GRAJVOIAR. X. Da is employed to express the idea of aptitude, etc. J as ) — A.r7ni da difendersi, Arms proper for defence. Non sono cose da dirsi, They are not things to be said. Z/' err are e da uomo, It is human to err. U6}7io DA molto, DA pdco, DA A man fit for many things, for few things, for nothing, for fatigue. They are things to cause laugh- 7iiente, da stento, Son cose da ridere, Non e cosa da un pari vostro, E una ragdzza da marito, ter. It is not proper for such a man as you. A young lady of marriageable age. XI. Da may be used in various other ways ; as, — Avke DA fare ? Datemi da lavordre, Venite qua da me, Dite DA hurla ? Dtte DA vero, or DAVi^ero ? Uomo DA bene, or DABbene, Anddte dal fornaio, Andrb da mia madre, Vive DA Signore, Ha trattdto DA birhdnte, Egli fa da dottdre, da medi- co, Vi giuro da galantuomo, Have you something to do ? Give me something to do. Come here near me. Do you say it in jest ? Do you speak seriously ? An honest man. Go to the baker's. I shall go to my mother's. He lives like a lord. He has behaved like a rogue. He plays the doctor, the phy- sician. I swear to you upon the faith of a gentleman. READING LESSON. Napoleone andato a Milano a farsi iucoronare re d' Italia, goiae visito r Universita di Pavia. Egli si fece presentare i professori. made e domando di Scarpa. Gli fu detto che era state depdsto was said was (had) been deposed dalla sua cdttedra per non aver voliito prestare giuramento to have wished to take PREPOSITIONS. 127 al nuovo governo. Eh ! clie importa, riprese Buonaparte, il replied giuramento e le opinidni politlche ! Scarpa onora 1' Universita ed il mio stato. II nome solo di Roma e una storia di maraviglie che scalda il warms petto ad ogni mortale. Terra degli eroi, capo del mondo ; innanzi a lei sparlrono nazioni, popoli e citta famose, ed ella l)efore disappeared stette e sta onore e gloria d' Italia, aspettando che suoni 1' dra stood stands aAvaiting may sound d' una nuova grandezza. Un gidrno Brasidas trovo tra alcuni f ichi secchi un sdrcio, cho found lo mdrse si fattamente che lo lascio andar via. Voi vedete, bit let see disse a chi gli stava intorno, che non v' e animaletto, il quale, stood per piccolo che sia, non possa scampar la vita dve abbia il may be can save may have cudre di difendersi da chi I'assale. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. If you wish to have a faithful servant, serve yourself. 2. " Deliver me from my friends," said a philosopher ; " be- cause I can defend myself against my enemies." 3. We should abstain from such truths as have the appearance of falsehood. 4. Amerigo Vespucci, of Florence, made many discoveries in the New World in the year one thousand four hundred ninety- seven. Hence it was called America, from this navigator. 5. Princes ought to punish as princes, and not as executioners. 6. The knowledge of foreign languages serves to correct and perfect our own. 7. The changes of states, far from injuring, often aid in the rapid progress of civilization and the arts. 8. " Fi'om the evils which the barbarians brought into Italy," said Varchi, " two good things have come forth, — our Italian language, and the c;ity of Venice." 128 ITALIAN GllAAIMAK. VOCABULARY. 1. If you wish, se volete ; serve yourself, servitevi da voi. 2. Deliver me, liheratemi ; I can (shall) defend, difenderb. 3. We should abstain, conviene astenersi ; appearance, fdccia. 4. Made, fece ; hence it was called, che venne qutndi chiamdto, 5. Ought, dehhono. 6. Our own, la propria. 7. Injuring (to injure), nuocere ; aid, giovano. 8. Brought, j)ortdti ; have come fortli, ndcquero. CONVERSAZIONE. Vddo al tecitro. Con mio marito (husband). Non ho niente da fdre. jEgli va in campdgna. Ho del caffe e una focdccia. Sara dedicdto a Mozart. Dove andcite ? Con chi anddte ? Che avete da fdre, Dove va il Dottore ? > Che avete"} A chi sara dedicdto quesfo mon' umento ? Dove trovdste voi (did you find) lo li trovdi sulla tdvola. i lihri ? Come anddvano (went) i fanci- A due a due. ulli? Sdno le tdvole e le sedie nella Si, sdno nella camera, cdmera ? Venite da me oggi ? Che cdsa avete ? Ddtemi di grdzia due ubva. Ha egli delpepe'^ Che volete fdre% Non pdsso ; non esco (go out) di cdsa. Una huona cdsa a tre pidni (floors). ^ Non ne ahbidmo, ma dbhidmo pane e hutirro. Si, Signore, ha del pepe, e del sale. Ho intenzibne di anddre al haJ~ lo, ma andrb prima da m/i/i mddre. PKEPOSITIONS. 129 CHAPTER XX. THE PKEPOSITIONS CON, IN, PER. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. lo lo vidi co' miei proprj occhi, I saw him with my own eyes, Assistetemi coi vdsiri consigli, Assist me with your counsels. La Senna mette foce in mare, The Seine flows into the sea. Leggo per divertirmi, I read (for) to amuse myself. lo appu7ito ho manddto per voi, I have just sent for you. Egll ha ddto in luce uiH opera, He has published a work. E famoso PER le sue i7nprese, _ He is famous b^ his exploits. Tutti parldvano in una vdlta, They all spoke at once. Diede urC occhidta in giro, He cast a glance around him. lo vengo a bella posta per vbi, I come expressly for you. Lo farete con vdstro cdmodo, You will do it at your leisure. E virtiX il dir molto IN pdchi It is a talent to say much in detti, few words. E cdsa che non gli pud capir in It is something which he can- testa, not understand. Le selle non son fdtte per gli Saddles are not made /or asses. dsi7ii. Vice qu'ello che gliviene in hocca, He says what comes into his head. Quella donna si adira CON tutti, This woman gets angry loith everybody. VY.'2i caritd, non mi precipitate! For pity's sake, do not ruin me ! E un ubmo chidro per nohilita. He is a man illustrious hy his nobility. Vddo ad aspettdrvi in giardino, I shall wait for you in the gar- den. Voi cercdfe d' ingarhuglidrmi You try to confuse me ivith COIS! parole che non intendo, words which I do not under- stand. Ognun per se e Dio per tutti. Every one for himself, and God for us all. 180 ITAI.IAN GRAMMAR. CON {with). I. Oon is used as in English in such sentences as the followino' : — Strignere amicizia CON alcuno, Egli pcirla cogli occhi chiusi, Donne c6lla hbcca aperta, Parldrsi Cogli occhi, Percuotere col piede, Far cenno cox la memo, COL capo, Dire CON voce hdssa, CON voce sonora, Lavordre COL pennello, collo scalpeUo, Fare {ma cosa CON piacere, CON facilitd, CON dffficoltd, con destrezza, Parldre col ciiore in mdno, k uscito COL servitor e, To make friends with some one. He speaks with his eyes shut. He sleeps ivith his mouth open. To speak ivith the eyes. To stamp witli the feet. To make a sign with the hand, with the head. To speak in a low voice, in a sonorous voice. To work with pincers, with a chisel. To do a thing tvith pleasure, with facility, with difficulty, ivith dexterity. To speak in an open-hearted manner. He has gone out with his ser- vant. II. In some phrases, the Italians use con where the English use by ; as, Illustrdrsi COL suo merito^ to make himself illustrious hy his merit. EST {in). III. In follows a verb when it expresses the existence of an object in or upon another ; as will be seen by the followino- : — II prdnzo e in tdvola, Ponete vino in tdvola, Anddre in villeggiatura, Essere in mcire, Gadere in terra. Nan ho dendri mdosso,* lo non entro nei fdtti vostri, Alzdrsi IN punta di piede. The dinner is upon the table. Put the wine upon the table. To go iiito the country. To be 2ipon the sea. To fall to the earth. I have no money about me. I do not meddle in your affairs. To stand on tiptoe. * Indosso is from in and dosso, back. PREPOSITIONS. 131 In mia^ in sua vece, In my, in his place. Essere in potere di, essere nel- To be at the power of, to be in LA cuna, the cradle. Stare in piedi in mezzo alia To stand up in the middle of piazza, the place. Tutti gli sguardi erano fissi in Every look was fixed upon him. lid. Stare in cittd, in ^;^Z/cf, in cdsa, To live ^?^ the city, in the town, in the house. To Z' ho gettdto in mare, I have thrown him «?ito the sea. Morire in e^a c/i cento dnni, To die <2^ the age of one hun- dred. IV. In elegant style, in is sometimes used instead of cdntro (against) ; as, Vendicdrsi in uno, to avenge one's self against another ; incrudelire ne' sHoi schidvi^ to be cruel to (against) his slaves. V. It is difficult to know when to use the article with in, and when to suppress it ; and there can be no positive rules given on this point. We must, however, observe that in is generally used without an article for any thing which is, or seems to be, on the surface; as, II vascello che era IN tndre si e rotto negli scogli, the vessel which was upon the sea is broken on the rocks ; i pesci vivono NEL mare, fish live in the sea. PER {for, by, through, etc.). YI. The preposition per indicates two distinct connec- tions : — 1. It denotes the idea of passage ; as, — Scrivere per la posta. To write hy post. .Essere crudele per natura, To be cruel by nature. Operdre per interesse, To work for interest. Prendere pel h^dccio. To take hy the arm. Pagdi^e cmque frdnchi VY.^ gior- To pay five francs a day. no, Per padre egli e nohile, Tlirough his fatlier, he is of no- ble birth. 132 ITALIAN GKA^IMAR. Per un secolo, per un anno, During (for) a year, a century. Una voce corre per la citta, A rumor runs through the city. Viaggidre per la Frdncia, To travel through France. Passdre per la Frdncia, per la To pass through France, through camera, per la porta, the chamber, through the door. 2. Per serves also to mark the aim or object of a per- son ; as, — Egli e morto per la p atria, He died for his country. lo lavoro per ^ miei scoldri, I work for my pupils. Fiirono lascidti per morti. They were left ybr dead. VII. We can also say, nella cittd, nella strdda, in Frdncia; but the idea of motion is better expressed by the word ^jer, rendering the phrase more forcible. VIII. We also say, — Per veritd, io non lo credo. In truth, I do not believe it. Egli e venuto per pdrte di uno. He came from some one. Essere per, or stdre per, To be about to. Per me vi assicuro che, As for me, I assure you that. Io ho quel che dite piii che per I perfectly believe all that you vero, say. Anddte T'E.' fdtti vdstri,* Let me alone ; or, mind your business. Per qudnto si affatichi, tutto git He may tire himself as much va a voto, as he will, nothing succeeds with him. reading lesson. Un giovindtto avdva i capelli neri e la barba bianca. Tiitti domandavano la causa di un tal fenomeno. Un motteggiatore rispose : " Perche forse quel Signore ha lavorato piii colla ma- labored scella che col cervello. Giulio secondo, in eta di 70 anni, con un elmo in capo monto, air assalto della mirandola. Si dice che un giorno questo papa guerriero buttasse nel Tevere le chiavi di San Pietro, per non threw aver piii ad usare, diceva egli, che la spada di San Paolo. PREPOSITIONS. 133 Un buoii veccliio pcirroco di villa, die era debole di vista, e avea le dita poco elastiche, stava leggendo in pulpito an capo "was reading della genesi. A queste parole: "II Signore diede ad Adamo gave una moglie," volto due pagine in una volta, e senza abbadarvi he turned perceiving it lesse tuttavia con voce forte e cliiara : " Ed ella era incatramata read pitched per di dentro e per di fudri." Quel bu6n piovano si era without. parson diso;riizIatamente imbattuto nella descrizione dell' area di Noe. unfortunately lighted upon Bisogna che 1' udmo abbia tanto senno da sapersi accomodare alle costumanze delle nazioni nelle quali si trova. Per mancanza is. want di un chiddo si pdrde il ferro ad un cavallo ; per mancanza di lost shoe (iron) un ferro si perde il cavallo, e per mancanza di un cavallo, anche il cavaliere e perduto, perche il nemico lo sopraggivinge, 1' succeeded ammazza, e tutto questo per non aver pdsto mente ad un chiodo killed put d' un fdrro del suo cavallo. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. It is a great misfortune not to have wit enough to speak well, nor judgment enough to keep silent. 2. In this world, we ought to be born either a king or a fool : a king, to be able to avenge injuries, and punish the vices of ;i men ; a fool, so as not to perceive injuries, or be troubled by any j thing. j 3. A caricature represented George III. with a very large , sleeve, from which Napoleon wished to come out ; but, as soon as , he put out his nose, George gave him a push to force him back ' into the sleeve. 4. We shall be measured by the same measure as we measure others. 12 134 ITALIAN GEAMMAR ^ti • 5. We should be careful not to lose time and words in refuting things evidently false. Zeno denied motion, and Diogenes began to walk without saying a word : Zeno persisted in his paradox, and Diogenes continued to w^alk. VOCABULARY. 1. To speak, joarMre ; to keep silent, stare zttto. 2. We ought to be born, converrehhe nascere ; to be able, po- tere ; to avenge, vendicdre ; to punish, castigcire ; to perceive (to know), conoscere ; or to be troubled, ne ddrsi pensi&ro. 3. Represented, Jigurdva ; Giorgio ; wished to come out, voU- va uscire ; put out, sporgeva ; gave, ddva ; to force him back, per fdrlo torndr dentro. 4. Measured, misui'dti ; we measure, minvriamo. 0. We should be, etc., hisogna guarddrsi dal perdere ; in re- futing, nel confutdre ; denied, negdva ; began to walk, si mise a passeggidre ; persisted, persistette ; continued, continub. CONVERSAZIONE. Che fa il vostro servo ? JEgli fa un cenno col capo. Che vuol (wishes) dire'^ Che il prdnzo e in tdvola. Dov' e la vostra arnica ? E uscita col servitore. Glie e cadibto in terra ? Lo scalpello con cwi lavoro. Per die e il Signor M. famoso'^ Per le sue dpere letter drie. Che cdsa ha egli fdtto ? Ha ddto in luce mdlte dpere. H avete lette ? Si^ le ho lette con piacere. Come ha egli parldto ? Ha parldto col cudre. Dove stdte bra ? Sto in cittd. Prestdtemi un dbllaro. Non ne ho in ddsso. Che si dice delfii Capitdno'^ Che egli e mortoper la p atria. Perche, lavdra il Signor B. ? Lavdra pei sudi scoldri. Volete andcire in vece' mia ? Si, andrd in vece vostra. Qhe chiedete (demand) voi ? Chiedo dandro in jJrestito. E criidele quest^ animdle ? Per natura non e crudele. Ha egli comprdto una carrozza ? No, e troppo avdro per far queS' ta spesa. PREPOSITIONS. 135 CHAPTER XXI. THE PREPOSITIONS. C Continued.) MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Cid sia ditto era di not, That may be said among us. Egli verra era dieci giorni, He will arrive in ten days. Che c' e qui dentro ? What is that within ? Facciamocegli incontro Let us go to meet him. lo le sedeva acc^nto, I was seated beside her. J^gli stette alquanto sopra di se,^ He stopped some time to reflect. Noe ndcque prima del diluvlo, Noali was born before the flood, e mori dopo il diluvio, and died after it. Venni questa mcme a cdsa vds- This morning I went to your tra, house. N^on v' e cosa nudva S(5tto il There is nothing new under the sole, sun. J^lla ha trovdto un marito se- She has fovind a husband ac- CONDO il suo genio, cording to her taste. Neir inverno si sta bene ACCiN- In winter, one is well near the TO alfuoco. fireside. Bisdgna vivere second o le leggi We ought to live according to della natura, the laws of Nature. Non vo mdi a letto prkia deW I never go to bed before day- dlha, • break. // sdnno in stjl mattmo e salute- Sleep in the morning is healthy. ^ vole, Animo^ Signorma ; vien tdrdi : Come, miss ; it is late : get up. levatevi su, Che avete fcdto infino ad dra'^ What have you doi.u up to the present moment ? Ciascuno e padrdne in cdsa sua, Every one is master in his own house. Qudndo avrb cisA mia, invitero When I have a house of my tiuti i miei amici, own, I will invito all my friends 13(3 ITALIAN GRAMJVIAH. UPON. I. "Upon" is often translated by in; as, — 1 will wait for you on the piazza, Vi aspettero in piazza. Ungrateful people write benefits GV ingrdti scrivono i henefizi upon the sand, nell' arena. To have no money upon (or Non avere dandri IN dosso. about) you, BETWEEN, AMONiG. II. These prepositions are rendered by fra or tra, and occasionally by infra or intra; as, — Among the people, Fra (or tra) il popolo. Among men, Fra (or tra) gli uomini. Between these two cities you Fra queste diie cittd s' incon- find three villages, trano tre paesetti. III. Fra (or tra) soiftetimes expresses " in " or " with- in ; " as, — I said within myself, To diceva fra me. God has created the world in Dio ha credto il mondo in sei six days, giorni. He will arrive within two Bgli arrivera fra due mesi. months. To live in pleasure, in pain, Vivere fra i piaceri, fra le pene. UNTIL. IV. "Until" is translated hj fino or sino; also insino or infino. TO or AT. V. " To " or " at " is rendered by da when it signifies going to some one ; as, — I go to my banker's, lo vo dal mio hanchiere. You go to your uncle's, Voi anddte da vostro zio. He will send to the baker, Mandera dal forndio. Yesterday I went to your house leri venni da vol per pregdrvi to beg you to call upon me di passdre dggi da me. to-day. PREPOSITIONS. 137 A cdsa di, a cdsa rnia, a cdsa vdstra^ etc., are also used wlien we refer more particularly to the house ; as, Vdi anddte a cdsa di vdsti^o zio ; ieri venni a cdsa v6s- tra per pregdrvi di passdre oggi a cdsa mia. VI. The following examples illustrate the use of va- rious prepositions : — At the fireside, After dinner, After me, About the table. Against me, him, Against the enemy, About 3,000 francs. About three feet high. Along the river, AcCjCnto al fiioco. Dopo iwdnzo. Dopo di me. Intorno alia tdvola. CoNTRO di me, di lui. CoNTRO al nemico. Circa a tre mila frdnchi. A.Uo circa, or alto intorno a trepiedi. LuNGO il jiume. According to youropinion, Secondo, or giusta il vostro parere. Before all, before me, Before speaking, Before daylight, Beyond the sea. Behind the door, Before the chimney, Beyond the Rhine, Beside that. Far from the truth. In the middle of the street, In fiice of, or opposite to. Near the bed, Near the sea, Outside, Out of the house, Towards me, thee, Towards spring, Without money. Within him. Prima di tiitto, prima di me. Prima di, or av^nti di pdrlare. InnInzi V dlha, or prima deW alba. Al di lX dal mare. DiETRO la porta, or cdla porta. Dav^nti ^7, or al cammino. Di la dal Reno. Oltre a cib. LuNGi, or lontXno dal vera. In mezzo alia, or della strdda. DiRIMPETTO A, or IN FiOCIA A. AccXnto, or viciNO al Utto. ViciNO, or PRESSO al or del mare. Per di fuori, or al di fuori. FuoRi or FUORA di cdsa. Verso or inverso a me, a te, or di me. Verso primavera. Senza dandro. Dentro, or PER di dentro, di lui- VII. When the above prepositions are followed by a personal pronoun, the pronoun is often placed before the verb, and the preposition terminates the phrase ; as, JSTon mi comparite pih dindnzi^ appear no more before me. 12* 188 ITALIAN GKAJMMAK. READING LESSON. Tasso^s last Letter Che dira il mio Signor Antonio, quando udira la mdrte del will say will hear sue Tasso ? e per mio avviso non tardera molto la novella, perclie will not delay io mi sento al fine della mia vita, non ess^ndosi potuto trovar feel being able mai rimedio a qu(^sta mia fastidiosa indisposizione sopravvenuta alle molte altre mie solite, quasi rapido torr(^nte, dal quale senza accustomed pot^re aver alciin ritegno vedo chiarara^nte ^sser rapito. Non e defence taken away. tempo che io parli della mia ostinata fortuna, per non dire dell speak ingratitudine del mondo, la quale ha pur voluto aver la vittoria di condurmi alia sepoltura mendico ; quand'io pensava, che quella gloria, che, mal grade di chi non vuole, avra qu^sto secolo da mi^i scritti, non fosse per lasciarmi in alcun modo s^nza guiderdone. Mi son fatto condurre in questo Monastero di Sant' Onofrio, non to conduct solo perche T aria e lodata da' m^dici, piu che d' alcun' dltra praised parte di Roma, ma quasi per cominciare da questo luogo emi- n^nte, e colla conversazione di questi div6ti Padri, la mia con- versazione in Cielo. Pregate Iddio per me : e siate sicuro che siccome vi ho amato, ed onorato sempre nella presente vita, cosi faro per voi nell' altra piu v^ra, cio che alia non f inta, ma ve- wilf do feigned race carita s' appartiene ; ed alia Divina grazia raccomando v6i ^ belongs e me stesso. Di Roma in Sant' Onofrio. PREPOSITIONS. 139 EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. The tears of an inheritor are smiles concealed under a mask. 2. Distrust those wlio love you very much on short acquaint- ance. 3. Private thieves spend their lives in chains and prisons; public thieves, in the midst of purple and gold. 4. With many people, love of country is none other than to kill and despoil other men. 0. There are some country towns in France where societies meet at six o'clock in the evening, in winter. They seat them- selves around the fireplace ; and, after the usual compliments, each one goes to sleep. At eight o'clock, one of them sneezes. Then, there is a general movement of surprise. " What is it ? " — " Nothing." One of the company takes out his watch, and announces that it is eight o'clock. " Ah ! it is not late : we can amuse ourselves a little longer." They sleep again till nine o'clock, when the mistress of the house gives a signal. They rise ; they congratulate each other at having been much amused ^ and each one goes to his own home. 6. " Wit and judgment," says Pope, " are always in opposition to each other, as the husband and wife ; although made to live together, and mutually help each other." 7. A preacher displayed all his eloquence in a panegyric upon St. Antonio ; and, among the figures of rhetoric with which he embellished his style, there was one wherein he said, " Among what inhabitants of heaven shall I place our saint ? Shall it be I with angels or archangels ? shall it be with cherubims or sera- phims ? No ! Shall T place him among patriarchs, among prophets ? ] No ! Neither shall I place him among apostles, nor doctors, nor evangelists." One of his auditors, who was tired of this long declamation, said to him, in rising, " My father, if you do not '' know where to place your saint, you can put him here ; because I am going away." VOCABULARY. 1. Concealed, nascosti. 2. Distrust, dijidotevi ; love very much, vogliono gran bene. 3. Private, /jm-a^o ; spend (pass), />«5S(:m<9. 4. Is none other than, non e dltro che ; kill, ammazzdre ; despoil, spoglidre. 5. There are, vi sono ; societies meet, siva in conversazione; at six o'clock, p.m., dlle sei pomerididne ; usual, sbliti ; there is 140 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. a general movement, i7is6rge un mbto generale ; takes out, cava ; it is not late, 7i07i e tm^di ; to amuse, trattenere ; they sleep again, ognuno torna ad adormentarsi ; they rise tiitti si dlzaiio ; they congratulate each other, si rallegrano. 6. Although made, henche fdtti; to live together, tenersi coni- pagma ; to help, ajutdre. 7. Displayed, sfoggidva ; to embellish, orndre ; to place, col- locdre ; neither, neppure ; declamation, jilastrocca ; if you do not know, se non sap'ete ; you can put him here, ponetelo pur qui ; because, che ; I am going away, io vddo via. CONVERSAZIONE. Che cdsa avete ? una hottiglia di vino. Dite da vero, o dite da hicrla ? Da vero ; non ischerzo. Dov' e il mio pdne (roll) imhu- Non so, vddo nella cucina per tirrdto (buttered) ? cerccirlo. Che fecero (do) quel povermi Chiesero aiuto col pidnto e cblle colle Idgrime in sugli dcchi? strida. Fra qiidli dei celesti abitatori fa Amico mio, non e importdnte collocdto Sanf Antonio f di saperlo. Ho io lascidto (left) il mio has- Voi lo lascidste da mia sorella. tone qui ? Chi e felice ? Voi ed io, per che non ci mdnca ^ (fails) un amico sincero. Qual e qu'elV animdle, che va E- V ubmo, che da bambino va (goes) con qucdtro piedi, poi carponi con le mdni e cdi con diie, ed in ultimo con tre ? piedi, e cbsi con qucittro pie- di, pbi ritto su due piedi, ed in ■ vecchidja con tre, perche va col bastone. VEEBS. 141 CHj^PTER XXII. THE VERBS ESSERE AM) AV^RE. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Non c' e tempo da jyerdere^ There is no time to lose. Non c' e came sen£ ossa, There is no meat without bones. Avete voi m proiifo la jnoneta? Have you tlie money ready? No7i hisogna aversela a male^ You must not take it ill. lo v' ho cara qudnto sorella, I cherish you as a sister. Perche avete cosi fretta'^ Why are you in such a hurry? Comprdte dellaUgna; perchein Buy more wood; for there is cantina non ce rC e piu, no more in the cellar. Se non avete die fare, venite If you have nothing to do, come meco, with me. Tocca a voi a coprire i miei It is for you to conceal my difettiy faults. Ora toccherd a me a raccon- Now it is my turn to adjust the ciarla^ affair. Non ho piacere di viaggidre di I feel no pleasure travelling by notte,' night. Con chi V avete'? lo non V ho With whom are you displeased? con nessuno, I am displeased with no one. Vi sdno gran rihdldi in questo There are great villains in this moiido, world. Non si pud dare un cuore piu There cannot be a more per- perfido, fidious heart. Ahhidmo a discdrrere a qudttro We must speak of that to- occhi^ gether tete-a-tete. Ho incontrdto due giorni fa Two days ago I met your cous- vostro cugino, in. Theni del mbndo sono in mdno The riches of tliis woi'ld are in delJa sdrtcj the hands of fate. A voi tocca il dir prima il vds- It is for you to give your ad- tro jyarere,^ vice first. Egli non e in grddo di fur questa He is not in a position to iu- spesa^ cur this expense. 142 ITALIAN GRAl>OIAR. ESSERE, TO BE. I. This verb is very much used in Italian, by its form-" ing the passive, which predominates in that language. 1st, It is its own auxiliary in compound tenses ; as, /o s6no stdto, I have been: 2d, The past participle ^.s^a^o agrees in gender and number with its subject ; as, Ella e STATA, she has been ; ndi sidmo stati, we have been. II. When essere is used impersonally, it agrees with the subject which follows it ; as, JE un 6ra, it is one o'clock ; s6no le {mdici, it is eleven o'clock. III. The verb ve7iire is very often used for essere, IV. The Italian expression essere per, or stdre per, signifies "to be upon the point of;" as, /o sdiio, or io sto per ammoglidrmi, I am about to marry. V. In the phrases "there is," "there are," "there was," etc., the Italians use ci and vi (there), abridged from qmnci and quivi. Oi denotes proximity, and vi a more distant place ; as, — There is, was, etc., V e, or c' e ; v' era, or c' era, etc. There are many people who Vi sono mold die vorrebhero wish to learn much without impardre molto senza studi- study, are. VI. Ci and vi are chano-ed into ce and ve when it is necessary to use the indefinite pronoun 7ie (of it, of them), J^on ce n^ e piii, or 7ion ve n^ epm, There are no more of them. Non ce n' e piii, etc., There is no more of it. VII. To express "it is ten years since," etc., the Ital- ians say, ^^Dieci dnni fa, or dieci dnni s6no ; and for "it is an hour," " a week," "a month," "two centuries," etc., they say ui-C 6ra fa, una settimdna fa, un tnese fa, due secoli fa. "There is," "there are," is occasionally rendered by vi ha, or lidvvi. VERBS. 143 VIII. Avere (to have), active verbs as in English, lowing phrases : — To be judicious, To be ready, To be thirsty, To be hunsfr Jj To be hot, To be satisfied with. To cherish some one, To remember. To be in a hurry, To be cold. To be ill, To be ashamed. To take a thing ill, To be afraid, To be charmed. To be in possession of. To have knowledge of, besides being the auxiliary of is used idiomatically in the fol- Ave?' giudtzio ; aver cervello. Avere in pronto ; avere a mdno. Aver sete. Aver fame. Aver cdldo. Aver cdro di. Aver cdro una, Avere a mmte. Aver fretta. Aver freddo. Aver mdle. Aver vergdgna. Aver per 7ndle. Aver paura. Aver gusto ; aver piacere, Avere in memo. Avere conoscenza. READING- LESSON. Seduta un po' in disparte, coUa fronte bassa e le mani intrecci^- te sulle ginocchia, stava piangendo cheta, la povera Laudomia. Le sue guance in questi mesi s' eran affilate e ftitte pallide, che quel viver sempre in agitazione, quel dover ad ogni ora temere le giungesse 1' avviso che Lamberto era rimasto ucciso, esauriva in lei a poco a poco la vita. Ed ora, dopo questa rotta, della quale s' ignoravano i particolari, ed in cui si sapeva pero quasi 3,000 persone aver perduta la vita, rimaner col tremendo dubbio s' egli fosse vivo o morto ! Non aver mode di uscirne, non sapere a chi domandarne ! " Oh ! pensiamo," diceva, " s' egli non si sara gettato nel maggior pericolo ! s' ^gli avra voluto staccarsi dal fianco del Ferruccio ! Oime ! Oime ! ch' io non abbia pro- prio a vederlo raai pi u ? " Le cognate, le nipoti e gli altri tutti di quelle tre case che forma vano una sola famiglia, la veneriivano piu che sorella e zia, e la chiamavano V Ameda, nome antico, venuto dal latino Amita I'che viiol dir zia), e tuttora vivo nel contado della Brianza. 144 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. There was in Athens a very opulent miser, who troubled himself very little about being the talk of his fellow-citizens. " People may hiss me," said he ; " but I am not angry : for, when I am at home, I rejoice at the sight of my crowns." 2. Whei-ever there are tears to be dried up, you w^ill be sure to meet a woman.' 3. There are men on whom is imprinted the whole character of their nation. 4. Unhappily, it is but too true, that no nation can flourish without vices. If it were not for ambition or cupidity, there would not be a single man who w^ould wish to take charge of the government of others. Take vanity away from women, and the fine manufactures of silk and lace, which furnish labor (cause to live) to so many thousands of artisans, would cease (would be no more). If there were no thieves, lock-makers would die of huno-er. Thus sood and evil are always found together. 5. Always live as if you were old, in order that you may never repent having been young. 6. There are men who know neither how to speak nor to be silent. 7. An old woman asked Mahomet what it was necessary to do so as to go to Paradise. " My dear," said he, " Paradise is not for old women." The good woman began to weep ; and the prophet said, to console her, " There are no old w^omen there, because they all become young again." 8. Dolabella said to Cicero, " Do you know that I am only thirty years old ? " — "I ought to know it," said Cicero ; " because you have been telling it to me these ten years." 9. If princes were obliged to combat hand to hand, there would be no more wars. VOCABULARY. 1. Atene ; who troubled himself very little, che si ddva poca briga; hiss, fa le fschidte ; I rejoice, nn r allegro. 2. Wherever, dovunque ; to dry, asciugdre. 3. Imprinted, i7npresso. 4. Unhappily, etc., e cosa disgraziatamente pur vera ; can flourish, pud esser Jiorida ; if it were not, se non fosse ; would wish, avesse voglia di ; to take charge, incaricarsi ; take away, togUete via; manufacture, fdhhica ; cause to live, danno da vwere a ; would die, morirebbero. VERBS. 145 5. If you were, se foste ; may never repent, ?^o^^ vi ahhiute a jientire mdi. 6. To be silent, stch^e zitti, 7. Old woman, vecchia ; asked, domanddva ; Maometto ; it was necessary, convenisse ; to go, per anddre ; paradiso ; my dear, c«rrt 7nia ; began to weep, si caccio a 'pidngere ; to console, racconsoh'ire ; become young, ritornercmno giovani. 8. DolabeUa ; Cicerone ; only, solamente ; I ought to know it, lo debho sapere ; because, perche ; telling, anddte dicendo. 9. Were obliged to, dovessero ; combat, pugndre ; hand to hand, cdrpo a cdrpo, CONVERSAZIONE. Dov^ e la Luisa ? £J rimdsta a casa. Perche ? Perche e un poco infredddtcu Louisa, che hai ? La mamma stu (is) mdle, Che cosa ha% Ha una grossa febhre, Bevete (drink). E dolce abhas- Si, e buonissimo. tdjiza ? Che cos' e questa nostra vita! Un sogno, sognidmo in pace. Qadnti dnni sono che siete fuori Sono ormdi qumdici dnni? di pdtria ? Figliuoli miei, avete appetite ? No, cdra mddre. Volete (will you) bere (di'ink) ? Prenderemo (we will take) una limondta. E morta la Signora ? Si, la Signora Maria e mdrta. E la Giulietta f E desoldta. II suo vivo dolore mi Idcera (pierces) V dnimo. Avete studidto la vdstra lezidne Mi son levcito questa mattina di musical X' avete prati- dlle sette, e nan mi sono jjiii cdta perbene ? mbssa (moved) dot piano- forte. Potrei (could I) vederla ? Si; se volete entrdre un mo- mento, ma non le dite (say) nulla. 13 146 ITALIAN GKAJVIIVIAE. CHAPTER XXm. THE VEEBS AND THEIR SYNTAX. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Gome ve la passdte, carina ? ' How goes it with you, dear ? lo sto ascoltdndo: non mimuovo, I listen : I do not move. Amico^ gettdte via la fatica, Friend, you lose your labor. Venite pure avdnti, You can likewise enter. CUie cosa dite ? What do you say ? Tirdte via, gocciolone ! Go away, great fool ! lo stdva scriv'endo una lettera, I was writins: a letter. Gomportdtevi bene, e sarete ben Behave well, and everybody voluto da tutti, will love you. Da alcuni jilbsoji si crede che Some philosophers believe that la vita sta un sdgno, life is a dream. Vi sbno taliini che vdnno sempre There are people who are al- macchindndo delle novita^ ways thinking of something new. Ghe cbsa impedisce aW uomo di What prevents man from being esser felice ? l^appy ? Piove^ tuona, e balma, in un It rains, thunders, and lightens, punto, nil at once. Mentre state pranzdndo scrivero While you dine, I will write to alio zio, my uncle. Ghe anddte facendo cost per What are you doing so early ? tempo ? Non parldr mdi senza aver Never speak without reflection. ^ pensdto, E cosa che si dice da alcuni, There are some persons who speak of it. Mubve piu V interesse propria One's own interest is always che V altrui, jpore touching than that of others. Non ho goduto un' ora di bene, I have never enjoyed a mo- ment's happiness. Appena mi vide tiro via subito^ He no sooner saw me than he ran away. VERBS AND THElll SYNTAX. 147 The verbs in the infinitive are easily recognized in Ital- ian by their terminations, namely, in aee, eee, ire ; as, amdre* to love ; vedere, to see ; jinire^ to finish. Many verbs have two terminations for the infinitive : some end in ere or ire. In Italian, the infinitive, when preceded by the definite article, has the nature of a noun ; as, ^ proibito il far male, it is forbidden to do evil. GENERAL RULES. I. The word via (which signifies " way," " street " ) is placed after certain verbs of motion ; as, — Levdr via, to take away. Portdr via, to carry away. A7iddr via, to go away, etc. II. The passive form of the verb, as we have already stated, is much used in Italian ; particularly in didactic, poetic, and historic styles. The active form becomes pas- sive by changing the construction of the phrase : the subject becomes the regimen, and takes the preposition da : the verb takes the addition of si, which is a sio-n of the passive ; or it is conjugated through all its tenses with the verbs essere or venire; as, Everybody says, si dice da Udti, e detto da iutti, or vien detto da tidti ; the people fear war, la giierra e temida dal ]j6j)oIo. III. There are many impersonal verbs | in Italian ; amono* which are the followinof : — Alheggia, the clay appears. RaggiSrna, ,,^ „ ^ „ Annotta, it is growing dark. Pioviggina, ^ it drizzles: it Ldmica, > rains in small Sjjruzzola, ) drops. * The verbs of the first conjugation^ which ends in ARE — amount to more than four thousand: among them, only about tliirty are irregular. t The impersonal verbs may be divided into proper and improper. The proper are those which have only the third person singular throughout all their moods and tenses ; as, Si fa osriiro, it grows dark ; tempiJsta^ it hails. The improper arc those wliich are not impersonal by themselves, but only occasionally used in an impersonal siguilication ; as, Convicnf. it is proper ; hisdgna, it must. 148 ITALIAN GRAJVOIAR. Balena, it lightens. Accdde, it happens. Lampeggia, " . " Avvietie, 5) J) Piove^ it rains. Interviene, ?5 ?J N^evica, it snows. Pare, it appears. Tuona, it thunders. Semhra, it seems. Graudina, it liails. Disdice, it does not become. Gela, it freezes. Bisogna, it is necessary. lY. Impersonal A'erbs are used in the plural when the noun which follows them is plural ; as, — Accddono strdne cose, Sono le set, Strange things happen. It is six o'clock. V. All the impersonal verbs are conjugated in their compound tenses with essere; as, tl tondto, e pioviito. VI. Many of these verbs are conjugated with the per- sonal pronouns ; as. Mi pare, it seems to me ; mi dis- place, I am sorry. Remaek. — In most languages, many verbs are used with an idiomatic turn very different from their proper signification. VII. The verbs venire and volere, for instance, do not always answer to the English verbs " to come " and " to be willing : " but the former is sometimes used instead of the verb essere (to be) ; and the latter, being preceded by the particles ci, vi, and unipersonally employed, has the same meaning as the verb bisogndre (must or to be necessary) ; as, — Mi vihi detto cosi, I am told so. Gi vuol pazienza, We must have patience. VIII. The verb dovere is expressed in English by the verb '^' to owe " when it means to be a debtor, and by the verb " to be obliged " when it signifies duty or the necessity of doing an action. It is also used instead of the verb bisogndre, in the signification of "must;" as ^' gli doveva trecento fiorini, he owed him three hun- dred florins. VERBS AND THE[R SYNTAX. 149 IX. The English verb " to be," used in the sense of "to be one's turn," "business," or "duty," is rendered in Italian by the verb toccdre^ in the signification of " to belong ; " as, — Tocca a me a giuocdre, It is for me to play. Tocca a lui a leggere, It is for him to read. X. The verb " to think," used in English in the sense of "to believe "i)r "to suppose," is translated into Italian by the verb credere; and, when in the sense of "to re- flect" or "meditate," by the YQvh pensdre. XL The verb "to know" is translated by the verb sapere when intellectual knowledge is meant, and by the verb condscere when personal knowledge derived from the evidence of one of our senses is intended. XII. The pronouns ?7^^, ti, ci, ne, etc., are often use^* as expletives* with certain verbs ; as, ib mi son pre sa la lihertd di scrivervi, 1 have taken the liberty to write to you. XIII. The verbs dovei^e, potere^ sapere, volere, sometimes form their compound tenses with essere when followed by an infinitive ; as, io non son potuto venire. XIV. The verb suondre, or sondre, is used in the sense of to play on an instrument; as, Sudna il violino, suoyia il c6rno da cdccia. XV. The verbs avvertire and haddre (to take care) are followed by a negation ; as, Avvertite or haddte di non inganndrvi, take care not to deceive yourself. XVI. The verb may be placed before or after the sub- ject, according to the dominant idea of either verb or * Expletives are particles which give strength and energy. They are bene, si bdne, pure, tutto, mi, ti, poi, altrimenti, ci, gid, via, vi, mai, cgli, si, bello, non, ne ; as, — Il vdstro vest'ito e bcW e fcitto, Your suit of clothes is finished. Son tiUto stnnco, I am quite tired. Oie tempo fa, rgli ? What is the weather ? ti^gli (■ pill ddtto c/P 'w non crecleva, Ue is more learned than I thought. 13* 150 ITALIAj^ geaimjmak. subject. This inversion sometimes gives great effect, particularly to poetry. We may see it in Tasso : — GilCE. r aha Cartdgo; appena i segni DeW alte sice ruine il lido serha, MuoiONO le citta ; muoiono i regni, etc. REMARKS. 1. The verbs ending in care and gare, as predicdre, Hpiegdre, take h in those tenses in which c and g would precede e or i, so as to preserve the hard sound of the infinitive. (See conjugation of cercdre.^ 2. Students should be careful to notice the difference between the imperfect and perfect-definite tenses of Ital- ian ^verbs. The mipey^fect expresses an action not accom- plished during the time of another past action, or the repetition of an action, and may be known by its making sense with the auxiliary was. The perfect-definite ex- presses an action entirely past; as, I was going to your sister when I sato you, %o me ne (imp.) andava da v6s- tra sorella^ qudndo lo vi (perfect) viDi ; I went almost every night to pay a visit to the famous Schiller, io an- dava qudsi 6gni sera a far visita al celehre Schiller, •READING LESSON. Era intanto comparsa la Caterina con qualche cosarella per cena*: e chi non avesse saputo che la casa era andata a sacco, 1' avrebbe indovinato vedendo quell' imbandigione, che tutta con- feisteva in un' iiisalata, un pezzo di cacio, e due pan neri, che 1' lino neppiir era intero. La povera donna, sciira e macilenta in viso, cogli ocehi sonfi e rossi, apparecchiava senza parlare, e metteva ogni tanto, Mnghi sospiri ; e dopo quelle prime e brevi j)ar61e, nessuno apri piu bocca, e rimaser pensosi, sedendo su una panca che era tiitt' in giro conf itta nel muro : e questo silenzio parea tanto piu mesto, che nessuna voce, nessvino strepito s' udiva neppure, al di fuori, benche fossero nel cuor della terra, pdco lontani di piazza. II canto d' un gallo o F abbaiar d' un cane avrebber almeno dato segno di cosa viva ; ma quel desolate borgo aveva- aspetto di cimitero. — D'Azelio. VERBS AND THEIK SYNTAX. 151 t EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. The Stranger and the Guide {seated on the top of the Coliseum). 1. S. — As I just now observed, as we climbed up here, the name of Rome awakens the most agreeable sensations. 2. G. — It is because you have read so much, sir : besides, you know Latin, and then you have travelled much. 3. S. — Two years of travel have profited me much more than eight years of Latin. I have studied nature : I have freed myself from my prejudices, and from the false national love which makes us so unjust towards our fellow-creatures. 4. G. — What think you, then, of Italy ? 5. S. — Italy has conquered the world by her arms ; she has enlightened it by her sciences ; civilized us by her fine arts ; governed by her genius ; and, far from succumbing under the redoubtable blows of barbarians, she has triumphed over them, forcing them to lay down their ensanguined arms at her feet. 6. G. — Very true ; and you cannot mention another nation which has held its conquests so long as Italy. VOCABULARY. 1. We climbed, salivdmo ; awakens, desta. 2. Read, letto ; travelled, viaggidto. 3. Profited, giovdto ; studied, studidto ; have (am) freed, sono spoglidto ; fellow-creatures, simile. 4. Think, pensate. 5. Conquered, conqidstato ; enlightened, illumindto ; civilized, ingentilito ; governed, governdto ; far from succumbing, non che soggiacere ; triumphed, trionfdto ; foi'cing (constraining them), costringendoli ; ensanguined, insanguindti. 6. You cannot mention {Qxtei)^vossignoria non pud citdre. CONVERSAZIONE. Avke cdmere da affiUdt^e (to Si, Signore, ne ho vdrie. let)? Vorrei un appartamento. Con tnohili o senza mobili ? Lo vorrei (should like) smohig- Pensdte di trattenervi (to re- lidto. main) mdlto'^ Non pill che r inverno. E al pcirtire'^ Al partire rivenderb (I will sell Non ne caverete un terzo del again) la moMglia, cdsto. • 152 ITALIAN GRA:MMAR. Allora e meglio trovdre una huona padrona ed un helV appartamento. Andidmo a vedere. Che mohili ha ella ? II letfo e la cosa principalissi- ma. - La camera risponde sidla strd- da'^ Desidera vedere urC dltra stdn- za'^ Che si dice delV ostinazione ? Che ci vuole in tutte le cose ? Qudndo e il sole piu risplen- dente ? Che volete amico mio f Che hisogna fare per godere budna salute ? Che sta facendo quesf udmo ? Che cdsa e pazzia ? Vi condurrb io ddlla Signora Bidnca ; ella e persona gen- tilissi7na e discrefa. La situazidne e hellissima. Ha mohili di 7ndgano (mahog- any), e tapjpeti di lusso. Nonpotete desiderdrne un migli- bre. No Signdre, da nel giardino. No, credo che il letto sia hudno. Non si trdtta adesso che del prezzo. Si dice che V ostinazidne e peg- gibr di tutti i peccdti. In tutte le cdse ci vuole la mo- derazidne. Ddpo una burrdsca e sempre piu risplendente il sdle. Vdglio pile che vdi potete dcir- mi. Sisdgna vivere parcamente. Sta ragiondndo per passdre il tempo. Lo sperdr sempve nelV avvenrre e pazzia. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 153 CHAPTER XXIV. THE VERB: THE SUBJmTCTIVE MOOD. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Gil comandd che parldsse, He ordered liim to speak. Dicbito che V ora sia tarda, I fear that it is late. DiteglicH egli fdcciacbmevuole. Tell him to do as he likes. Non so se to debha dir di si o I do not know if I ought to di no, say yes or no. Qudnd^ dnche to lo sapessi, non Even if I knew it, I would not ve lo direi, tell you. Si da per siciiro che la pace sia We are assured that peace is fdtta, made. Bisogna che gli scrividte voi It is necessary that you write stesso, to him yourself. JS il piu bravo uomo cK to dbbia He is the most honest man that mdi co7iosciuto, I have ever known. Benche sia difficile, bisogncLpero Although it is difficult, we vincere se stesso, must conquer ourselves. JEgli lo dice perche non didte a He says it that you may not me la colpa, blame me. To gli dtssi che come gli piacesse I told him that he might an- le rispondesse, swer her as he pleased. Pcire cli ella si fdccia ognor She seems to be continually pill bella, growing handsomer. Gli dtssi che facesse come vo- 1 told him to do as he pleased. lesse, Se to avessi studidto, sarei ddtto, If I had studied, I should be learned. Ptcd essere cli' to porta domdni, It is possible that I may leave to-morrow. Se tu sapessi qudnto to fdmo I If thou knewest how much I love thee ! Venne da me e mi domandb chi He came to me, and asked me fossi, e dove anddssi, who I was, and where I was going. 154 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Every proposition is either positive or doubtful. I. The positive indicates that the thing positively exists ; that the action is done in an absolute manner. This propo- sition is expressed by the indicative mood ; as, Jo pdrlo, I speak ; io par^ldva, I was speaking. II. The doubtful proposition, on the contrary, is ex- pressed by the subjunctive mood, and serves to indicate the possibility or doubt of a thing existing : it shows that the existence of the action is conditional and relative, be- cause it depends on an antecedent proposition, expressed or understood ; as, I wish to write, io voglio scrivere, is positive, and in the indicative mood ; I wish that you would write, io vSglio die v6i scrividte^ is doubtful, de- pending on the will of another, and therefore put in the subjunctive. III. The verb is used in the subjunctive after all verbs that signify ashing, entreating , suspecting , wondering, rejoicing , grudging, supposing, hoping, imagining, conjecturing, intimating; after all verbs expressive of desire, will, command, permission, prohibition, fear, belief; after all verbs implying doubt, ignorance, uncer- tainty, or future action; and after all verbs used with a negative ; as, — Per amor di te ti prego (eke) For your sake, I beseech you te ne rimdnghi, to desist. Che vuoi tu chU lo sdppia ? What do you tliink that I know ? TV. Some of these verbs, however, appear sometimes to be used indiscriminately, either in the indicative or in the subjunctive mood : but it is not so in fact ; for, when they are so used, each mood expresses the action in a diiferent manner, as may be seen in tlie following exam- ples : — THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 155 Voglio sposare una donna die I wish to marry a woman whom mi pi dee, I Hke. Voglio sposch'e una donna die I wish to marry a woman whom mi pidccia, I may hke. Vddo cercdndo uno die mi vuol I am seeking one who is fond bene, of me. Vddo cercdndo uno die mi vo- I am seeking one who may be glia bene. fond of me. In which, in the first instance, being certain of the exist- ence of the action expressed, we use the indicative ; and, in the second, we use the subjunctive, because the existence of the action is not certain, but doubted or desired. V. After semlyi'di'e, jparere^ hisogndre, or any other impersonal verb, the subjunctive is always used; as, — Bisbgna die voi jpartidte domdni, You must go away to-morrow. Mi sembrdva die avesse voglia He appeared as if he had a di ridere, wish to laugh. Parevami die ella fosse piu hi- She appeared to me to be dnca die la neiie, whiter than snow. VI. The verb is also used in the subjunctive after the relative pronoun che, following a comparative or a super- lative ; as, — Bella quant'' dltra donna {che) As handsome as any other lady ^ fosse mdi in Firenze, in Florence ever was. E la miglibre opera che sia com- It is the best work which ever pdrsa, appeared. VII. And after the relative quale, not used in an inter- rogative manner ; as, — una parte qudle volesse ne reg- He might govern such a part gerehhe, as he should wish. OF THE TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT VERBS IN A COM- POUND SENTENCE. VIII. T\'hcn, in a compound sentence, the principal verb is in the present of the indicative, or in the future, the dependent verb must be put in the irresent of the 156 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. subjunctive, if we mean to imply the present or future time ; and in the hrfperfect of the subjunctive, if we mean to imply the past ; as, — ' Qredo mi portdsse amore, I believe that he loved me. £) credo omdi die 7n6nti e pidg- I believe, that, by this time, ge sdppian di die tempra sia mountains and plains know la mia vita, what is the condition of my life. IX. When the dependent verb expresses an action which may be done at all times, it may be put either in the imperfect or the prese?2^ of the subjunctive, although the principal verb be in the perfect-indefinite of the indica- tive ; as, — Iddio ci a ddto la ragione qffin- God gave us reason in order die ci distinguidmo, OY ci dis- that we might distinguish tinguessimo, ddgli animdli, ourselves from animals. X. In suppositive or conditional phrases, the hnperfect of the indicative in English — had, %uas, or %i^ere — is rendered in Italian by the imperfect of the subjunctive ; as, — Se io avessi qiiesti dendri, glieli If I had this money, I would presterei iiicontanente, lend it to you immediately. Chi starehhe meglio di me, se Who would be more happy than quei dendri fosser miei ? I, if that money was mine ? Remark. — Some conjunctions require the subjunctive mood; as, Affinche, in order that; benche, though; senza che, without ; d!'ato che, suppose. READING LESSON. E cosa rara che s' incontri un giureconsulto che litighi, un medico che prenda medicina, e un teologo die sia buon cristiano. Flechier era figlio d' un droghiere. DIcono che in un momento di malavoglia, un vescovo gh rimproverasse la vilta dei suoi na- tali, e che Flechier gli rispondesse : Monsignore, v' e questa differenza fra vdi e me, che se voi foste nato nella bottega di mlo padre vi sareste ancora. Tre giorni dopo la morte di Caterina di Frc4ncia, il predica- tore Lini^estre cosi dalF alto del pergamo la raccomandava agh THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 157 astanti : " La Regina mddre e mdrta, la quale, vivendo, fece molto male, e per me credo molto piii mjile clie bene. In quest' oggi si presenta una difficolta, che consiste in sapere se la chiesa cattolica deva pregare j^er lei che visse tanto male, e cosi spesso sostenne la eresia, quantunque si dica die in I'lltimo sia stata con noi, e non abbia acconsentito alia morte dei nostri prlncipi. Su di che io devo dirvi, che se volete recitarle un pater ed ave cosi a casaccio, fate vdi ; varra per qudllo che puo valere : e lo rimet- to alia vostra liberta." EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. As a countryman was one day walking in the streets of Paris, he passed by a broker's shop ; and, not seeing any thing but a man occupied in writing, he was anxious to know what busi- ness he did. He entered, and asked what they sold. " Asses' heads," answered the money-changer. " You must do good busi- ness," immediately replied the countryman, " since you have only your own left." ^ 2. Semiramis ordered the following inscription to be engraved upon her tomb : " Let the king who has need of money demol- ish this tomb, and he will find a treasure." Darius caused the tomb to be opened : instead of money, he found this other in- scription : " If thou hadst not been a bad man, and of insatiable avarice, thou wouldst not have disturbed tlie ashes of the dead." 3. A Turkish ambassador asked Lore'nzo de Medecis why they did not see as many fools in Florence as in Cairo. Lorenzo pointed to a monastery, and said, " See where we shut them up." 4. A man having consulted the philosopher Bias, to knov\^ if he should marry, or lead a life of celibacy, he answered, " The woman you marry will be pretty or homely : if she is pretty, you will marry a Helen ; if she is homely, you will marry a Fury : so you would do better not to marry. VOCABULARY. L As a countryman was walking in, girando un paesdno per ; was anxious to know, ebbe voglia di, etc.; did, /"wcesse ; entered, entro ; sold, vendesse ; you must do, etc., ne abhidte un gran con- sumo ; you have left, rimdne. 2. Demolish (make to demolish), y«ma demoJire ; will find, trovera. 3. Did see, vedessero ; pointed, addito ; we shut, rincJiiudidmo. 4. Should marry (if he had to take a wife) ; will marry, mene-^ rete. 14 158 ITALIAN GEAlVmAR. CONVERSAZIONE. Che cosa domando egW^ Se w avevo hen studidto, Che diceste voi ? Non so s' io dehha dir di si o di no, Che voUte sapere ? Voglio sapere clii ella sia. Qudndo ritornerete ? Pud essere ch' io ritorni domdni, Chi sarehhe stdto genei'oso se fos- II povero die si mostra riconos- se ndto ricco ? cente di un benefizio. Che disse Maria ? Se w fossi ricca^ so hen lo quel che avrei a fare. Ghe cosa e rdra ? J^ cosa vara che s' incbntri un medico che prenda medicina. Perche vi maraviglidte voi? Perche voi avete venduto quel cavdllo. Eseioavessihisdgnodidandro? Se sajjeste qudnt' to v' dmo, nC avreste domanddto di prestdr- vene. THE INFINITIVE, GERUND, ETC. 159 ^ CHAPTER XXV. THE INFINITIVE, GEEUND, PRESENT AND PAST PAR- TICIPLES. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Spesso la veritd sta occidta, Truth is often concealed. Che cosa avete sentito dire ? What have you heard said ? Ho sempre odidto V adidazione, I have always hated flattery. II fuoco e spcirso in tuttalana- Fire is spread throughout all tura^ nature. Bisogna anddre cduto nel par- It is necessary to be careful in Idre, speaking. Giunto alia porta, la frdvai "When I arrived at the door, I chiusa, found it shut. / Toscdni sono acutissimi nel The Tuscans are very sharp at motteggidre, raillery. Al primo vederla la sorpresa mi Surprise betrayed me when I ha tradito, first saw her. Lo sperdre nelV avvenire e paz- It is foolish to place one's hopes zia, on the future. La folia crescente shoccdva da The sweUing crowd poured in ogni parte, from all parts. II farldr poco, il fare assdi, e 7 To speak little, to do much, non lauddre se stesso, sono and not to praise one's self, virtii rare, are rare virtues. Guarddti dal vantdre le cose Abstain from praising what be- tiie, longs to thee. Una hurla per essere detta fiiori An untimely joke may become di tempo pub diventdre un an offence. offesa, Si 'pud dire quella essere vera It may be said, that true art is arte che non appdrc essere arte, that which does not appear to be so. Non il comincidre, ma il perse- It is not the commencing, but verdre, e degno di lode, the persevering, which mer- its praise. ](iO ITALIAN GKAMIVIAR. I. The infinitive takes the place of the third person when the phrase is composed of a principal proposition and a subordinate one, connected by the conjunction "that;" as, He said that the people ought not to be de- ceived, egli dice il 'p6'polo non dover essere ingayi- Qidto; it is said that time is the father of all truth, dicono il tem'po ESSERE padre di ogni veritd. This style, though very elegant and much used, is not adapted for common conversation. The above phrases may be trans- lated word for word ; as, tlgli dice che il j^dpolo non dee essere inganndto, II. The pronouns lui and lei are used instead of egli and ella with the infinitive ; as, Sa ogniino ltd essere stdto maestro di hel dire, everybody knows that he was a model of eloquence. III. The infinitive is used for the second person singu- lar of the imperative mood, when preceded by the negative particle 710 ?i; as, — Non fare strepito, Do not make a noise. Non ti lusingdre, Do not flatter thyself. Cid 7ion temere, Do not fear that. Non mi toccdre, rihdldo I Do not touch me, rascal ! IV. The infinitive may be used as a noun in the nomi- native case, or as regimen of the verb ; as, — Mi pidce mblto il siw fare, His manners please me much. Nel danzdre, ella non ha pari In dancing, she has no equal nel mondo, anywhere. Dal parldre si conosce V interno We know the hearts of men by degli uomini, their speech. V. The infinitive is used as follows by an able his- torian, in describing the movements of a camp preparing for an assault : Quindi era nel cdinpo un anddre,* un * The Italians make ft-equent use of andare^ venire, and stare: the first two conyey an idea of movement ; the latter, that of rest. PARTICIPLES. 161 venire, un urtdrsi c?' uSmini e di cdrri un jorhir cU drmi, un apparecchidre di mdcchine murdli, die V dere ne era a 7ii6lta distdnza introndto. VI. Many English phrases may be translated literally ; as, It is a great folly to live poor, E gran pazzia il viver povero, in order to die rich, ^ per morir ricco. It is a virtue to say much in JE virtu di dir molto in pdchi few words, detii. THE PARTICIPLES. VII. When the past participle * is joined to the verb Sssere (to be), or to such verbs as venire, restdre or rima- nere, vedersi, etc., used in the signification of "to be," it should agree with the subject of the verb with which it is joined, in gender and number; as, — JEssi eran di frondi di quercia They were garlanded with oak- ingJdrlanddti, leaves. Ne erano le fdlte de* Vitellidni Nor w^ere the faults of Vitel- punite, ma ben pagdle, lius' troops punished, but well paid. VIII. But when the past participle is joined to the verb avere (to have), — if this verb is used, instead of essere, in the sis^nification of "to be," or is used in the sionifica- tion of "to hold," "to possess," etc., as an active and not an auxiliary verb, — the participle agrees with the object of the verb in gender and number ; as, — aS* avea (for s' era) messe alcune He had put some small stones petruzze in hocca, in his mouth. Per non poterti vedere f avresti Thou wouldst have torn out (for ti saresti) cavciti gli occhi, thy eyes, not to see thyself. Uno che fordta avea (for tenea, One who had his throat pierced. possedea) la gdia, * There are many participles ia dto, dta, which are contracted by suppressing the at: these are — Accetto — a for accettdto — a, accepted. Addtto — a for adattdto — a, adapted. Cdrico — a for caricdto — a, loaded, etc. 14* 162 ITALIAN GRAMi\L4R. IX. If the verb avere^ to which the past participle is joined, is used as an auxiliary verb in order to represent the idea of past time, which could be equally expressed by a single form of the verb to which the participle belongs, then this participle remains invariable ; as, — Come iq avrb dcito (or daro) As soon as I shall have given loro ogni cosa, every thing to them. Cercdto ho (or cercdi) sempre I have always sought a solitary solitdria via., way. Chi queste cose ha manifestato "Who has told these things to (or manifesto) al ?naestro ? the master ? X. When the past participle is preceded by one of the pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, il, lo, la, li, gli, le, ne, che, aui, qudle, qudli, qudnti, as objects of the verb, the participle agrees with the pronouns, or the objects repre- sented by them, in gender and number ; as, — JElla medcsima me le ha dette She herself has told them to (or mi ha dette queste cose), me. II liherto diceva averla esso uc- The freedman said that he had cisa (or avere esso uccisa la killed her himself. dojina), XI. The English present participle may be expressed in Italian, — 1. By the gerund of the corresponding verb ; as, — Veggendolo consumdre come la Seeing him waste away like neve al sole, snow in the sun. Dormendo gli pdrve di vedere la (Sleeping, or) whilst he was donna sua, asleep, it seemed to him that he saw his lady. 2. By the conjunction che, or the adverb qudndo, and a tense of the indicative mood ; as, — Poi cK ebhi riposdto il cojpo Having rested my weary body. lc(SSO, Qudnd' ebbe detto cid, riprese il Having said this, he took up teschio misero c6' denti, once more that miserable skull with his teeth. PARTICIPLES. 163 3. By a preposition and the verb in the infinitive ; as, — Consiuno quella mattina in cer- He spent that morning in look- ccirli, ing after them. Credo die le snore sien tutte a I beheve that the nuns are all dormire^ (sleeping or^ asleep. XII. When the English present participle has before it a preposition, such as "of," "from," "on," "in," etc., it is always rendered in Italian by the corresponding verb in the infinitive with a preposition. XIII. If the participle is preceded by the prepositions "of," "from," "with," they are expressed in Italian^by the preposition di^ attended by the infinitive; as, l^hhi il piacere di vederlo, I had the pleasure of seeing him. Xiy. The preposition " on," before the participle, may be expressed by the prepositions di or in; as, - — Si vdnta d^ aver la loro cono- He values himself on being ac- scenza, quainted with them. Nel partire gli sovvenne di lei. On his leaving, he recollected her. The preposition " in " is relidered by a or in; as, — Avea nel quetdr popolo autorita In appeasing the people, he had ed arte, both authority and art. Che a far cid volesse aitdrlo, That he would assist him in doing that. XV. The prepositions "for," "without," "before," "after," etc., are literally translated. XVI. If the participle is preceded by the preposition " by," this preposition is generally omitted in Italian, and the participle rendered by the gerund of the correspond- ing verb ; as, — Gli scoldri impdrano le regole Scholars learn the rules of a di una lingua studiundole^ language by studying them» 164 ITALIAN GKAJNIMAR. XVII. But if we wish to express the preposition, then the verb must be put in the infinitive, and "by" rendered by con; as, — II divino Giulio rintuzzb la se- The divine JuHus checked the dizione del suo esercito col dir sedition of his army by only solo, " Ah, Quiriti 1 " saying, " Ah, Romans ! " READING LESSON. Dio mi creo per aniare ; io mi ricordo di un fanciiillo sensitive, vago di solitudine, abbandonare il trambusto deha citta, e lontano nei campi voharsi indietro a contemphirla, come I'Alghieri des- crive il naufrago che uscito fiiori dal pelago alia riva, si volgc all' acqua perigliosa, e guata ; egli si avvolgeva pei boschi, udiva la voce arcana che par che mandi la natura al siio Creatore, ascol- tava commosso 1' armonia degli uccelli, ed invidiava la voce loro per cantare anch' egli un inno di gloria, e le ali per accostarsi al firmamento, perche gli avevano detto il Padre del creato abitfire nei cieli : quanto tesoro di affetto era nell' anima di quel fan- ciullo ! Appena la campana della sera indicava 1' ora dei morti, prosternato davanti alia immagine di Gesu Cristo non senza lacrime la supplicava per le anime dei suoi defiinti . . . per tutti quelli che purgandosi aspettano di sollevarsi alle gioie divine: egli aveva una parola di conforto per qualunque sconsohito. Ah! quel fanciiillo fui io. — GuerrXzzi. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. The ancients pretended that the greatest happiness was not to be born ; and the next, to die young. 2. The Epicureans denied the existence of the soul, and rec- ognized only physical principles : they said the gods did not en- ter into worldly things. 8. The philosopher Cleante earned his living by drawing water during the night, so that he might study by day (to attend to study). 4. Apelles painted a bunch of grapes so natural, that several birds, seeing it, came to peck at it. 5. At Rome, a father emancipated his son by giving him a box on the ear. 6. In Paris, various academies are seen aiming at very differ- ent ends. There is the Academy of Music, which excites (moves) PARTICIPLES. 165 the passions ; and the School of Philosophy, to quiet them : the Fencing Academy, which teaches how to kill men ; and the Medi- cal Academy, to preserve life. 7. The painter Caracci, having been despoiled by certain thieves, knew^ so well hoAv to delineate their physiognomy, and paint their faces, that they were discovered and arrested, VOCABULARY. 1. Pretended, pretendevano ; to be born, ndscere ; to die, mo7^ire. 2. To deny, negdre ; recognized, riconohhero ; they said, dice' vaiio. 3. Earned, guadagnava. 4. Painted, dipinse ; came, vennero. 5. To emancipate, emancipare ; box on the ear, schidffo. 6. Are seen, vedonsi ; moves, muove ; to quiet, acchetdre ; to teach, insegndre ; to kill, cwijnazzdre. 7. To despoil, spoglidre ; to designate, disegndre ; discovered, scoperti, CONVERSAZIONE. Che negd7'ono gli epicurei ? X' esistenza deW dnima. Che riconohhero essi ? Soltdnio i prmcipj fisici. Che dicevano ? Dicevano gli dei non entrdre nelle cose di questo mbndo. Di chi era Bellini r^iaestro ? Di Tizidno. Che fece il pittdre Bellmi per JEgli dipinse la decollazidne di Maonietto secondo ? San Giovdnni Battista. Ne fu coniento il sidtdno ? Loddndo la pittura, avverti V artista d' un errore. Come giiadagndva la vita il Col cavcir dcqua in tempo di jilbsofo Clednte ? notte per attendei^e dllo studio di gidrno. A chi somigliano gli udmini in A un miserdhile prmcipe do- generate ? mindnte sidle cdste delta Gui- nea. Perche ? Perche, diceva ad alcuni Fran- cesi : " Si parla mblto di me in Frdncia ? " Che fretendevano gli antichi ? Pretetidevano, la prima felicita essere il non ndscere, la, se- cdnda, il morir presto. 166 ITALIAN GEAMMAR. CHAPTER XXVI. THE VERBS AND ARE, DARE, FARE, AND STARE* MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Mi rincresce di ddrvi disturbo, I am soriy to disturb you. Fece vista di non intendere, He pretended not to hear. Venite a stare con noi, Come to live with us. Gome state c?' appetito ? How is your appetite ? A che bra siete sblito far colazio- At what hour do you generally ne ? breakfast ? jcJ un ragdzzo che non puo star He is a child who cannot keep fermo, still. Sidmo cosi stdnche che non pos- We are so tired that we can no sidmo piii stare in piedi, longer stand. Ditegli cK egli fdccia come vuo- Tell him that he may do as he Ze, likes. II gusto degli ubmini va sogget- The taste of men is liable to to a mblte vicende, many changes. JSgli non pose gran fcitto cura He did not \my much attention a quello ch' w dtssi, to what I said. To scelsi una moglie secbndo il I took a wife after my own cubr mio^ heart. Non fate capitdle della sua pa- Do not depend upon his word. Da ndi si da in tdvola dlle cm- We dine at five at our house. qnCy Vi darb contezza del suo stdto, I will inform you of his situa* tion. To r inddco qiidnto so e pbsso, a I will induce him, as much as I stare allegro e a fdrsi dniino, can, to drive away melan- choly, and take courage. * Andare, diirr, stare, are the only irregular verbs of the first conjugation. In some of their compoundf5, they become regular; asria7iddre, trasandctre, etc., Avhich are varied like amare. FJre is a "contraction of faccre (now obsolete), of which it retains many forms. It is considered by some grammarians as belonging to the second conjugation, and is irregular in its compounds. VERBS. 167 ITALIANISMS WITH AND ARE (TO GO). kjuesta cosa non va fdtta, Anddr dietro ad uno, Andai'e a voto, in vdno, Anddre alia ventura, Anddre in collera, Andch- sicuj'o, Lascidmo anddre questo, A Idtigo anddre, Anddre altera, To so quel che va detto, II sole va sotto, Anddre bene, Anddrne la vita, II merito va congiunto colla mo- destia, Le ddnne vdnno trattdte con gentilezza. This thing ought not to be done. To follow some one. Not to succeed. To go at random. To get angry. To be sure. Do not speak of that. In the long-run. To be proud. I know what I must say. The sun sets. To succeed. To have one's life at stake. Merit is accompanied by mod- esty. Women ought to be treated with courtesy. WITH DARE (TO GIVE). Dare a cdmhio, Ddre cojnpiniento, Dar da dormire, Dar da ridere, Ddre de' cdlci, Dar fede, Dar luogo, Dar le vele a^ venti, Dar il huon dnno, Ddre il motto, Dar la mdno, Avere a ddre, Ddrsi budn tempo, Ddrsi V acqiia ai piedi, Ddrsi a gdinhe, Ddrsi pejisiere, Dar che dire, Dar giu, Ddre una voce ad uno, Ddre in tdvola, Ddre voce. To put out money at interest. To finish. To lodge. To give cause for laughter. To kick. To believe. To give an opportunity. To set sail. To wish a merry new-year. To give the word. To marry, to shake hands. To be in debt. To live a merry life. To praise one's self. To run away. To care for. To give occasion to talk. To subside, to decline. To call some one. To serve the dinner. To spread a report. 168 ITALIAN GRAjVIMAR. WITH FARE (TO DO), Fate che venga da me. Fare le carte, Questo non fa per me, Aver molto a fare, Non ne ho a fare, Fatevi a me, Far si alia finestra, Tre me si fa, Una settimdna fa, Al far del giorno, Far hello, Non fa forza. Far certo, Fatevi indietro, Far capo ad una, Far del grdnde. Far stare uno. Fare una predica, Far vita stretta, Far sua vbglia, Che vi fa egli che venga o non venga 9 Bid him come to ma. To deal at cards. This will not do for me. To be very busy. I have no need of it. Come near me. To look out of the window. Three months ago. A week ago. At the break of day. To set off. It is no matter. To assure. Go back. To address some one. To be self-important. To restrain some one. To admonish. To live niggardly. To do as one pleases. What is it to you if he cornea or not? WITH STARE (TO BE). Sto per partire. Qui sta il punto, State qudnto vi pidce, Dove state di cdsa ? H tutto sta, s' egli sia hudno a no, La cdsa sta come vi dico, Stare a pane ed dcqua, Gome state vpi ? Egli sta bene, Star cheto, Stdndo alia finestra lo vidi pas- sdre, Sta come una stdtua di mdrmo senza parldre, Ditemi in che inddo sta che egli sia vostro fratelW^ I am on the point of leaving. This is the question. Stay as long as you please. Where do you live ? The point is, if it be good or not. The thing is as I tell you. To live upon bread and water. How do you do ? He is well. To be quiet. Whilst I was at the window, I saw him going by. He stands like a marble statue, without speaking. Tell me, how comes it that he is your brother ? VEKBS. 169 READING LESSON. II fuoco, V dcqua e V ondre. II fuoco, r acqua e 1' onore, fecero un tempo comunella insieme. II fuoco non puo mai stare in un luogo, e 1' acqua anche sempre si muove ; onde tratti dalla loro inclinazione, indussero 1' ondre a far viaggio in compagnia. Prima dunque di partirsi, tutti e tre dissero cbe bisognava darsi fra loro un segno da potersi ritrovare, se mai si fdssero scostati e smarriti 1' uno dalF altro. DIsse ii fuoco : " E se mi avvenlsse mai questo caso che io mi segre- gassi da voi, ponete ben mente cola dove voi vedete fumo ; questo e il mio segnale e quivi mi troverete certamente." — " E me,'-' disse 1' acqua," se voi non mi vedete, non mi cercate cola dove vedrete secciira o spaccature di terra, ma dove vedrete salci, ontani, canmicce o erba molto alta e verde ; andate costa in traccia di me, e quivi saro io." — " Quanto a me," disse 1' onore, " spalancate ben gli occlii, e ficcatemegli bene addosso e tenetemi saldo, perche se la mala ventiira ini guida fuori di cammino, fliccbe io mi perda una volta, non mi trovereste piu." EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. A drop of water complained of remaining unknown in the ocean. Moved to compassion, a genius caused an oyster to swallow it. It became the most beautiful pearl of the East, and was the most splendid ornament of the Great Mogul's throne. 2. Milton, after he became blind, married, for his third wife, a woman who was very beautiful, but of a furious temper. A friend once said to him, tliat his wife w\as like a rose. "I can- not judge so by its color," he replied. " but I do by the thorns." 3. Who would believe that smoking tobacco was in fashion with the English ladies in the sixteenth century ? Every day, when Queen Elizabeth rose, there were (one saw) thirty ladies seated in a circle around her, smoking pi])es. The queen set (gave) them the example ; but one day she broke the pipe, say- ing, " We will renounce a pleasure that evaporates in smoke." 4. A doctor was translating a work. They came to tell him that his wife was very sick, and desired to speak with him. " 1 have only one page to translate," said he ; ." when I will come im- mediately." A second messenger came, and informed him that she was dying. " Two words more, and I have done," said the translator. " Go, return to her." A moment after, they came to tell him that she was dead. " I am very sorry for it," said he ; " she was a good woman : " and he continued his work. 15 170 ITALIAN GKAMINIAE. VOCABULARY. 1. Complained, si dolse ; moved, mdsso ; causeil, fece che ; became, divenne. 2. Become, divenuto ; furious, furibbndo ; can, 'pbsso ; judge, giudicdre. 3. Would believe, crederehhe ; one saw, si vedevano ; seated, seduto ; smoking pipes, pipdvano ; gave, dciva ; broke, spezzo ; we will renounce, rinunzieremo ; evaporates, svapora. 4. Was translating, stdva traducendo ; they came, vennero ; will come, verro ; came, venne ; she was dying, era dgli estremi ; go, anddte ; return, torndte ; I am sorry, me ne rincresce ; con- tinued, continuo. C ON VERS AZIONE. A chi sono cdri i ndmi del Sdr- Son tdnto cdri alV Eurdpa pi, del Paruta e delV AlgardUi? qudnto alV Italia. Che hisdgna fare per V infortu- Bisdgna compidngerlo e soccor- nio ? rerlo se si pud. Per reggere aW ingiustizia degli Un gran cordggio. udmini che e necessdrio ? Chi fu Aldo Manuzio ? H primo celehre stampatore che sia stdto in Europa. E il Zeno ed il Goldoni f Sdno i pcidri del drdmma e della commedia iialidna. Chi fu Bemho ? II primo legislatdre della lin- gua italidna. Cdme si chiamdva anticamenfe Partenope, nome di una Sirena Ndpoli ? che credesi dhhia fonddia la citta. Che si dice della potenza Vene- Ella ha arricchita V Italia e V zidna? ha difesa gran tempo ddi Bdrbari, ADVEEBS. 171 CHAPTER XXVII. ADVERBS. aiNEMONIC EXERCISE. Vi raccontero la cosa per minuto, Osservate minutamente ognicosa, Per ora non posso dirvi di piu, Dove andate cost per tempo ? Dite da vero, oppure hurlcite ? Dove si va cost in fretta ? Cattiva erha ndsce dappertuttOy II tempo pdssa presto, Mi preme assdi di parldrgli, Venke qiianto piii presto potete, l^ ing anil ate di gran lung a* Questa non e gia colpa vostra, Gli uomini imitano molto, e ri- jlettono poco, Chi ohhedisce alia cieca, spesso si pente, Cki sempre ride, spesso ingdn- na, Le sue cose vdnno di bene in meglio, lo non vi voglio neppur guar- ddre 1 Gli ho reso cbnto appimtino di ogni cosa, Di rdro il medico piglia medi- cine^ Non hisbgna mdi parldre a ca- se, Me ne ricorderb per un pezzo, Donde venite ? Dove andate ? I will relate the affair minutely. Observe every thing minutely. I cannot tell you any more now. Where do you go so early ? Are you in earnest, or joking? Where are you going so quickly ? Weeds grow everywhere. Time passes quickly. I much need to speak to him. Come as soon as possible. You are greatly mistaken. This is not your fault. Men imitate much, and reflect little. He who obeys blindly, often repents. He who always laughs, often deceives. His affairs become better and better. I do not wish even to look at you! I have rendered an exact ac- count of every thing. The physician rarely takes medicine. We should never speak at ran- dom. I shall remember it for a long time. Whence do you come ? Where are you going •?. 172 ITALIAN GRAilMAR. ADVERBS. I. The greater portion of the Italian adverbs are formed of a feminine adjective and the noun onente, manner (from the Latin me7is) ; as, .Dotta, learned ; dotta-mente, learn- edly ; sdvia^ wise ; savia-mente, wisely ; dolce, sweet ; dolce-mente, sweetly. If the adjective ends in le or re, the final e is dropped^ for the sake of euphony, in the formation of the adverb : as, Fedele, faithful; fedel-mente, faithfully; maggidre, greater ; niaggior-mente, greatly. II. These adverbs have their comparatives and super- latives formed from the comparatives and superlatives of the adjectives ; as, Piil sincera, more sincere ; ^9Z2> sincer- amente, more sincerely ; 'nieno felice, less happy ; nieno felicemente, less happily; j^'^'udentisshjia, very prudent; prudentissrniamente, very prudently. III. Some adverbs are mere adjectives, and are used also in their comparatives and superlatives ; as, Chidro {chiaramente) , clearly; piu chidro, more clearly; schi- etta (^schiettamente) , candidly; ineno schietta, less candidly; trlste (tristameiite) , sadly; tristissimo, very sadly. IV. The followino- are the other adverbs most in use in Italian : — Adesso, now. m, yy Ora, }3 Alldra, then. Ancdra, still. Tuttdraj }) Taldra, sometimes, {ta Ogndra, always. Sempre, » Sove'nte, often, {spesso, ) Tesfeso, just now. TesU, J J leri, yesferday. ADVERBS OF TIME. Avanti€n, l€r V dltro, U altrieri, lermattina, lers&a, Oggidi, Stamdne, Stascra, Standtte, Domattina, Dimdni, Donidne, the day before yester- the other day. [day. }f yt jj yesterday morning. last evening. to-day. in our days. this morning. this evening. to-night. to-morrow morning to-morrow. i\DVEKBS. 1 Posdimdni , the day after to-morrow. Non mai. never. Posdomdne ) )> » }> >y Omdi, now. Inndnzi, before. Oramdi, a Didnzi, » Oggimdi, j> Prima, yj Qudsi, almost. Didro, afterward. Circa, about. Ddpo, » Incirca, » Pdi, then, smce, afterward. Intdrno, >, Dipdi, » >y )t Tdrdi, late. Dappdi, » » »> Pertempo, soon. Pdscia, >> j> » Presto, quick. Indi, then, afterward. Addgio, slow. Quindi, )) >f Mentre, whilst. Apprdsso, }y f> Intdnto, in the mean time. Infine, in fine. Fraitdnto, )> » » i* Da cdpo. once more. Trattdnto, " )> )i »* Gia, ahready. Dacche, since. Di gia. >> Finche, until. Mdi, never. Qudndo, when. Giammdi, >f Tuttavia, still. OF PL ACE. Qui, here, hither. Ovunque, wherever. Qua, j> » Dovunque, >) Li, there, thither. 6gni ddve. everywhere. La, yy >y Altrdve, elsewhere. Costi, there near you. Altrdnde, >j Costa, >> j> j> Avdnti, before. Coh, there, thither. Davdnli, jj Cola, jy yy Dietro, behind. Sh, up. Didietro, yy Gill, down. Indietro, back. Qnivi, there. Addidtro, j> GCi, >> Sdpra, upon, above. Ivi, y9 Sdtto, under, below. Indi, thence. Abbdsso, below. Quinci, from hence. JEntro, within. Quindi, from thence. Dentro, >> Quassu, here above. Fudri, . without. Quaqqiu, here below. Fudra, yy Insu, upward. Difudri, from without. Ingiu, downward. Difu6ra, j> »> Lassu, tliere above. Alldto, aside. Laggiu, there below. Accdnto, yy Colasm, there above. Attdrno, around. Colaggiu, there below. Dattdrno, j> Costa ggiu. there below near you. Rimpetto, opposite. Costinci, from thence. Dirimpetto, jj 6ve, where. Lungi, far. Ddae, yy Oltre, beyond. Ddnde, whence. 173 15* 174 ITALIAN GKAMMAR. OP ORDER. Prima, DipcH, Quindiy Infine, In giro, Alia fila, first, then. afterward, finally, by turns. in a row. Assi^me, Insi€me, A vic€nda, Al tutto, Al rov€scio, Sossdpra, together. >> by turns, altogether, the reverse, topsy-turvy. OF QUANTITY. Piu, M^no, Mdnco, Assdi, Abbastdnza, enough, A suffici€nza, more, less. much. » Ni^nte, Non giidri, Davantdggio, Alpiu, Ahn^no, Almdnco, nothing, not much, more. at the most, at least. » » OF QUALITY. B€ne, Mdle, App€na, Appdsta, A gdra, A cdso, A tdrto, well. badly. hardly. purposely. emulously. by chance. wrongly. Brancoldne, Inginocchidne, Carpdne, A cavalcidne, Tentdne, Boccdne, crawlingly. on one's knees, upon all fours, astride over, gropingly, with one's face downward. OF AFFIRMATION. SI, Gih, Bene, Invdro, Davvdro, Da dovdro, In verita, yes. yes, certainly. well. indeed, truly, in truth. » » » Maisl, Si, bdne, AffK Appunto, Volenti eri, Benvolentidri, yes, indeed, yes, truly, in faith, just. willingly, very willingly. Malvolentidri, unwillingly. OF NEGATION. No, Mai, Mainh, Cdrto no, Nongia, no, not. never, no, indeed, certainly not. not, not at all. Nonmdi, Mica, Nonmica, Per nulla. never. not. not at all. by no means. Nidnte affdtto, nothing at all. F<5rse, Forseche, Pub dssere. Pub ddrsi, perhaps, may be. OF DOUBT, Per acciddnte, perchance. Per sdrte, „ Per avventura, y> AD\TflRBS. 175 OF COMPARISON. SI, BO, thus. Cost, „ „ Cdme, as. Siccdme, so, as. Piu, more. Meno, less. Assdi, much. Viappiu, a great deal more. Vieppiu, „ „ „ „ Viainm€no, a great deal less. Viemm^no, „ „ „ „ A ginsa, like. A mddo, „ Al pari, „ OF INTERROGATION. Ove 9 where 1 Ddve? where'? whither 1 Ddmle 7 whence ? Qudndo? when 7 Che? Cdme? Perche ? Quanta ? how ? how? why"? how much ? OF CHOICE. Anzi, rather, sooner. Prima, » Piuprdisto, rather, sooner. Piuitdsto, „ I) OF DEMONSTRATION. Ecco, here o?* there is ; lo ! behold ! Eccoqui, here is, here are. Eccoqua, „ „ „ „ there is, there are. EccoTi, Eccola, Qudnd ecco, when, lo ! V. A list of the adjectives which are used in Italian as adverbs : — Fdrte, Spesso, Sddo, Alto, Certo, Tnste, Ddlce, Cliidro, S'hie'tto, Piano, Tarda, Lenta, Presto, Prdnta, Tdsto, lldtto, Tdnta, very much. often. fast, hard. softly. certainly. sadly. sweetly. clearly. candidly. low, softly. late. slowly. soon. readily. speedily. j> so much. Rdra, rarely. Sdlo, only. Tut.to, aU. Pdco, little. Mdlta, much. Trdppo, too much. Bella, handsomely. Budno, very well. M€ylio, better. P^gyio, worse. Aperto, openly. Suhito, immediately Sicura, surely. Dim€ssa, lowly. Sammdssa, humbly. Victno, near. Lontdno, far. In order to know when these words are adjectives, and when adverbs, it is sufficient to observe, whether the^ no ITALIAN GRAMIVIAR. stand by themselves, or are added to or used for a noun : for, in the former case, they are always adverbs; and, in the latter, adjectives. VI. Besides the above adverbs, there are some expres- sions called adverbial phrases; chiefly the following : — ■ Di siihito, li bdtto, In un baleno, In un hatter d' dcchio, P6co fa, Fra pdco, Un pezzo fa, De/le v6lte, AW improvviso, AW avvenire, A minuto, Di fresco, Di budn grdclo, Mio malgrddo, Senza meno, Qiidnto pr(ma, A bello stiidio, A bella pdsta, A meno che, Da per tutto, Per dgni ddve. Ad un trdtto, suddenly, presently, in an instant, in the twinkling of an eye. a little while ago. in a short time, some time ago. at times, miexpectedly. in futm-e. in detail, newly, willingly, against my will, positively, very soon, designedly. miles s. everywhere. at once. Di rddo, Di rdro, Infdtti, Difdtti, Di gran lunga, A lungo anddre, A pill pote're, Di India vdglia, A un di pre'sso, D' alldra in qua, D' dra inndnzi, In quel me'ntre. seldom, rarely. j> » in fact. jj >> by far. in the long-run, in time, with all one's might, unwillingly, almost. since that time, henceforth, in or at that time, exactly, point-blank. Di punto in punto, Di punto in bianco, Di qudndo in qudndo, now and then. Di trdtto in trdtto, ,, „ „ Di tdnto in tdnto, „ „ „ 11 jnu, the utmost. Per lo piu, for the most part, generally. READING LESSON. La P6vera Cieca. E brvina 1' aria — per le contrade, A fiocche a fiocche la neve cade ; E la in ginocchio presso la chiesa, Geme una vecchia donna prostesa: 6rba degli occhi, la poveretta Attende il pane, che a lei si getta . Fate limosina, pietosa gente, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Y6i non sapete die quella donna, Macero il viso, lorda la g6nna, De' suoi concenti coll' armonia Di cento popoli 1' dime rapla ; ADVERBS. 177 Oh quanta invldia ai fortunati Che d' uii sorrlso rendea beati ! Fate limdsina, pietosa gente, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Oh quante volte fuor de' teatri L' immensa folia degl' idolatri Fra mille plaiisi le fea codazzo Fine alia porta del siio palazzo, E riverente stendea il ginocchio Perche scendesse dall' aureo cocchio I Fate limosina, pietosa gente, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Quante dovizie spandeva intorno II suo magnifico vasto soggiorno ! Bronzi, colonne, vasi, cristalli, Argento ed oro, cocchi e cavalli . . . Di fiori e gemme da tiitte bande, Sovra i suoi passi piovean ghirlande . . . Fate limosina, pietosa gente, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Ma un di fra 1' dnsie d' un duolo atroce Perde la vista, perde la voce — Ahi sventurata ! or per le strade Va mendicando 1' altriii pietade, Ella che un giorno per chi gemea De' suoi tesori 1' arche schiudea ! Fate limosina, pietosa gente, Fate limosina alia dolente ! Ma il freddo addoppia — gelida e sp^ssa La n^ve cdpre la genufldssa, Che, pur pregando, intirizzita Stringe il Rosario fra le sue dita — Perche la misera conf idi ancora Nella pietade del ciel, che impldra, Fate limdsina, pietdsa gdnte, Fate limosina alia dolente ! A. FUSINATO. 178 ITALIAN GKAJVOIAR. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. A truly courageous man is he who has a knowledge of danger. We often see men who neither fear nor are afraid of death: yet we cannot call them courageous; because (being), ignorant of danger, they rush forward foolishly. 2. Francis I., going out from the council which had determined upon war with Italy, met his buffoon, who said to him, " Sire, it seems to me that your councillors are fools." — "Why?" asked the king. " Because," he replied, " they have been so long dis- cussing what part of Italy they intend to enter, and have never said a word about the part to go out. Therefore, sire ! take care not to go there at all." A month after this, Francis was a prisoner in Pavia. 3. There are many people who think that they can learn the Italian language in three months ; and (these people), after six months' study, do not know how to say, " I have just written ; the clock has just struck ten ; I sliould like to know it for cer- tain." VOCABULARY. 1. We see, si vedono ; they rush, spiiigono. 2. Going, uscendo ; met, incontrd ; have (been discussing) discussed, hdnno discusso ; said, detto ; take care, avvertite. 3. Think, stimano ; do know, sdnno ; I should like, vorreu CONVERSAZIONE. Che cosa dimando egW^ II perche, Che ora e ? Soiio appena hattute le diecL I^erche non siete venuto ? Perche sono stdto alia villa. E quella dunque la vostra aimca ? E hen lei. Av'ete vino., pane^ forma g,gio, Non ho proprio nulla da ddr- qualche cosa ? vi ? JVon avete neppure una scodella Non ho 7iidla in verita, di Idtte ? E dunque un dnno e mezzo ch'' No, non sbno ancora qumdici eUa e partita'^ mesi? Dove dimora il suo Signbr pd- Dimora qui vicmo. dre'^ Che effetto fa la medichia ? Guarisce talvolta e consbla spes- so. Qudndo condsce uno il valor e Qudndo e asciutto (dry) il poz- deir dcqua ? zo. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 179 CHAPTER XXYin. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. MNEMONIC EXERCISE. Vza, via ; meno cicirle ! Oime / che vedo men ? Deh ! non lo fdte^ Oh bella ! son venuto per questo, Qudnclo e cost, vddo via, Cost dico ; ancor lo, La CQsa ando pur cost, JEM, quel giovine ! A.nimo, ammo hdsta cosi ! JEhi, quella giovine^ Mvviva, il n ostro Sempronio ! To ve V ho pur defto, Non ha pure most r a to di conos- cermi, Oh! se potessi ridere, rider ei pur di cuore, Al can che fugge, ognun grida, ddgli, dcigli, Per Bdcco, piii ci penso, e meno so comprendere il 7no- tivo, Questo partito e il migliore ; d.nzi, il solo cui dehha appi- glidrmi, E cosi, che cdsa faccidmo ? Addio, cdro : dove si va ? Via, non lo sgriddte : povermo ! To m dmo, per che lo meritdte, Come, come ; less talk ! Alas ! what do I see ? _ Do not do it, I beg of you. Indeed ! I came on purpose. Since it is so, I shall go. I say so ; even I. It certainly went off so. Here, young man ! Courage ! that will do. Well, miss. Bravo, our Sempronio ! I have, however, told you. He did not even appear to know me. Oh ! if I could laugh, I would laugh willingly. When a dog runs, people cry after him, after him. Truly, the more I think of it, the less I understand the motive. Tliis part is the best ; nay, the only one which I ought to take. Well, what are we going to do? Adieu, my dear: where are vou ffoino;? There, don't scold him : poor boy! I love you, because you deserve it. 180 ITALIAN GRA]^IMAR. CONJUNCTIONS IN COMMON USE. E, and. Nonostdnte, 0, or, either. Nondimeno, Ne, nor, neither. Nientedime'no, Se, if, whether. Con tulto cib. still, nevertheless, Ma, but. Non per tdnto, ■ notwithstanding, Perb, Non per questo. for all that. Che, that. Cib non ostdnte. Pure, yet, nevertheless. Cib non di meno, Gm, yet, already. Tuttavia, Anzi, nay, rather, on the Non gia. not at all, not in- contrary. deed. Anche, also, even. Non sdlo, ) Non che, not only, not mere- Anco, „ „ ly- Eziandio, „ „ Purche, provided. Altresi, „ „ -4 77ieno che. unless. Anc6ra, also, even, again. Anzi che. rather, sooner. Eppiire, yet, nevertheless. Anzi che no. rather than not. Ossia, or, either. rather so thn,n Ovve'ro, „ „ otherwise. 0/?/)M/-e, „ „ Si, so, thus. Nemmeno, neither, not even. Cost, >j j> Nemmdnco, „ „ „ Cdme, as, like. Neppure, „ „ „ Siccdme, » j> Nednche, „ „ „ Sicche, so, thus, wherefore. Tampdco, „ „ „ Cost che. >> >> » Se mdi, if ever, if indeed. Talche,^ so, so that. Se pure, „ „ Giacche, since. Se perb, if however. Cioe, that is. Se non, unless, except, but. Cioe a dire. that is to say. Se non che, „ „ „ Vale a dire. jj j> Accib, 1 Ahn^no, at least. Acciocche, in order that, to the Ahndnco, » Affine, end that. Di pill. moreover. Affinche, J Indltre, besides,besides this. Ancorche, even that. Oltrecche, i> yy y> Contuttoche, „ „ Oltraccib, )) }} )> Che, for, why, because. D' aUrdnde, )) }) }> Perche, „ „ „ Ddnque, then, therefore. Poiche, ) because, since, as. Adiinque, » )> Posciache, J Perocdte, after. dnde, ) Ladnde, > wherefore, where- Imperocche, Ptrciocche, hnperciocche. because, whereas, as, since. Quindi, ) Percib, upon. therefore, for which reason. Conciosiacche, J In sdmma, ) In fine, J in short, in conclu- Qnantjcnque, although. sion. Sebbe'ne, „ Sia che. whether, or, either. Benche, „ Vudi, 3) }■) >> Comeche, „ Dei re'sto. otherwise, besides. Avvegnache, 1 Per ditto, i> »» CONJUNCTIONS. 181 Tdnto, Qudnto, Qudndo, Qudnd' dnche, In guisa die, In mddo che, In maniera che, Di viddo che, Di maniera che. as. }} when, even when. so that, in such a manner. Intdnto, \ Frattdnto, ) Me'ntre, Mentrecche, Salvo, Ecce'tto, Trdnne, Fuorche, Fdrse, 6ra, in the mean time, mean* while, whilst, whilst, whilst that. j> >> >} save, saving, except. perhaps, now. » I. JP{ire is often used In the sense of ancdra (even), and s(^lo (only) . II. Per che has four significations : 1. In an interroga- tive phrase, it has the meaning of "why;" as. Per che anddte via? why do you go away? 2. Followed by a verb in the subjunctive, it signifies "in order that;" as, JSfon vi ho dcito il dendro -perche lo spendidte suhito, I did not give you the money that (in order that) you should immediately spend it. 3. It is used for "though ;" as in the phrase of Dante, JSfon lascidvam V anddr, perche e' dicesse^ We did not cease walking, although he spoke. 4. It also signifies "because;" as, Perche ri- dete? Perche ho v6glia di rider e, Why do you laugh? Because I wish to lauijh. III. Anzi is sometimes used for "before;" as, Anzi tempo, dnzi V 6ra, anzi la rtiia niSrte, before the time, before the hour, before my death. IV. Mentre, nel mentre che or mentre che, in tempo che, signifies "whilst" or "whilst that;" as, Mintr' egli cantdvcc, io balldva, whilst he sung, I danced. V. Many conjunctions, as nondim^eno, cid non os- tdnte, etc., contain in themselves a pronoun, a prepo- sition, an adverb, etc. ; but, from their office of joining sentences together, they are commonly reckoned amongst conjunctions, though in fact they are but conjunctive phrases, 16 182 ITALIAN GKAMMA.K. mTERJECTIONS IN COMMON USE. Ah! Eh! e! Ih! Oh! o! Uh! Jhi! Ehi! 6hi! di! Uhi ! Deh! Doh! Ah, ah ! Eh, eh ! Oh, oh! Poh! Puh! pu! Eia ! Ola! Cost ! Si! Gia! Pure ! Cdme ! Su!^ Orsu ! Su, sii ! Via! Via, via! Eh via ! Verqdqna ! Oiho ! Animo ! Cordggio ! Fate cudre! Bene ! Bravo ! Budno ! Viva ! Eh viva ! evviva ! Cdpperi ! Cdppita ! Poffdre! Ohbdlla! Ecco ! ah! ba! alas! eh! ih! oh.! ho! uh! ah! alas! [there! here ! ho hey ! ho ah! oh! ah ! alas ! ah ! alas ! pray ! prithee ! oh ! pshaw ! ah, ah ! eh, eh ! oh, oh ! poll! pu ! pooh ! halloo ! holla ! ho there ! so ! thus ! yes, certainly ! yet! how ! how then ! why ! why so ! up, up ! come ! come then! away ! fie ! fie upon ! for shame ! oh, fie ! oh, fough ! courage! cheer up! )> >) )) >> well! bravo ! very well ! good ! long live ! huzza ! ay ! heyday ! mar- ry! fine ! lo! behold! Ahime ! aime! Ehime! eime! Ohime! oime! Ome ! Oite! Oise ! Gudi ! A into ! Dio ! Ldsso ! Ldsso me! Ahi ldsso ! Pdvero me ! Miser me ! Meschino me ! Dolente me ! me bedto ! me felice ! Bedto me ! Felice me! Alto! Sta! Ohe! Gudrda ! Ldrgo ! Pidno, alas (me) ! alas (thee) ! alas (him or her)! woe ! help ! Heavens ! alas ! wretched that I am ! unfortu- nate that I am ! wretched me ! poor me 1 happy that I am 1 happy me ! halt! Btop ! take care ! hare , . care ! beware ! >, ) softly ! gently! io, ) slowly ! Addgio Zi! zUto! Cheto ! Non piu! Bdsta ! Silenzio ! Tacdte ! Anddte ! Baddte ! Air e'rta ! Stdte air drta ! Di grdzia ! Per carita ! Per amdr delcidlo Merce, \ Misericdrdia, ) Possihile ! Appwito ! Pensdte ! siowiy : whist! hush! quiet ! stiU ! enough ! silence ! ■ away ! mind ! have care ! beware ! pray! for charity's sake ! .' for heaven's sake ! mercy ! mercy ui)on us ! is it possible ! exactly ! just ! just think ! * * It is important to observe, that, as some of these interjections are used to express different and even contrary emotions or affections of the mind, their exact signification can only be determined by the sense of the words which accompany them, or give rist> to the exclamation. INTERJECTIONS. 183 The interjections Idsso, pdvero, mzsei'o, meschino, hedto {me I), are mere adjectives; and, when used by a female, take the feminine termination, — Idssa, p(>vercf, misera (??ie/), etc. ; and in the plural make Idssi, p6v- eri (ndif), etc., for the masculine; and Jdsse, ^9(5've7'e ( 7i (^2*/), etc., for the feminine ; as, — Ldssa 7ne / in che maV ora ndc- Alas ! in what evil hour was I qui ? born ? Miseri noi ! che sidm, se Iddio Miserable that we are ! what ci Idscia ? becomes of us, if God for- sakes us ? Brdvo, zUto, che to, are also adjectives ; and when used in speaking to a female, or to more than one male or female, follow the same rule ; as, — Brdva ! come qudndo ? Bravo ! as when ? Zittij un po' I Hush, a little ! Brdvo is also used in its superlative, and makes hravissimo^ bravissima, bravtssiini, bravissime, "bravis- simo." READING LESSON. La Rondinella. Rondinella pellegrina Che ti posi in sul verdne Ricantando ogni mattina Quella flebile canzone, Che vuoi dirmi in tua favella Pelleo;rina rondinella ? Sohtaria nell' oblio, Dal tuo sposo abbandonata, Piangi forse al pianto mio Vedovella sconsolata ? Piangi, piangi in tua favella, Pellegrina rondinella. Pur di me manco infelice Tu alle penne almen t' affidi, 184 ITALIAN GRAJMMAR. Scorri il lago e la pendice, Empi r aria cle' tiioi gridi, Tutto il giorno in tua favella, Lui chiamando, o rondinella ! Oh, se ancli' io ! Ma lo contende Questa bassa angusta volta, Dove sole non risplende, Dove r aria ancor m' e tolta, D' onde a te la mia favella Giunge appena, o rondinella ! H settembre innanzi viene, E a lasciarmi ti pre pari : Tu vedrai lontane arene, . Nuovi monti, nuovi mari, Salutando in tua favella, Pellegrina rondinella. ■'&' Ed io tutte le mattine E.iaprendo gli occlii al pianto Era le nevi e fra le brine Credero d' udir quel canto, Onde par che in tua favella Mi compianga, o rondinella. Una croce a prima vera Troverai su questo suolo ; Rondinella in su la sera Sdvra a lei raccogli il volo : Dille pace in tiia favella, Pellegrina rondinella ! EXERCISE FOE, TRANSLATION. 1. Lycurgus prohibited those who returned from a feast taking a light, in order that the fear of not being able to find their homes might prevent their becoming intoxicated. 2. There is nothing meaner than to see hypocrites launching their thunders against the weaknesses of humanity, whilst their heart is the sink of every vice. 3. Vespasian incurred the danger of being condemned to death, because he gaped while the fool Nero was singing on the stage in Rome. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 1S5 4. During summer evenings, Dante was accustomed to sit upon a stone, which is still religiously preserved in Florence. One evening, a man unknown to him passed before him, and said, " Sir, I have promised to give an answer, and know not how to get myself out of the difficulty : you, who are so learned, can suggest it to me. What is the best mouthful ? " Dante imme- diately answered, " An egg." A year after, at the same hour, Dante being seated on the same stone, the same man, whom he bad not since seen, returned, and asked, " With what ? " Dante, without hesitation, answered, " With salt." VOCABULARY. 1. Prohibited, i^ze^o ; returned, torndvano ; might prevent, ^m- pedisse ; intoxicated, uhhriacdte. 2. Launching thunders, scaglidre i fulmini ; sink, sentina. 3. Incurred (ran), corse; gaped, shadiglidva. 4. Was accustomed, soUva ; unknown, sconosciuto ; to get out, etc., trdrmi d' affdre ; can suggest, potreste suggerire ; mouthful, boccdne ; without hesitation, senza metier tempo in mezzo. CONVERSAZIONE. Qiidl fu it regdlo che fece tin Ujio scudo, credendo forse con colonnello ad iino de sudi gra- cid di ricompen&ctrlo di tdnta natieri che pugndndo valoro- perdita. sissimamente aveva perdute cmihe le hrdccia ? Tdle meschinitd non eccito essa CertatJienfe, e con ragidne dtsse lo sdegno del brdvo solddto ? al suo Colonnello — Credete fdrse cJi' lo non dhhia perduto che un pdio di gudnti ? Qiidle fdma hdnno lascidta Lu- una tristissima fdma, perche dovico XL e Ferdindndo d' fiirono entrdmhicrudelieper- Arragona ? fidi. Non si chiamdrono, il primo Si, e cid prdva che V dmhra del cristianissimo e Z' cdtro cattd- trdno pud coprire immensi lico ? delitti. Che rispdse Ddnte a chi gli do- Tin ubvo con sale. manddva qualfdsse il miglibr boccdne ? 16* 186 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. ^n^xlxKx-Q & txhB* A.vere^ to have. ESTFINITIVE MOOD. — Ave're, to have. INDICATIVE MOOD. PKESENT TENSE. hoar d, Mi or di, haoT d (ace), I hare, thou hast, he has. abbidmo (avemo)^ avcte, hdnno or anno, we have, j'ou have, they have. IMPERFECT TENSE. to nveva or avea^ tu avevi, igli aveva or avca, I had. thou hadst. he had. avevdmo, avevdte, avevano {avieno), we had. you had. they had PERFECT TENSE. &>bi, avestij ebbe, I had. thou hadst. he had. ave?}itno, avcste, ebbero, we had. you had. they had. FUTURE TENSE. • avrdi avrai, avrdy I shall have, thou wilt have, he -mU. have. avremo, avrete, avrdnno, we shall have. you will have. ■ they will have. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. avrei (avna), avrdsti, avribbe (avria), the 10 abbia, che tu dbbia or ahbi, che egli dbbia, die w avessi, die tu avessi, die egli avesse, abbl tu, abbia egli, I should have, thou wouldst have, he would have. uvrcmmo, we could have. avrcste, you should have. avrcbbero (avriano), they would have. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. if I may have. if thou mayst have. if he may have. die abbidmo, che abbidte, che dbbiano, if we may have, if you may have, if they may have. UrPERFECT TENSE. if I might have. if thou couldst have. if he would have. che avessimo, che avcste, che avessero {-ino), have thou, let him have. IMPERATIVE MOOD. abbidmo ndi, abbidte voi, dbbiano cglino. if we should have, if you might have, if they might havft let us have. have ye. let them have. GERUND. avdndo, having. PARTICIPLES. having. avente, aviito,avuta (s.), \ aviiti, aviite (p.), | avendo aviito, had. having had. COMPOUND TENSES. w ho aviito, 10 avcvn nviUo, 10 cbbi aviito, io avro aviito, to avrei aviito, che 10 abbia aviito, I have had. I had had. I had had. I shal! have had. I should have had. if I may have had. che io avessi aviito, if 1 might have had. AUXILIARY VERBS. IS"/ ]£ssere^ to be. INFINITIVE MOOD. — Asere, to be. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. to s6no^ seii or «e', lam. thou art. he is. sidmo (semo), sicte (sale), sono, we are. you are. they are. IMPERFECT TENSE. to era, I was. thou wast, he was. eravuino (6ramo), travdte, crano, we were, you were, they were. PERFECT TENSE. fosti, fu (file). I was. thou wast, he was. fuynmo, foste, furono (funno), we were. 30U were, they were. FUTURE TENSE. sard (fin), sardi, sard (fia,fie), I shall be. thou \vilt be. he will be. saremo, aarete, sardnno (fiano). we shall be. you \sill be. they will be CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. sarii (sar'ia, fira), I should be. sarcsti, thou wouldst be. sarebbe (saria,/6ra), he would be. sarcTnmo. sarcste, sarebbero (sariano), SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. che 10 sm, eke tu s'la, or sit, die egli sia, che 10 fissi {fiissi), che tu fossi, die egli fdsse, t'za, or sU'tu, a'la egli. if I maybe. if thou mayst be. if lie may be. che sidmo, die sidte, che s'latw, or s'leno, we should be. you should be. they should be if we may be. if you may be. if they may be. IMPERFECT TENSE. if I were, or should be if thou Mert. if he were. che fossimo, if we were. che foste, if you were. chefossero (fossino), if they were. IMPERATIVE MOOD. be thou, let him be. stamo noi, sidte v6i, siano, or sieno dglino, let us be. be ye. let them be. (ssindo, GERUND. * being. stdti, state' (■[).), essendo stdto, PARTICIPLES I been, having been. COMPOUND TENSES. 10 sono stdto, 20 era stdto, 10 sard stdto, to sarci stdto, che io s'la stdto, che io fdssi stdto. I have been. T had been. I shall have been. I should have been. if I ni.iy have been. if 1 might have been. * Tlie past participle of the verb dssere always agrees with the subject in gender and number : thus we say, 10 s6no stdto. if the subject is masculine sin^^ular ; w sono stdta, If feminine singular; noi sidmo stdti, if masculine plural; iioi s'lamo state, if feminine plural ; and so on. 188 ITAI.IAK GRAMMAR. ^tgxxlixx W !^xhB. VARIATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. Active verbs, in the compound tenses, are varied with the auxiliary verb avere, to have. am'ure. FIRST CONJUGATION. A.7ndre, to love. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN dre, INFINITIVE MOOD. to love. Present. Present. amr&ndo, loving. Past, avere amato, to have loved. GERUND. Past, avendo amalo^ having loved. Present, am-dnte (s.), am-dnti (p.),* losing. PARTICIPLE. Past. ani-dto (m. s.), am-dti (p.), loved. am-dia (f s.), a?«-d/e(p.),* loved. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. dm-o, I love, or do love. am-idmoy •we love. dm-i, thou lovest. am-dle, you love. dm-a, he loves. dm-anOf they love. Imperfect. io am-dva^ I loved, or did love. am-avdvio, we loved. am-dvi, thou lovedst. a??i-ai-dte, you loved. igli am-dva^ he loved. a?n-dvano, they loved. Perfect. am-di, I loved, or did love. am-dmmo, we loved. am-dsti. tbou lovedst. am-dste, you loved. am-o, he loved. am-drono (am ■dro), they loved. Future. am-ero,^ I shall or uill love. am-ernno, we shall or wull love. am-erdi, thou wilt love. am^ercte., you will love. arn-erd. he will love. a7T2-erdnno, they will love. I * The present participle of active verbs, like that of avere, agrees with the subject of tho proposition in gender and number. The past participle agrees^ sometimes, with the object in gender and number. t The verbs of this conjugation in the future and the conditional change the a of their terminationH for e, and make lan-'id^ instead of ATW-aro, etc. REGULAR VERBS. 189 ho amdto, hdi at7idto, ha amato, I have Icved. thou hast loved. he, she, or it has loved COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. ahbiamo amdto, avcte anidto^ hdnno amdto. lo aveva amdto, I had loved. PlujJerfect. I avevdmo amdto, we have loved, you have loved, they have loved. we had loved. Second Pluperfect, ibbi amdto, I had loved. Future Anterior, avrd amdto, I shall have loved SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. che 10 dm-i (dw-e), that T love, or may love. che tu dm-i, that thou lovest. che cgli dm-i{dm-e\ that he loves. che am-idmo, che am-idte, che dm-ino, Imperfect. che to am-dssi, che tu a7)i-dssi, eke egli am-dsse, if I loved, or should love, il thou lovedst. if he loved. che am-'lssimo, che am-dste, che am-dssero {-ino), COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. che to abbia amdto, that I have loved, or may have loved. Pluperfect, the 10 avessi amdto. that we love, that you love, that they love. if Tve loved, if you loved, if they loved. if I had loved. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. am'erei (am-er'ta), I should love. am-eresti, thou wouldst love. am-er6bbe{am-eria), he would love. am-ercTumo, we should love. am-ereste, you would love. am-erebbero (amer'iano), they would love. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. avrei amdto, I should, would, or could have loved, or might have loved. IMPERATIVE MOOD. dm.-a tu, dm-i egli, love thou, let him love. am-idmo ndi, am-dte v6i, dm-ino eglino. let us love. love ye. let them love. Besides the foregoing changes of termination, there are some verbs of the first conjugation wliich undergo in some persons and tenses a change of orthography. Verbs ending in cidre, (/tare, drop the ?', which follows c, (/, whenever cl, (/i, precede e, i; as, Bacldre, to kiss; fref/idre, to adorn. Verbs ending in idre, in Avhich ia form one syllable, drop the ^ whenever it is followed by another i; as, Noidre^ to annoy. Verbs ending in idre, in which ia form two syllables, drop the i only when it would be followed by the vowels ia; as, Invldre, to send. 100 IT.VT.IAN GKAMM/\.Il. Variation of the Verb Cerciire. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN cdre. cerc-o, cercH-if cerc-a. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I search, or do search, thou Bearchest. he searches. cercH-tamo, cere-ate, cerc-ano. we search, you search, they search. cercH-cro, cercE-erdi, cercH-erd, Future. 1 siiall (;/ will search, thou wilt search. he will search. cercn-eremo, ceim-ercte, cercR-erdnno, we shall .search, you will search, they will search. che 10 cercn-i (-«), ehe tu cercu-ii die cgli cercll-i (-e), SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I search, that thou search, that he search. che cercn^dmo, che cercn-idtey che ccrcu-ino, that we search, that you search that they search. cercn-erei {-eria), cercn-frcsti, cercu-crcbbe, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. I should .'?earch. thou wouldst search, he would search. cercn-erdmmo, ce.rcn-ercste, cercH-erehbero, we should search, you would search, they would search cerc-a tu, cercH-i egli, IMPERATIVE MOOD. search thou, let him search. cercTi^idmo ndi, cere-ate v6i, cercH.-ino egliiio, let us search. search ye. let them search. Tenses conjugated like those of the regular verb are omitted. REGULAR VERBS. 191 Variation of the Verb Pregdre. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN gdve. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. preg-o, pregn-i, pr^g-a, ■ I entreat, or do entreat, thou entreatest. he entreats. pregn-idino, preg-dte, prcg-ano, we entreat, you entreat, they entreat. FuV xre. pregn-erd, pregu-erdi, pregB.-erdy I shall or will entreat, thou wilt entreat, he will entreat. pregn-erdmo, pregn-ercte, pregu-erdnno, we shall entreat, you will entreat they will entreat eke to pregH-i (-e), c/i€ tu prcgH-i, che dgli prcgu-i (-e), SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I entreat, that thou entreat, that he entreat. che pregn-idmo, eke pregH-idte, che prcgu-ino, that we entreat. that you entreat, that they entreat. pregn-erei, pregn-eresti, pregu-erebbe, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. I should entreat, thou wouldst entreat. he would entreat. pregn-eremmo, pregn-ereste^ pregn-erebbcro, we should entreat, you would entreat, they would entreat BIPERATIVE MOOD. preg-a tu, pregn-i igli^ entreat thou, tet him entreat. pregn-idmo ndi, preg-dte v6i, prcgn-tno cglinoy let us entreat. entreat ye. let them entreat 192 ITALIAN GllAIVIMAR. SECOND CONJUGATIOK - The verbs of this conjugation are commonly divided into two classes, — those ending in ere (long), accented, and those ending in ere (short), unaccented: both of tliese in the perfect have two terminations, ei and etti, except a few which have the termination ei only. Variation of the Verb Tem^re. PARADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN Ire (lONG), ACCENTED, ANr OF THOSE WHICH, IN THE PERFECT, END IN ti AND etU. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present tem-dre, to fear Past, avere temuto, to have feared. Present, tem-indo^ fearing. GERUND. I Past. I avendo temuto, having feared. PARTICIPLE. Present. Um-6nte (s.), tem-enti (p.), fearing. Past. tem-uto (m. s.), temuti (p.), feared. tem-iUa (f. s.), temiite (p.), feared. INDICATIVE MOOD. SBIPLE TENSES. Present. tem-o^ tem-e. I fear, or do fear, thou fearest. he fears. te?n-idnio^ tem-ete, tem-ono. Imperfect. to tem-eva or tem-6a, I feared, or did fear. tem-evi, thou fearedst. 4gli tem-eva, he feared. tetn-evdmo, teni'evate, tem-evano, Perfect. tem-m or few-liTTl, I feared, or did fear. tem-esti, thou fearedst. tem-ii or ^cw-rtte, he feared. tem-emmo, te7fj-este, «e?n-ER0NO, we fear, you fear, they fear. we feared, you feared, they feared. we feared, you feared, they feared. KEGULAR VERBS. 193 tem-erd, tem-erdi, tem-erd, Future. I shall or will fear, thou wilt fear. he will fear. tem-cremo^ tetn-erete, terrt'erunno, we shall or will fear, you will fear, they will fear. ho temuto^ COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. ) I have ffeared. | abbiamo temuto, we have fbared. Pluperfect io aveva temuto, I had feared, etc. che io tem-a, die tu tcm-a or -i, che cgli tem-a, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. that I fear, that thou Ibar that he fear. che tem-idmo, che tem-idte, che tem-ano, that we fear, that you fear, that they fear. che 10 tetn-essij che tu tem-essi, die dgli tem-esse, Imperfect. if I feared. if thou fearedst. if he feared. che tem-essimo, che tem-este^ che tem-essero, if we feared, if you feared, if they feared. Perfect, die io abbia temuto, that I have feared COMPOUND TENSES. Pluperfect. che io avessi temuto, if I had feared. tem-erei (-ena), iem-eresti, tem-erebbe {-eria), CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. I should fear, thou wouldst fear, he would fear. tem-eremmo, tem-ercste, tem-errbhero, we should fear, you would fear, they would fear. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. avrei temuto, I should, would, or could have feared, or might have feared. IMPERATIVE MOOD. tdm-i tu, iem-a egli, fear thou, let him fear. tem-idmo ndi, tem-ete v6i, titn-ano eglino. let us fear. fear ye let them fear. 17 194 ITALIAN GKAMMAK. Variation of the Verb Tessere. PAHADIGM OF THE VERBS ENDING IN hx (SHORT) , UNACCENTED j AND OE THOSE WHICH, IN THE PERFECT, END IN H ONI.Y. rNEINITlVE MOOD. Present, tiss-ere, to weave. Past av&re tessuto, to have ■woven. GERTJOT). Present, tess-endo, weaving. Past, avendo tessuto, having woven. PARTICIPLE. Present, uss-ente {8.)ytess-enti (p.), weaving. Past. tessuto (m. s.), tess-uti (p.), woven. tess-uta (f. s.), tess-ute (p.), woven. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present, tiss-o, I weave, or do weave, or am weaving. | tess-idmo (tess-emo), we weave. LnperJ'ect. lo t€ss-6va or tess-ea^ I wove, or did weave, or was weaving. Perfect. tess-iilj I wove, or did weave. tess-esti, thou wovest. tess-i {tess-eo)f he wove. tess-emmo, we wove. tess-dste^ you wove. fess-iiRONO, they wove. Future, tess-ero, I shall or will weave. REGULAR VERBS. 195 COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. Pluperfect. ho tessiito, I have ■woven to aveva tessiito^ I had woven, etc SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. Imperfect. the to tess-a^ that I weave. che lo tess-essi, that I wove. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. Pluperfect. ehf to abhia tessuto, that I may have woven, che lo avessi tessuto, if I might have woven. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. P7'esent. tess-erei {tess-er'ia), I should, would, or could weave, or might weave. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. avrH tessxito, I should, would, or could have woven, or might have woven. IMPERATIVE MOOD. tess-i tUf weave thou. Verbs ending in cere (long), accented, in order to preserve the soft sound of o in all their inflections, take an i after that consonant, whenever it is followed by o, 0, u ; as, Tacere, to be silent. ^ Verbs ending in iere drop the t whenever it is followed by another i; as Empiere, to fill. 196 lT^y:.IAN GRMOIAR. THIRD CONJUGATION. The verbs of this conjugation are divided into three classes, — those which, in the present of the indicative, end in o ; those wliich end in isco ; and those which have both of these termina- tions. Ya7Hatio7i of the Fer5 Sentire. P^\JIADIGM OF THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH, IN THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, END IN ONLY. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. I Past. sent-irCf to hear. | avere sent'tto, to have heard. ■ Present. sent-endOy hearing. GERUND. I Past. I avendo sentito^ having heard. Present. PARTICIPLE. sent-ente (s.), sent-enti (p.), hearing. Past. sent-'ito (m. s.), sent-'iti (p.), heard. sent-'ita (f. s.), sent-'ite (p.), heard. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. sent-o^ sent-j, sent-iSj I hear, or do hear, thou hearest. he hears. sent-idr7io, sent-ite, sent-O'SO, we hear you hear, they hear. Imperfect. • ic sent-wa or sent-ia tent-'ivi, egli sent'iva or sent-ia 1 heard, or did hear, thou heardst. ,, he heard. sent-ivamo, sent-ivate, sent-ivano, we heard, you heard, they heard Perfect. sent-ii, sent-'isti, sent-i (sent-io), I heard, or did hear, thou heardst. he heard. sent-itnmo, sent-iste, sent-irono, we heard, you heard, they heard REGULAR VERBS. 197 sent-ird, sent-ir at, sent-ird, Future. I shall or will hear, thou wilt hear, he will hear. sent-iremo, sent-ircte, sent-irdnno. we will hear, you will hear, they will hear. COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect, he sentito, I have heard. Pluperfect. 10 aveva sent'ito. I had heard, etc. che 10 sent-A, che til sent-A or che egli scnt-A, che 10 sent-'issi, che tu sent-'issi, che sent-isse, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. that I hear, that thou hear, that he hear. che seiit-ianiOy che sent-idte, che sent-A^O, Imperfect. that I heard, that thou heardst. that he heard. che sent-'issimo, che sent-'iste, che sent-tsserOf that we hear, that you hear, that they hear. if we heard, if you heard, if they heard. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect, io dbbia sent'ito^ that I may have heard. Pluperfect. 10 avdssi sent'ito, if I had heard. sent-irci {-iria), sent-ircsti, sent-ircbbe {-ir'ia), CONDITIONAL MOOD. SBIPLE TENSE. Present. I should hear, thou wouldst hear, he would hear. sent-iremmo, sent-ircste, sent-irebbero, we should hear, you would hear, they would hear. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. avr6i sent'ito, I should, would, or could have heard, or might have heard. IMPERATIVE MOOD. s6nt-i tu, sent-A cgli. hear thou, let him hear. sent^amo ndi, sent-'ite v6i, sent-Amo eglino, 17* let us hear. hear ye. lot them hear. 198 ITALIAN GEAJVIMAR. Variation of the Verb Esibire. PARADIGM OF THOSE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, WHICH, IN THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE, HAVE THE TERMINATION tSCO ONLY. INFINITIVE MOOD. Esib-ire, esib-dndoj Present. Past. to offer. avere esibito, to have offered GEEUND. • Present. Past. offering. avendo esibitOj ha-ving offered. PARTICIPLE. Present, esib-dnte (s.), esibdnti (p.), offering. Past. esib-ito {m. s.), esib-iti (p.), offered. esib'ita {f. s.), esib-ite (p.), offered. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. esib-isCO, esib-tsci, cst6-lSCK, I offer, or do offer, thou offerest. he offers. esib-idmo, esib-ite, esib-tsCOTHOf •we offer, you offer, they offer. Imperfect. to esib-iva or -la, esib-ivi., esib-iva or -ia, I offered, or did offer, thou offeredst. he offered. esib-ivdmo, esib-ivdte, esib-ivano, •we offered, you offered, they offered. Perfect. esibi, to be asked : but then they are used in the tliird person only ; as, Si domdndA, it is asked : si e domanddto it has been asked ; etc. 18 206 ITALIAN GRAJyOIAR. VARIATION OF NEUTER VERBS. Neuter verbs are generally varied with the auxiliary verb essere, to be, according to the conjugation to which they belong. Variation of the Verb Partire. PARADIGM OF THE NEUTER VERBS. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present, partire, to depart. Past, issere partita (m. s.), partiti (p.), partita (f s.), partite (p.),* to hare departed Present, partendo, departing. GERUND. essendo partite Past. ), having departed PARTICIPLE. partdnie (m. s.), departing. Present. 1 partenti{T^.), departing. partito (m. s.), partita (f. s.), departed, departed. Pi ISt. partiti (p.), partite (p.), departed, departed. INDICATIVE MOOD. pdrto, partti. Present. I depart. Perfect. I departed. SIMPT<-R TENSES. 10 partiva, partird, Impel feet. I departed. Future. I shall or will depart * The past participle of the neuter verbs that are varied with essere, agrees with tb« subject of the verb in gender and number. NEUTER VERBS. 207 COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. | Pluperfect. io sdno partita, -a, I haye departed. | io era partita, -a, I had departed. Second Pluperfect. fHi partita, -a, I had departed. Future Anterior, sard partita, -a, I shall have departed SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present, che io p&rta^ that I depart. Imperfect, che io partissi, if I departed. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. I Pluperfect, the io sia partita, -a, that I have departed. | che iafdssi partita, -a, if I had departed CONDITIONAL MOOD., SIMPLE TENSE. Past. pcurtirH, I should, would, or could depart, or might depart. COMPOUND TENSE. Present. sarii partita, I should, would, or could have departed, or might hare departed. IMPEEATIVE MOOD. p&rti tu, depart then. 208 ITALIAN GRAMaiAR. VARIATION OF PRONOMINAL VERBS. Pronominal verbs are varied with the auxiliary essere, to be, according to the conjugation to which their termination belongs. Variation of the Reflective Verb Pentirsi. PAKADIGM OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present, pentirsi, to repent one's self. Past. isser-si pent'itOf to have repented one's self. GERUND. Present, pentdndo-si, repenting one's self. Past. essendo-si pent'ito, having repented one's self. PARTICIPLE. Present, pentcnte-si (s.), repenting one's self. Past. pent'ito-si (m. s.), pentiti-si (p.), having repented one's self. pent'ita-si (f. s.), pentite-si (p.), having repented one's self. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. io mi pdnto, I repent myself. ti penti, thou repentest thyself. si pente, he repents himself. noi cipentidmo, we repent ourselves. vipent'ite, you repent yourselves. si pentono, they repent themselves. Imperfect, mi pentiva, I repented myself. Perfect, mi pen tii, I repented myself. Future. mi pentird, I shall repent myself. PRONOMINAL VERBS. 209 COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. mivdno pent'Uo, -a, I have repented my- self. Second Pluperfect, mifiiipent'ito, -a, I had repented myself. Pluperfect, mi era pent'ito^ -a, I had repented myself. Future Anterior. mi sard pentito, -a, I shall or will have re- pented myself. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SBIPLE TENSES. Present. Imperfect. che mi penta, that I repent myself. che mi pentissi, if I repented myselt COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. ehe mi s'lapent'ito^ -a, that I have repented myself. Pluperfect. che mi fossi pent'i- if I had repented my io, -a, self. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. mi pentirei, I should, would, or could repent myself. COMPOUND TENSE. Past. mi sarei pentito, -a, I should, would, or could have repented myself. IMPERATIVE MOOD. penti-tt, repent thyself. sipenta or penta-si, let him repent himself. pentidm.o-ci^ let us repent ourselves. pent'ite-vi, repent yourselves. St pentano, or let them repent them- pcntan-si, selves. A great number of active and neuter verbs may become pro- nominal by the addition of the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, &c., either in the objective or in the relation of attribution : and then these verbs are varied with the auxiliary essere, to be ; as, Loddre, to praise ; dare, to give ; tacere, to keep silent : — mi sdno data un cdlpo, I have given [to] myself a blow. ti sei ddto per vinto, thou hast given thyself up as conquered. si e loddto, he has praised himself. ci sidmo taciuti, we have kept ourselves silent. Usage, however, in some instances, allows us also to employ the auxiliary avere, to have : but then the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, are always in the relation of attribution ; as, — m^/o sdno or ?»e/' ho goduio, I have enjoyed it. telo se'i or tel' hai creduto, thou hast believed it. set' e or seV ha bevuto, he has drunk it. 18* 210 IT^iLIAN GRAMMAR. VAEIATION OF UNIPERSONAL VERBS. Unipersonal verbs are generally varied with the auxiliaij' avere, to have, according to' the conjugation to which they belong. Variation of the Verb Pi6vere. PARADIGM OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. pidvere^ INEINITIVE MOOD. Present. I Past. to rain. 1 av6re piovuto, to have Huned. GERUND. piovindo, Present. raining. Past, avindo ptoviito, having rained. • PARTICIPLE. Past, piovuto, rained. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. fidve, Present. it raina. piov^vOf Imperfect. it rained. piovi^ jnovette^ Perfect. it rained. pioverd, Future. it will rain. COMPOUND TENSES. . Second Perfect. I Pluperfect. ha piovuto, it has rained. . | avcva piovuto, it had rained. Second Pluperfect. Abe piovuto, it had rained. Future Anterior, avrd piovuto, it will have rained UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 211 ehe pi6 va^ SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. SEVIPLE TENSES. Present. that it rains. Imperfect, che piovisse^ if it rained. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. the abbla piovuto, that it has rained. che avesse piovuto, if it had rained. Plujierfect. CONDITIONAL MOOD. SIMPLE TENSE. Present. pioverebbe (piover'ia), it woiild or could rain, or might rain. COMPOUND TENSE. Past, avrebbe piovuto, it would or could have rained, or might have rained. IMPERATIVE MOOD. pidva, let it rain. . The following are the uniperscnal verbs most in use : — aycjiornare^ annottdre^ balendre, lampeggidre, tuondre, nenicdre, gramlindre, tempestdre, piovere, diluvidrej to be day. geldre, to freeze. to grow night. ghiaccidre, »» 11 to lighten. dighiaccidre, to thaw. » »? farfrklxk)^ to be cold. to thunder. far chidro, to be light. to snow. far buio, to be dark. to hail. far cdldo, to be hot. ?? 9? far vento, to be windy. to rain. far huon tempo, to be good weather to rain very hard, far cattivo tempo, to be bad weather. to deluge. jEssere, to be, is also used unipersonally, both in the singular and plural, when it is joined to the particles ci or vi ; as, JEsserci or esservi, to be here, or to be there. It is varied as follows : — 212 ITALIAN GRA^EVIAR. Variation of the Verb Essere, unipersonally used. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. isser-ci or ^sser-vi, to be here, or to be there. Past, isser-ci or esser-vi stato (m. s.), (stati (p.), stdta (f. s.), state (p.), to have been there GERUND. Present, essendo-ci, or essendo-vi, there being. Past, essdndo-ci or ess&ndo-vi stato (m. s.), stati (p.), stata (f. s.), state (p.), there having been. INDICATIVE MOOD. SIMPLE TENSES. Present. s' i or V' if here is, or there is. | ci sdno or vi sdno, there are. Imperfect. c' ^o or ■»' ^a, there was. | c' erano or v^ erano, there were. Perfect. eifuotvifUf there was. | ci furono or vi ft'irono, there were. Future. d sard or vi sard, there shall be. | ci saranno or vi sardnno, there shall be. COMPOUND TENSES. Second Perfect. c' e or «' ^ s«d) tu, Df A egli, give thou, let him give. diamo ndi, date v6i, DfANO, let us give. give ye. let them give. The compounds of ddre — as, riddre, to give again ; adddrsi, to devote one's self ; etc. — have the same irregularities. IKKEGULAR VEKBS. 217 fo (fdccio), fAi ifdci), fa {face), Vkci ifei), PACESTI (jcsti), FJ&CE {fe\fco), to fAcoia, tu fIccia, egli fAccIA, Fare (^varied with Avdre). INFINITIVE MOOD. fAke {fdcere)^* to do, or to make. GERUND. facendo, doing. PARTICIPLE. fAtto, done. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I do or am doing, thou doest. he does. facciAmo, fate, fAnno {fan), Imperfect, io faccva or facca {fea), I did or was doing Perfect. T did. ' facemmo {feinmo), thou didst. faceste (feste), he did. fecero {ferono), Future. FARo, I shall or will do. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that T do or may do. that thou do. that he do. facciAmo, facciAte, fAcciano, Imperfect. 10 facessi {fcssi), if I did or should do. we do, you do. they do. we did. you did. they did that we do. that you do. that they do. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. FAR:6i {faria,fare''), I should, would, or could do, or might do. IMPERATIVE MOOD. fa {fa?) tu, fAccia pigli, do thou, let him do. facciAmo, fate, fAcciano, let us do do ye. let them do. The compounds of fare — as, assuefdre, to accustom ; confdre, to suit, to agree ; coritrajfdre, to mimic, to imitate ; disfdre, to undo ; misfdre, to do wrong ; etc. — have the same irregularities. Sodisfdre, or soddisfdre. to satisfy, is both regular and irregular. * This verb belongs properly to the second conjugation ; it being but a contraction of fdcere, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms. 19 218 ITALIAN GRAMIMAK. Stdre {varied with Essere). INriNITIVE MOOD. Present. Stdre, to stand, to stay, to dwell, or to be. GEKIIND. stando, standing'. PARTICIPLE. stdto, stood. IKDICATIVE MOOD. Present. sto, btAi, StUf I stand, thou standest. he stands. stidmo. state, ST Anno, ■we stand, you stand, they stand Perfect. BTfiTTI (Stdi), BTJ&STI, BTJETTE {Sti), I stood, thou stoodst. he stood. STIJMMO, STi:STE, STETTERO (s«<*ro). ■we stood, you stood, they stood. Future. STAKo, I shall or -will stand. to STf A, tu STf A or STf I, 4gH STf A, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I stand, that thou stand, that he stand. stidmo, that we stand stidte, that you stand STf AND or STf END, that they stand Imperfect. h.0 BT^SSI, if I stood or should stand. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. BTAKfel {star\a), I should, -would, or could stand, or might stand. IMPERATIVE MOOD. vta (5fd') to root up svello, svelgo svelsi svellero svelto Saggere, to suck SliggO Piiggei (sussi) suggero Tacere, to je silent tacio (taccio) tacqui (tacei) tacero taciiito Tendere, to tend teudo tesi (tendiii) tendero teso Teuere, to hold teugo (tegno) tenui (tenei) terro (tenero) tenia to Tessere, to xveave tesso tessei tessero tessuto Tignere, tingere, to dye tingo (tigno) tinsi tignero tinto Togliere, ) , . 7 toglio, tolgo tolsi torro tolto Tondere, to shear toudo toudei toudero tondiito Torcere, to tioist torco torsi torcero tdrto Torpere, to 6? benumbed torpo torpento Trarre, \ (TrAere), [ to draw traggo (trao) trlssi trarro tratto (TrAggore), ) Uocid«re, to kill uccido uccisi uccidero ucciso Udire, to hear odo udii udiro (udro) udito Ugnere, lingere, to anoint ungo (ligno) linsi ungero linto Use ire, to go out esco uscii (eseii) usciro uscito (escito) Valere, to be loorth ValgO (vilglio) valsi (valoi) varro (valero) valato (Viilso) Vedere, to see vedo, veggo vidi (vuddi) vcdro veduto (visto) Venire, to com.e Tengo Tenni (vcuii) verro (veniro) venuto (vcnto) Vinecre, to conquer vinco vinsi vincero vinto (vitto) V.vere, to live vivo vissi (vivei) vivero vivuto Volcre, to ivill voglio, v6' volli (volsi) vorro volli to V61vere,_«o turn volgo volsi volgero volto Volgere,' to turn volvo volvero 21* 24.6 ITALIAN GRAMMAK. i^ii^tixbt ©'-erirs* Defective Verbs ending in ere (long), accented. calere, co/ere or cdlere, lece're and licere, 1 lecere and licere, ) to care for. to adore. to be lawful. pavere, silere, sole're, stupe're, to fear. to be or keep silent to be wont. to be astonished. Defective Vei'hs ending in ere {sliort). dlgere, to be chill. rie'dere, to return. dngere, to afflict. scrj>ere, to creep. arrdgere, cdpere, to add. to contain. soffdlcere, ) soffdlgere, ) to support. cherere. to ask. tdnqere. to touch. coiwe'Here, to convulse. tdllere, to take away. fie'dere, to wound. tdrpere, to be benumbed Incere, to shine. lirgere, to urge. mdlcere, to assuage. vigere. to be vigorous. I Defective Ver'bs eliding in ire. ire, to go. gire, to go._ o/tre, to smell. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 247 VARIATION OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. (These verbs are used only in the tenses and persons which are here given.) Calere. INFESriTIVE MOOD. Present. ealire, to care for. Past, essere caluto, to have cared for. GERUND. calaido, caring for. PARTICIPLE. cah'Uo, cared for. INDICATIVE MOOD Present, edle or cdl, he cares for. Imjjerfect. caleva or calea, he cared for. Pe7]fect. cAlse, he cared for. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. cXglia, that he care for. Imperfect. caMsse, if he cared for. IMPERATIVE MOOD. cAglia dglii let him care for. Calere is generally used with the conjunctive pronouns mi, tiy ct, VI, gli : thus, tni cak, I care for ; ci caleva, we cared for ; etc. 248 ITALIAN GRAIUMAR. Colere or Colere. INEINITIVE MOOD. colere or colere^ to adore. INDICATR^ MOOD. Present. !e6lo\ I adore. cdle), he adores. Lec^re and Lic^re, or Lecere and Licere. INFINITIVE MOOD. leeere and licere^ to be lawful. | essere lecito or I'lcito* to be lawfoL INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Icce or lice, it is lawful. Pav^re. INEINITIVE MOOD. pavere, to fear. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, pave, he fears. Silere. INFINITIVE MOOD. silere, to be or keep silent. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. $Ui, thou art or keepest silent.- sile, he is or keeps silent. • • • * From this form are derived e Irdto, it is lawful ; era or fit lecito, it was lawful ; sard lecito, it will be lawful ; etc., which are used to supply the tenses in which lecere Ls defective. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 249 $ol6re, BdGLIO, bu(5li, bu(3le (idle), Soldre. INFINITIVE MOOD. to be wont. | essere solito^ GERUND. solendo, being wont. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I am wont, thou art wont. he is wont. sogliAmo (soldmo), solete, S(5gliono, Imperfect. \o soleva or solea, I was wont. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. io S(5glia, that I am wont or may be wont. Imperfect. ko solessi, if I were wont or should be wont. Stupdre. INEmiTIVE MOOD. stupere, to be astonished. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, stupe, he is astonished. Algere. to be wont. we are wont, you are wont, they are wont. dlsi, eUgdsttf dlsCf INFINITIVE MOOD. algere, to be chill. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect. I was chill. algemmo, thou wast chill. algcste, he was chill. dlsero, we were chill, you were chill, they were chill. 250 ITALIiVN GEAjM]V£4R. Angere. IKFINITIVE MOOD. angere, to afflict. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. j Imperfect, ingCf it afflicts. j angeva, it afflicted. Arrogere. INFINITIVE MOOD. arrogere, to add. arrdge. ARU681, arrogesti, AIlli6SE, GERUND. arr agendo, adding. PARTICIPLE. AEr6to or arr6so, added. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. he adds. arrogiamo, arrogono, Imperfect. to arrogeva or arrogca, I added Perfect. I added, thou addedst. he added. arrogemtno, arrogeste, AJiR(5SEKO, we add. they add. we added, you added, they added. Capere. INFINITIVE MOOD. capere, to contain. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I Iniperfect. cape, it contains. | capcva, it contained DEFECTIVE VERBS. 251 Chdrere. chero, chere. rNTINITIVE MOOD. chererey to ask, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I ask. he asks. Conv^llere. INFINITIVE MOOD. convcllere, to convulse. GEKUND. convellendo, convulsing. PARTICIPLE. CONVtrLSO, convulsed. conveUe. eonveUcva or -/e'a, eonvellerdy INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. he convulses. | convcllono, they convulse. Imperfect. he convulsed. ] convellevano or -Icano, they convulsed- Future. he shall convulse. | convellerdnno, they shall convulse convellesse. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Imperfect. I convelldsserOf if he convulsed. if they convulsed. eonveUerebbe, CONDITIONAL MOOD. P^'esent. he should convulse. | convellercbbero, they should convulse. 252 ITALIAI^ GRAMMAS. Jiedi, fiide^ Fi^dere. INFINITIVE MOOD. Jicdere^ to wound. GERUND. Jiedendo^ wounding. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, I wound, thou woundest. he wounds. fiedono, Imperfect. to fiedeva or fiedea^ I wounded. Perfect, fied&i^ I wounded. they wound. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Preient. \o fiida ifi^ggia)^ that I wound. iglijiedia ifeggia), that he wound. Jiddano, Imperfect. io fedessi, If I wounded. that they wound. DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 253 Lucere. INEINITIVE MOOD lucere^ to shine. GEEIIND. lucendo, shining. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. • • • • • • lucidme. •we shine. w«, thou shinest. Incite, you shine. Uiu, he shines. « • • • • • • Imperfect. io luceva, I shone. Perfect. • • • lucemmoy we shone. luUsti^ thou shinest. luceste, Future. you shone lucerd, I shal [ or will shtne. igH (/tfca), SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that he shine. luc'idmo, luc'idte, (lucano), that we shine, that you shine, that they shine. Imperfect. io lucissi, if I shone or should shine. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present lueer&i {J,ucer\,a\ if I should, would, or could shine, or might shine. M6lcere. IKFINITIVE MOOD. mdlcere, to assuage. mdlci, tndlce. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. thou assuagest. he assuages. Imperfect. io molcdva, I assuaged. molcevi, thou assuagedst. dgli molcdva^ ho assuaged. 22 254 ITALIAN GEAJyilHAIl. Kinder e. ESTFINITIVE MOOD. riedere, to return. INDICATIVE MOOD. P?'esen<. riedo, riedi, riede. I return, thou retumest. he returns. • « • riedono. Imperfect. io riedeva or nedia^ riedevi, egli riedevaj I returned, thou returnedst. he returned. • • « • • ■ • • riedevano, io riida, tu rieda, igli rieda^ SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Preserit. that I return, that thou return, that he return. riedano, they return. they returned. • • that they return. S^rpere. INFINITIVE MOOD. sirpere, to creep. GERUND. serpendo, creeping. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. serpo, Scrpi, serpe, I creep, thou creepest. he creeps. • • • • • • serpono^ m • • • they ci Imperfect. to serp6va, serpevi, egli serpiva, I crept, thou creptest. he crept. • • • • • « • • serpevano, • • • • • they 01 U> serpa, tu sirpa, igli serpa, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I creep, that thou creep, that he creep. serpano, that they creep. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 255 SofFolcere or Soffolgere. IKFINITIVE MOOD. soffdlcere or soffolgere-, to support. PARTICIPLE. soffolto, supported. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. . Perfect, toffdlce or soffdlge^ he supports. 1 soffdlse, he supported. Tdngere. INPINITIVE MOOD. tdngere, to touch. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, tange, he touches. T6Uere. INFINITIVE MOOD. tdllere, to take away. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. tdUi, thou takest away. tdllcy he takes away. • • SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. tu tdlla, that thou take away. I • • • . • igli tdlla. that he take away. | ....• ••!.• IMPERATIVE MOOD. tdlla egli, let him take away. Estdlhre (to lift), compound of tdllere, is defective only in the participle, and in all the persons of the perfect of the indicative. 256 ITAI.IAN GRAMMAE. T(5rpere. INFINITIVE MOOD. t6rpere, to become numb. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, tdrpo, I become numb. ' tdrpcj he becomes numb. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, to tdrpa, that I become numb. tu tdrpa, that thou become numb. igli tdrpa^ that he become numb. IJrgere. INEINITIVE MOOD. ^rgere, to urge. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, urge, he urges. Imperfect. igli urgiva or urgia, he urged. | urg&vano, they urged. Vlgere. INFINITIVE MOOD. Vlgere, to be vigorous. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, v'tge, he is vigorous. Future, vtgerd, it will be vigorouB. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 257 Gire. rNTINITIVE MOOD. g-irg, to go. PARTICIPLE. gito, gone. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. '.'.'.'.'. giamo, gitey • • • we go. you go. * • * « Imperfect. • giva or gia, I went. Perfect. io git, I went. Future. giro, I shall or will go. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. • Present. • • • • • « • • • • g'iamOj gidte, • • m that we go or may go. that you go. Imperfect. io gissi, if I went or should go. CONDITIONAL MOOD. girdt, gtria, I should, would, or could go, or might go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. g'iamOj let us go. gite, go ye. 22* 258 ITALIAN GRAMaiAR. Ire. INTINITIVE MOOD. ire, to go. PARTICIPLE. ito, gone. to im^ igli ivUf isiif I went he went. thou wentest. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, ite, you go. Imperfect. ivano, Perfect. (iro, Ir), Future. tremo, ircte, ircino. we went they went. we shall or will go you will go. they will go. CONDITIONAL MOOD, (triano), they should, would, or oould go, or might go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. tte, go ye. Olfre. io oViva, I smelled. olivi, thou smelledst igli oliva, he smelled. INFINITIVE MOOD. olire, to smell. INDICATIVE MOOD. Imperfect. ol'ivano, th«y smelled. PROVERBS. 259 PEOYERBS. A word to the wise is enough, All tliat is fair must fade, A ragged coat finds little credit. good Any thing for a quiet life, A great liar has need of a memory, An old horse for a young soldier, A buttered Tuoutli cannot say no, A good appetite needs no sauce, A good beginning makes a good ending, A barking dog does not bite, A vokmtaiy burden is no burden, A gold key opens every door, A fat kitclien, a lean testament, A new broom sweeps clean, Aught is better than naught. All is not gold that glitters, A sin confessed is half forgiven, A little spark kindles a great fire, A rolling stone gathers no moss, A little gall makes a great deal of honey bitter. As you would have a daughter, choose a wife, Anger increases love, All's well that ends well, A married man is a caged bird, An ounce of discretion is worth more than a pound of knowl- edge, A lasting stomach has no ears, After the horse is stolen, shut the barn-door, A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush, T5end the tree while it is young. Better late than never, Better a happy heart than a full purse. Better bend than break. Better give the wool than the sheep, Big head and little wit, A buon intenditdr pdche parole. Bella cdsa tdsto e rapita. A veste logorata pdca fdde vien pres- tata. Alia pace si puo sacrificar tiitto. A un gran bugiardo ci vudl budna memuria. A gidvane soldato ve'cchio cavallo. Bocca unta non puo dir di no. Budn appetito non vudl salsa. Budn principio fa buon fine. Can che abbaia non mdrde. Carica volontiiria non carica. Chiave d'dro apre ogni porta. Grassa cucina, magro testamento. Granata nudva spazza ben la casa. Meglio e pdco che nie'nte. Oro non e tutto quel che risplende. Peccato confessato e mezzo perdo- nato. Piccdla favilla accende gran fudco. Pietra mdssa non fa mvischio. Pdco fiele fa amaro mdlto miele. Qual figlia viioi, tal mdglie piglia. Sdegno aumenta amdre. Tutto e bene die riesce bene. Udmo ammogliato, uccello in gabbia. Val pill un' dncia di discrezidne che una libbra di sapere, Ventre digiiino non ode nessiino. Ddpo die i cavalli sdno presi, serrar la stalla. E meglio un uccello in gabbia die ce'nto fudri. Picga I'albero quando e gidvane. Meglio tardi che mai. E meglio il cudr fehce che la bdrsa plena, E meglio piegare che rdmpere. E meglio dar la lana che la pecora. Capo grasso, cervello magro. 260 ITALIAN GRAMMAR. Bad news travels fast, Counsel is nothing against love, Comparisons are odious, Christmas comes but once in a year, Do what you ought, come what may. Do not count your chickens before they are hatched, Delays are dangerous. Different times, different manners. Drop by drop wears away a stone, Do not look a gift horse in the mouth, Every thing is good in its season. Every dog is a lion at home, Every truth is not good to be told. Every body knows where his shoe pinches. Every one for himself, and God for us all, Every body praises his own saint. Every body 's friend, nobody 's friend. Every one thinks his own cross the heaviest, Extreme ills, extreme remedies, Friends in need are friends indeed. For a web begun, God sends thread. Fair words, but look to your purse, Four eyes see more than two, Fortune comes to him who seeks her. Forbidden fruit is sweet. Father Modest never was a prior, From those I trust, God guard me ; from those I mistrust, I will guard myself, God helps him who helps himself, Give to him that has. Give time, time, God sends meat, and the devil sends cooks, Great griefs are mute. Great smoke, little fire. Gold does not buy every thing, Good wine makes good blood. He who succeeds is reputed wise, He who knows nothing, knows enough if he knows how to be silent. He is blind who cannot see the sun. He who sings drives away sorrow, Le cattive nuove volano. Cdntro amore non e consiglio. I paragdni son tiltti odidsi. Natale non viene die una vdlta I'an- no. Fa quel che devi, n' arrivi cib che potra. Non far cdnto dell' udvo non ancdr nato. L' indugiare e pericdloso. Altri tempi, alti'i costumi. A g(jccia a gdccia si trafdra la pietra. A caval donato, non guardar in bdc- ca. Da stagidne tiitto e budno. 6gni cane e ledne a casa sua. 6gni vero non e budno a dire. Ognuno sa dove la scarpa lo stringe. Ognun per se, e Dio per tiitti. Ognuno Idda il prdprio santo. Amico d' ognuno, amico di nessiino. Ad ognuno par piii grave la crdv.'e siia. Ai mali estremi, estremi rimedi. A bisdgni si condscon gli amici. A tela ordita Dio raanda il filo. Belle pardle, ma guarda la bdrsa. Veddn pill quattr' dcchi che due. Vien la fortiina a chi la procura. I frutti proibiti sdno ddlci. Fra modesto non fu mai pridre. Da chi mi f ido, mi guardi Iddio ; da chi non mi f ido mi guardero io. Chi s'aiiita, Dio I'aiuta. Da del tiio a chi ha del siio. Da te'mpo al te'mpo. Dio ci manda la carne, ma il diavolo 1 cudclii. I gran doldri sdno muti. Gran fumo, pdco arrdsto. L'dro non cdmpra tiitto. Budn vino fa budn sangue. A chi la riesce bene, e teniito pe* savio. Assai sa, chi non sa, se tacer sa. Ben e cieco chi non vede il sdle Chi canta, i sudi mali spaventa PROVERBS. 261 He who buys in time, buys cheap, He lauglis well who laughs last. Hear, see, and say nothing, if you would live in peace, He is master of another man's hfe who is indifterent to his own. He gives twice who gives in a trice. He who stands may tali, He that reckons without his host must reckon again. Hell is full of good intentions, Habit is a second nature. In at one ear, and out at the other, HI weeds grow apace. Look before you leap. Like master, like man, Live, and let live. Love me, love my dog. Love rules without law, Love me little, and love me long, Love knows not labor. Let him who is well oflf stay where he is. Long tongue, short hand. Marry in haste, repent at leisure. Many a true word spoken in jest, Much smoke and little fire. Make me a prophet, and I will make you rich. Nothing venture, nothing have. Nothing is difficult to a willing mind, Near the church, far from God. Old reckonings, new disputes, One enemy is too many, and a hun- dred friends are too few, One hand waslies the other, and both hands wash the face. One word brings another, One swallow does not make a sum- mer. One man warned is as good as two, Out of sight, out of mind, Poor as a church mouse. Poverty has no kin. Physician, heal th^^self, Pluck tlie rose and leave the thorns, Rather hat in liand than hand in purse, Roses grow among thorns, Chi cdmpra a tempo, cdmpra a budn mercato. Ride bene chi ride I'ultimo. 6di, ve'di e taci se vudi viver in pace. E padrone della vita altriii chi la sua sprezza. Chi da presto, del il ddppio. Chi e ritto puo cadere. Chi fa il cdnto senza I'dste, gli con- vie'n farlo due vdlte. Di budna volonta e pieno I'inferno. L' abito e lina secdnda natura. De'ntro da un orecchio e fudri dall' altro. La mal erba cresce presto. Guarda innanzi che tu salti. Tal padrone, tal servitdre. Vivi, e lascia vivere. Chi ama me, ama il mio cane. Amdr re'gge senza legge. Amami pdco, ma continua. Amdr non condsce travaglio. Chi sta bene non si mudva. Lunga lingua, cdrta mano. Chi si marita in fre'tta, stenta adagio. Quel che pare burla, ben sovente h vero. Mdlto fumo e pdco fudco. Fammi indovino, e ti faro ricco. Chi non s'arrischi non guadagna. A chi vudle, non e cdsa difficile. Vicino alia chie'sa lontan di Di'o. A cdnti vecchi, contese nudve. E trdppo un nemico, e cento amici non bastano. tJna mano lava I'altra e tutt' e due lavano il viso. Una pardla tira I'altra. Un fidre non fa Primavera. Un avvertito ne val due. Lontano dagli dcchi, lontano del cudre. Povero cdme un tdpo in chiesa. Poverta non ha parenti. Medico, ciira te stesso. Cdgli la rdsa, e lascia le spine. Piutt()sto cappello in mano, che mano alia bdrsa. Anco tra le spine nascono le rdse. 2G2 ITALIAN GEAMMAE. Saying is one thing, and doing is another, Silence gives consent, Strike wliile the iron is hot, See Naples, and then die. Savings are the first gain, Seeing is beheving, Second thoughts are best. The full belly does not believe in hunger, To pay one in his own coin. Think much, speak little, and write less, Translators, traitors. The weakest goes to the wall, They say, is a liar. The people's voice, God's voice, To fall out of the frying-pan into the fire, The biter is sometimes bit. The world is governed with little brains, True love never grows old. The liar is not believed when he speaks the truth, The workman is known by his work. There is always a calm before a storm. The beard does not make the phi- losopher, There is no love without jealousy. There is no smoke without fire. The steed is starving whilst the grass is growing, The devil is not so ugly as he is painted. The best is the cheapest, Teacliing we learn. To cast pearls before swine. The earth covers the errors of the physician, There is no disputing about tastes, The doctor seldom takes medicine, The world was not made in one day, 'J ell me the company you keep, and I will tell you what you are, Whoever brings, finds the door open for him, Where there is a will, there's a way. Well begun is half done, Altra cdsa e il dire, altra il fare. Chi face, acconsente. Batti il ferro quand' e caldo. Vedi Napoli e poi muori. Lo sparagno e il prirao guadagno. Chi con I'dcchio vede, di cudr credo. II secdndo pensie'ro e il miglidre. Cdrpo satdllo uon crede al digiiino. Pagar uno della sua prdpria moneta. Pensa mdlto, parla pdco, scrivi meno. Traduttdri, traditdri. Se'mpre ha tdrto il piu debole. Si dice, e mentitdre. Vdce di pdpolo, voce di Die. Cader della padella nelle bragie. Chi burla, vien burlato. Con pdco cervello si governa il mdndo. Amdr vero non diventa canuto. Al bugiardo non si crede la verita. All dpera si condsce il maestro. La bonaccia burrasca minaccia. La barba non fa il fildsofo. Non c'e amdr senza gelosiia. Non c'e f urn o senza fudco. Me'ntre I'e'rba cre'sce il cavallo mucJre di fame. II diavolo non e cdsi brutto come si dipinge. II miglidre e men caro. Lisegnando s'impara. Gettar le margherite ai pdrci. Gli errdri del me'dico gli cdpre la terra. Dei giisti non se ne disputa. Di rado il medico piglia medicina. In un gidrno non si fe' Rdma. Dimmi con chi tratti, e ti dir6 chi seL Aperta ha la pdrta chiunque appdrta. A chi vudle, non mancano mddi. Budn principio e la meta dell' dpra. IDIOMS. 263 Wlio does too much often does little, Who knows most believes least, Who comes seldom is welcome. While there is lite, there is hope, Who knows nothing never doubts, What's done can't be undone, What costs little is little valued. Who judges others condemns him- self, Spesso chi trdppo fa, pdco fa. Chi pill sa, mena crede. Chi raro viene, vien bene. Finche v'e fisito, v'e speranza. Chi niente sa, di niente dubita. Quel che e fatto non si pub disfare. Que'llo che cdsta pdco, si stima pdco. Chi altri giildica se condanna. IDIOMS. Non vale un dcca, A beir agio, Mangiar carne d' allddola, Fare alto e basso, Amico da bonaccia, E air articolo di mdrte, Dar la bdia, Da bdsto e sella, In un batter d' dcchio, Dirizzare il becco agli sparvieri, Andare di bene in raeglio, Un udmo da bene, Dir del be'ne, Mi convien berla, Teller 1' anima co' denti, Dal de'tto al fatto v' e un gran tratto, Chi ddrme non pi'glia pe'sci, Questa cdsa non m' e'ntra, Non e e'rba del vdstro drto, Mangiarsi 1' e'rba sdtto, Ascdnder 1' amo nell' ^sca, Le cdse sdno in budn essere, Kssere all' estremo della vita, Stare all' erta, Esser di budna bocca, Favellare con le inani, Non nverjieie, Yax fildre lino, Pagar '\\fio, Dare ad uno carta bianca. Fia tre gidrni. It is not worth a pin. Leisurely. To take pleasure in being praised. To do as one pleases. A table friend. He is at the point of death. To laugh at. Fit for any thing. In an instant. To attempt impossibilities. To grow better and better. A good honest man. To speak well of a person. I must bear it. To be almost dead. To say and to do are two diflferent things. Idleness begets poverty. I do not comprehend this. This is not of your own making. To spend what one has. To deceive one under the color of friendship. Things are in a good way. * To be at the point of death. To be upon one's guard. To be a great eater. To strike. To be good-natured. To make one do what you please. To pay dear for. To give one full power. In three days. 264 ITALIAN GKAMMAR. Dolersi di gdmha sana, Darla a gdmbe, Vincere ta gdra, Con bel gdrbo, Fare la gdtta morta, Come m^glio vi aggrdda, Imbarcdrsi senza biscdtto, i!i impost at di vizj, Vendere all' incdnto, Dar r incenso a' mdrti, 11 tiio inchidstro ndn tigne, Mostrare altrui lucciole per lanteme, In casa sua v' e il Idtte di gaUina, Uno mano Idva V altra, Legdrsela al dito, Tenere in Zt&ra, Dare in luce, Venire mdnco, Uscir del mdnico, Far un viarrdne, Mettere alia vela, Mirdre con la coda ^ell' dcchio, Ti faro mdrdere le unghie, Mutdr verso, Dar r ultima mano, Fudr di mano, Essere alia mano, Avere la mano, ]\Ietter mano ad una cdsa, Imbottar nd)bia, Testa di pollastra. Fare il becco all' dca, (5cchio mio. In un batter d' dcchio, A quattr' dcchi, Va in budn dra, Far orecchie di mercante, Tutto' 1 mdndo e jm^se, Col tempo e cdlla pdglia maturano le nespole, Star si ne' prdpii pdnni, Cavar le penne maestre, La vdstra opinidne non mi quddra, Qiidsto e il qudnto, Di qudndo in quando, Dar nella ragnatela, Menar tutti a rastrdllo, Render I'anima, Ridere agli angeli. Ha pdco sdle in zucca, : f-c u To complain without reason. To run away. To carry the prize. In a civil manner. To dissemble. As you think fit. To undertake a thing without means. He is very vicious. To sell by auction. To make almanacs for the last year. Your credit is not good. To make one believe that the moon is made of green cheese. In his house they always eat of the best. To help one another. To owe one a spite. To keep in suspense. To pubUsh. To faint. To be extravagant. To make a mistake. To set sail. n f A To cast sheeps' eyes. 6c^/<:»J,«^<'^r**^ I'U make you repent it. ^^a-^A" To alter the course of one's life. 9^^ ' To finish. ^ Out of the way. To be ready. To have the advantage. To begin a thing. To lose time. Giddy brained. To finish any work. My darling. In an instant. Face to face. God speed you. To give no ear. One may live everywhere. Time brings every thing to matu- rity. To be contented with what one has. To take away the best one has. I am not of your opinion. This is the point. Now and then. To fall into a snare. To use all ahke. To give up the ghost. To laugh at nothing. He has not a great deal of judgment. IDIOMS. 265 J a gallina che canta e quella che ha fatto I'udvo, Venir la schhima alia bocca, Levarsi all' alba de' tafani, Chi tdrdi arriva male allijggia, Ten&e il piede in due stafFe, Piglidr gli ucceUiui, Ucc€l da valle, Ugner le mani, Far venir I'acqua all' ugola, Vedere il pel nell' u6vo, Dar le vele a' venti, A vela e remo, Venflemmia mentra hai tempo, La candela e al v&de, La verita sta sempre a gala, I miei afFari hanno preso budna piega, Nascer vestito, Zdra a chi tdcca, Far d'una lancia un zipolo, Cantare ad lino la zdlfa, The man who is too earnest in jus- tifying himself is guilty. To be in a great passion. To rise late. Those who come too late must kiss the cook. To have two strings to one's bow. To play the fool. A sly man. To bribe one with money. To make the mouth water. To be clear-sighted. To set sail. With all speed. Get money while you can. « The candle is almost out. Truth always prevails at last. My affairs are going on successfully. To be born lucky. Let every one care for himself. To make a little out of a great deal To chide. 266 ITALIAN GRAMMAK. I ITALIAN AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Ahhdglio, mistake. accdnto, aside. dcqua, water. adddsso, on, upon. off anno, grief. affdtto, entirely. afft'lto, good-will, kind- ~~" ness. dgo, needle. alba, dawn. dlhero, tree. alldra, then. alldro, laurel. dlma, soul. nJmdno, at least. al par, equal, alike. alte'ro, proud. ditro, other. amardzza, bitterness. diaho, both. amicizia, friendship. amico, friend. amistdde, friendship. dmo, fish-hook. amdre, iove. ancdlla, waiting-maid. andlito, panting. anello, a ring. dnima, soul. dnimo, courage, mind. aiimnti, panting. antico, ancient. apertvra, hole, gap. dqidla, eagle. ardtro, plough. arcdno, secret. ardente, hot, burning. arena, sand, gravel. arc/enfo, silver. ascdso, hidden. aspetto, aspect. assenndto, sensible. astdnte, by-stander. astro, star. augeJIetto, small bird. dura, gale, breeze. aveilo, grave, tomb. avvendnza, comeliness. avvemre, future. avvertenza, precaution. avviso, advice. Bdcio, a kiss. halena, whale. bdllo, ball. bambino, child, infant. bandito, an outlaw. beUezza, beauty. belta, beauty. benche, although. 5/ccA/^/'e,drinking-glass. bde, anger, passion. bidndo, fair, light. birbdnte, vagabond. bisdgno, need, want. bizzdrro, whimsical. bdrgo, suburb. bdrsa, a purse, bag. bdsco, a wood. bottdga, shop. brdccio, an arm. brdndo, sword. brezza, cold, breeze. brina, frost. bruno, brown, dark. brutto, ugly. bugia, a lie. budi, oxen. burrdsca, tempest. burro, butter. Cdccia, hunting. cdgna, dog. cdlca, confusion. calvezza, baldness. cdlvo, bald. cdlza, stocking. cambiavalute, broker. cammino, way, road. cdinpo, field canto, song. canzdne, song. capdnna, cottage. capelli, pan. cdro, dear. cdrne, meat. carabina, carbine. carezza, caress. carnejice, executioner, cdrta, paper. cascdta, cascade. cdso, case. catena, chain. cdttedrale, cathedral. caftivo, bad. cdido, wary, cautious. cdvo, hollow. ce'na, supper. cdnere, ashes, cinders. ce'ppo, stump, log. cdra, wax. ce'rto, certain, sure. cetra, cithem. cervdlo, brain. c.he'io, quiet, still. chidro, clear, fair. chidve, key. chiardre, brightness, clearness. china, declivity. chiddo, nail. chitdn-a, guitar. ciabbaftmo, cobbler. cibo, food. cieco, blind, cie1o, sky, heaven. cima, top, summit. cinghidle, a wild boar. cittadino, citizen. cdda, tail. cognizidne, knowledge. cogndto, brother in-law. colazidne, br(iakfast. cdJle, hill. cd/lera, anger. ITALIAN iVND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 267 Tohivatdre, farmer. cuucorre'nza, competi- tion. coniadino, peasant. (•onto, account. contrdda, country. roncito, banquet, feast. ccippa, cup. vartuui, curtain. ajstilme, custom, man- ner. cniccio, anguish. cHcina, kitchen. culla, cradle. cadre, lieart. citpidigia, covetousness. ciipo, deep. Dahbene, good, honest. ddndro, money. dditto, crime. dc'l'ole, weak. defto, word. iti, day. dife'tto, fault. disgrdzia, misfortune. ddrjlia, grief, pain. dSlce, sweet. dolcezza, sweetness. ddno, gift. donzkda, damsel. ddtto, skilful, learned. droghiere, druggist. dnfto, right, straight. diio/o, grief, pain. Ehbre'zza, drunkenness. e'lmo, helmet. e'lsa, the hilt of a sword. entrduihi, both. erdrio, the treasury. erba, grass. erbdso, grassy. e7-('de, the heir. e7-de, hero. etrdnte, wandering. e'lio, steep, ascent. estdte, summer season. eta, age. etdde, age. ct&ee, ethereal. Fdccia, face. /dice, scythe. fdilo, fault. fdme, hunger. farfdlla, butterfly. fata, fairy. fatica, fatigue. fato, fate, destiny. Javella, discourse, speech. fm, punishment. pendso, painful. pensie'ro, thought. pe'ntola, pot. perche, why, because. pericolo, danger. perdnne, perennial. pesce, fish. pe'ssimo, worst. petto, breast. pezzo, piece. pio, pious. piano, plain. pidnto, tears. piazza, square. piccino, little one. pie'tra, stone. pigidne, house-rent. pidggia, rain. pittdi'e, painter. piihnn, down, feathers. pdco, little. podagra, the gout. podere, farm, power. podesta, power, domin- ion. pdggio, hill. pdi, then. poiche, since. pdlvere, dust. po7iierididne, post-meri* dian. pdrco, hog. pdrpora, purple. portame'/ito, carriage. pote'nza, power. pote're, power. poltrd7ie, poltroon. pdzzo, a well. prdto, meadow. pre'dica, sermon. premio, recompense. pre7)mra, importance. p7-esciutto, ham. pi^esso, near. p7'e7ice, prince. pri7naveia, spring. progetto, project. prodezza,ipTowess,ya.\oT p7'dp7-io, proper. piigTidle, poniard. pTire, yet. Qua, here. quaggiu, down here. qudlche, some. ITALIAN AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 269 qualunqne, whoever. qiiaresinia, lent. quasi, almost. quassu, here above. Rddo, rare, scarce. rd(/t/io, beam, ray. ra(//dne, reason, faculty. rumo, branch. rdme, copper. 7'e, king. red/lie, kingdom. r^dina, rein of a bridle. regdlo, present, gift. regina, queen. re'gola, rule, regimen. ricchezza, riches. ride''}te, smiling. rii,r inbrdnza, remem- i) ranee. rfij, crook, wicked. ripieno, full. riso, laughter. ritrdfto, portrait. riva, shore. r6zzo, rough. romita, hermitess. rugidda, dew. ruggine, rust. Sdggio, sage, wise. sd!a, a hall. sal dine, sftusage. sdlice, willow-tree. sdngae, blood. saj)u'nte, learned. sdsso, stone. scd'c, stairs. scdpolo, not married. scdr/ia, a shoe. scdrso, rare. sceinpio, simple. sche'nio, raillery. schidffo, a box or cutf on the ear. schicra, a troop. sconfitta, defeat. scop^rta, discovery. sciido, a sliield. scuro, dark. sdegno, anger. $h, himself, herself. se'colo, a century. secco, dry. sega, saw. segno, sign. segrAo, secret. selva, wood. seinbidnza, face, look. seinprc, always. se'iino, judgment. senso, sense. sentiero, path. seta, silk. simile, equal. sito, situ;ition, seat. scdve, sweet, agreeable. sdgno, a dream. sdlito, accustomed. sdmmo, top, height. sdnno, sleep. sdrcio, a mouse. sorriso, smile. sdrte, destiny. sospiro, a sigh. sdtto, under. spdda, a sword. spdsso, amusement. specie, sort. spe'ine, hope. sperdnza, hope. spe'sso, often. spina, a thorn. sp&jlia, clothes. spdnda, shore. spdrco, dirty. squall dre, paleness. stancltezza, weariness. Stella, star. stivdie, boot. strep ito, noise. Strega, witch. subito, quick. succo, juice, sap. sudlo, earth, grovmd. sudno, sound, noise. Tale, such, like. tdrdi, late. tdzza, a cup. tedffsco, a German. te'nia, fear. te'nebre, darkness. terra, earth. te'sta, the head. tdro, bull. 23* tdrtora, a turtle-dove. tdsto, quick. tra, between. tr^cce, tress of hair. tribolo, sorrow, a tliistle. trdno, throne. tutto, all. Uccdlo, bird. uffizio, office. udmini, men. usdo, passage. Vdcca, cow. vdgo, fine, handsome. vdmpo, a flame, flush. vdno, vain, empty. vdso, vessel, pot. v^cchio, an old man. ve'ce, (in), instead. vdo, veil. veitro, a grayhound. ve'nto, wind. Ventura, fortune, luck. vergdgna, shame. ve'rno, winter. ve'ro, truth. verdne, gallery, balcony. vestito, clothes. vezzo, pastime, pleasure via, way, road. vicino, near. villdggio, village. vilta, cowardice. vinte, vanquished, per- suaded. vista, sight. viso, face. vita, life. vittdria, victory. vivdnda, victuals. vdglia, mind, desire. vdio, flight. vdlpe, fox. volpino, cunning. vdlta, turn, revolution, vdlto, face. Zingara, gypsy. zimbeilo, allurement. zifto, hush, silence. zdlla, clod, lump. zdppo, lame. 270 ITALIAN GKA3IMAR. ENGLISH AND ITALIAN VOCABULARY. Accident, accid^nte. acquaintance, conosc^- za. fict (action), dtto. ai nil irable, ammirdbile. ailvantage, vantdggio. adversity, avversita. advocate, avvocdto. age, eta, secolo. ago, a while ago, long ago, qxidlche tempo fa, iiidlto tempo fa. agreeable, piace'vole. ainiiglity, onnipot^nte. aioud, fdrte. although, benche. always, sempre. ambition, ambizidne. ancient, anzidno. anger, sd^gno. answer, rispdsta. apjiearance, appar€nza, fdccia. apple, pdmo or inela. architect, archite'tto. army, ese'rcito. art, arte. assiduous, assiduo. astonishment, stiipdre. auditors, ascoltatdri. author, autdre. away, via. Back, ddsso. baker, forndio- lialdness, calvdzza. \ mWooxi, palldne. ! anker, banchiere. bargain, contrdtto. base, vile. battle, battdglia. beard, bdrba. beautiful, bdlo. beauty, belta. because, perche. bed, iMo. beggar, mendicdnte. behind, per di die'tro. behold, dcco. bell, campdna. benefit, beneficio. better, miglidi'e. birth, nativita. bishop, vdscovo. black, 7i(fro. body, cdrpo. bold, ardito. bouquet, mdzso di fidri. breakfast, coluzidne. broth, brddo. burst (of laughter), scoppidre d^le risa. business, affdre. Cabbage, cdvolo. cabinet-maker, ebanista. calm, cdhna. candle, candela. caricature, caricatura. carriage, carrdzza. cause, cdusa. certainly, ce'rto. chance, ventiirn. change, matazidne. charming, ajfafscindnte. chimney, cammino. chair, se'dia. character, cardttere. charitable, cnritatdvole. child, fanciuUo. chin, me'nto. circle, circolo. civil, civile. clear, chid.ro. clever, dbile. climate, clima. cloak, manteilo. coast, cdsta. coat, vestito. conducive, profttevole. confessor, confessdre. consequence, consegu^- za. contrary, contrdrio. conquest, conquista. copper, rdme. correct, corretto. country, pae'se or pdtric. coward, poltrdne. crazy, pdzzo. crime, delitto. crowd, turba. cruel, crudeie. cup, cdppa, tdzza. cupidity, cupidigia. custom, costume. Dangerous, pericoldsa day, gidrno. debt, debito. decay, declinazidne. decent, decdnte. defeat, sconfitta. defiance, disfida. desire, desiddrio. despite, di^spe'tto. despotic, dispdtico. diflerence, differe'nza. difficult, difficile. discovery, scope'rta disease, malattia. distance, distdnza. doctor, dottdre. dress, gdnna. dry, secco. Early, mattutino. eclipse, ecclissi. effect, effe'tto. eloquence, eloqudnza. employment, iinpiego. empire, impe'ro. end, fine. endurance, sofferdnza. enemy, nemico. ENGLISH AND IT^y:.IAN VOCABULAEY. 271 ensuing, segu€nte. enterprise, intraprisa. entirely, inieraviente. envy, invidia. a-ternal, ete'rno. ev idently , palpahilmente. ever, senipre, tuttdvia. executioner, carnefice. eye, dcchio. eyebrows, ciglia. eyelids, palpebre. Face, fdccia. tiilse, fd/so. falsehood, menzdgna. tiincy, fantasia. farmer, fattdre. tat, (jrdsso. tault, fdllo. favor, favdre. fear, timdre. feather, piuma. feature, faUezza. tellow, ugudle, compdgno. fellow-citizen, concitta- dino. few, pdco. fine, fino, finger, dito, fire, fudco. firebrand, tizzdne. fleet, fldtta. flock, gregge. flower, Jidre. fog, nehbia. hhA, motto. forehead, frdnte. foreigner, forestiero. folk, fdrca. tox, vdlpe. fruit, frutto. fury, fur [a. Oeneral, generdle. genius, g^nio. j^entle, gentile. •.'entleman, gentiludmo. girl, fanciuUa. glass, vetro. glory, gldria. gloves, gudnti. goodness, JKntta grandchild, nipotino. grandfather, ivo or ndnno. grandmother, dva or ndnna. grain, grdno. grateful, grdto. grief, doldre. grocer, droghi&e, botte- gdjo. gross, grdsso. guide, guida. guilty, colpe'vole. guinea, ghinea. Hail, gragnudla. hair, cope'Uo. happiness, felicita. hare, lep-e. haste, premura. head, te'sta, capo. heaven, cie'lo. health, salute. heart, cudre or cdre. heavy, pesdnte. heel, calcdgno. here, qua, qui. hero, erde. high, dlto. hip, dnca. historian, istdrico or star ICO. hither, qui o qua. \\oxne, dimdra. homely, rdzzo. hope, sperdnza. how, cdme. human, xandno. humble, livnle. hunger, fame. Idea, idea. idle, pigro. ill, mule. immediate, immcdidto. indolence, indolenza. infinite, infinita. influence, influenza. ingenious, ingegndso. inhabitant, abitdnte. inheritor, ere'de. injury, tdrto. inn, a I her go. inquisitive, curidso. instrument, istrum€nto. Joke, burla. journey, vidggio. joy, gidia. judge, giudice. judgment, giudizio. just, giiisto. Key, chidve. kingdom, r^gno. kitchen, cucina. knife, colte'llo. knowledge, cognizidne. Labor, lavdro. lace, merletto. lame, zdppo. language, lingua. large, grdnde* laughter, riso. law, legge. lawyer, legista. leaf, fdglia. least, minimo. leg, gdmba. lie, menzdgna. life, vita. hght, lume. lightning, Idmpo. lion, ledrie. lip, Idbbro. lock-maker, chiavajudlo loss, perdita. loud, dlto. love, amdre. Maid, fanciulla. majesty, maesta. manner, maniera. marriage, sposalizio. marvelous, maravigli- oso. mask, mdschera. master, maestro. meal, farina. meat, cdme. medicine, medicina. merriment, allegria. midst, viezzo. mind, spirito, m€nte. mindful, diligente. minister, ministro. 272 ITALIAN GRAM^VIAR. miserable, miserdbile. miser, avdro. misery, vus€ria. misfortune, sventura. mistake, en'dre. money, dendro. motion, mdto. mouthful, una boccdta. moon, lu)ia. much, mdlto. Nail, chiddo. name, 7idine. napkin, salvi€tta. natural, naturdle. naughty, cattiveilo. navigator, navigatdre. near, vicino. necessary, necessdrio. neck, cdllo. need, hisdgno. neighbor, vicino. neither, ne. new, nudvo. next, seguente, night, ndtte. no, no, non. noble, nobile. north, settentridne. nose, ndso. notice, notizia. Oats, av€na. object, ogg€lto. obstinate, ostindto. occupation, occupazidne. odd, impdri. often, spe'sso. opinion, opinidne. order, drdine. ostrich, struzzo. overseer, soprainten- de'nte. Page, pdggio. panegyric, panegirico. painter, pittdre. patriarch, patridrca. paper, carta. paradox, paraddsso. parrot, pappagdllo. peace, pdce. perfidious, p^rjido. perhaps, fdrse. person, persdna. picture, pittura. piece, pe'zzo. pike, picca. pity, piefa. plate, pidtto. pleasure, piacere. plenty, abbonddnte. portrait, ritrdtto. poverty, poverta. power, potenza. precipitately, precipita- tatnente. pretty, leggiddro. price, valdre. pride, orgdglio. prisoner, prigioni&o. prompt, prdnto. promise, promessa. purple, pdrpora. • purse, bdrsa. Quarrel, quer€la. queer, strdno. quick, VIVO. quite, tutt' affdtto. Eemembrance, memd- ria* rich, ricco. Secret, segrdo, signal, s^gno. sink, sentina. sleeve, mdnica. sleepiness, 9r('i)ositions, '21, 41, 126; suppression of, 74; partitive, 41-43 ; numerals and, 83, 86 ; possessive pronouns and, 20, 98, 99 ; transposition of, 106 ; preposition in and, 131 ; verbs and, 20 : adverbs and, 20. As . . . a5, 69, 175. Augmentatives, 76, 81 ; formation of, 76 ; double, 79 ; irregular 79 ; frequent use of, 81. Auxiliary verbs, 141, 186. (See " Verbs.") Ai-cre, 98, 141, 161, 209, 213; conjugation of, 186; used idiomatically, 143. (See " Verbs.") B. " Be," auxiliary verb. (See " J&sserc") Bcllo, 63. " Better," as adjective and adverb, 67. Bisoandrey 148. " Both," 85, 86. Buojio, 63. c. Cardinal numbers, 82. Cases, 15, 16 ; of nouns, 40 ; governed by prepositions, 121. Cnr. 68, 90-93. 110. 162; interrogative, 91, 92; the subj-.mctive and, 93, 155; con- nection with other words, 93 ; the present particijile and, 162. Chi. 90-93, 110, 116. a, r/, etc., 48, 61, 56, 100, 118, 142, 148, 149, 162, 211, 213, 215, 247. Od, 104. Cd?)ifi, 69, 70. Ccmparison of adjectives, 67 ; of adverba, 172. Compound sounds, 3. Con (with article, 22. 24). 129, "l-SO, 1(>4. Conjugation of verbs. (See "Verbs.") Conjunctions, 179; in common u.'^e, 180; phrases, 181 ; the subjunctive mood aad, 156. Conjunctive pronouns, 48, 55, 57, 97, 209; with fuidare, 215 ; Stdre^ 219 ; ifolcre, 221 • scdrre, 228 ; taccre, 229 ; te77iere 230^; calcre. 247. [2761 276 INDEX. Consonants, sounds of, 2 ; double, 4 ; when doubled, 58. Contraction of lo, gli, etc., 22 (see " Union of Articles and Prepositions," 22) ; of participles, 161- Conversazione, 21, 26, 31, 39, 46, 54, 60, 66, 71, 76, 81, 88, 95, 103, l08, 114, 120, 128, 134, 140, 145, 151, 158, 165, 170, 178, 185. _ Costiii, cohii, 106. Cosi, 69, 70. Cotdle. (See "TdZe.") Cotdnto. (See 'Tdnio.") Cotcsto, 104. Oil, 90, 91, 162 ; the article and, 92 D. Da, 22, 40-44, 121-126, 136, 147. Dare, 166; conjugation of, 216; its com- pounds, 166, 216. (See " Verbs.") Days of the week, 39. Declension, 15 ; of articles, 22-24 ; of nouns, 22-24, 41 ; of possessive pro- nouns, 98. Defective verbs, 246 ; list of, 246 ; variation of, 247. (See " Verbs.") Definite article. (See "Article." ) Demonstrative adjective pronouns, 103 ; added to possessive, 105. Di, 22, 40-44, 121-126, 163; when used for " than," 68. DU 28. Diminutives, 76 ; formation of, 77 ; irregu- lar, 79; added to verbs, 79; frequent use of, 81. Diphthongs, 8. Disjunctive possessive pronouns, 97. Dovere, 148, 149, 222. E. E, sounds of, 2. Elision, 3 ; of articles, 17, 18, 22, 23, 85 ; of pronouns. 52, 56 ; of adjectives, 64 ; of adverbs, 172 ; of verbs, 189, 195. £Ua, use of, 56 ; its inflections, 11, 56- Elliptical phrases, 42. Epochs, 86. EquaUty, comparative of, 69. P^ssere, 141, 142, 161 ; conjugation of, 187 ; its own auxiliary, 142 ; its formation of the passive, 142, 204 ; past participle, 187 ; used impersonally, 142, 147, 212 ; infinitive and, 161 ; neuter verbs and, 206; pronominal verbs and, 208. (See "Verbs.") Etymology, 1, 15. Euphonv, 17, 26, 33, 43, 49, 52, 55, 57, 64, 118, 125. Exercises, mnemonic, 16, 21, 26, 32, 40, 46. 47, 48, 55, 61, 67, 72, 79, 82. 89, 96, 103, 109, 115, 121, 129, 135, 141, 146, 153, 159, 166, 171, 179 Exercise in pronunciation, 4, 5-15. Exercises for translation, 20, 25. 31, 38, 45, 53, 59, 65, 71, 75, 87,, 94, 102, 107, 113, 119, 127, 133, 139, 144, 151, 157, 164, 169, 178, 184. Expletives, 149. F. Fare, 166; conjugation of, 217; its com- pounds, 217 ; Italianisms with, 168. (See "yerbs.") Filo, 34. First conjugation, 147, 166, 188 ; irregular verbs, 166, 214. (See " Verbs.") Future tense, 155, 188 ; contraction of, 214. G. Gender, 15, 18 ; of nouns, 27, of adjectives, 32, 61; of augmentatives, etc., 76; of possessive pronouns, 97 ; of demonstra- tive pronouns, 104 ; participles, 161. Gerund, 159, 162. (See "Verbs "). G/?, as article, 17 ; elision of, 18 ; contrac- tion of, 22 ; as pronoun, 48, 51, 55, 100, 162, 247 ; joined to lo, etc., 56. Gli, adverb. 173. Gliclo, etc., 56. Grammar, Italian, 1. ^ H. H used with c before e and i, 2, 73, 150 ; in the formation of plurals, 33, 34. " Have," auxiliary verb. (See ".k-uere.") I (the sign of plural), 28, 32 ; exceptions, 33 ; elision of, 18, 189, 195 ; addition of, 200. (See " JL") Idioms, Italian, 263. II, i, 17 ; contraction of, 23 ; as pronouns, 55, 98, 162 ; suppression of, 74 ; used for prepositions, 42. Imperative mood, 160, 214 ; pronouns after, 51 ; irregular verbs and, 214. Imperfect tense, 150. 156. Impersonal verbs, 147, 155, 210, 212 ; how varied, 210 ; list of, l47, 211 ; essere and, 147, 212 ; pronouns and, 49, 148. (See "Verbs.") In, 129, 136, 163 ; where placed, 130 ; union with article, 22, 131 ; becomes we, 22. Indefinite adjective pronouns, 109, 115. (See "Pronouns.") Indefinite article. (See "Article.") Indicative mood, 154, 156, 162, 196, 198, 201 ; irregular verbs and, 214. Inferiority, comparative of. 68. Infinitive mood, 1.59 ; article and, 20, 147 ; pronouns and, 57 ; terminations of, 147 ; used as a noun, 147, 160 ; as third per- son, 160; present participle and, 163; essere and, 161 ; lui, Ui, and, 160 ; ira« perative and, 160 ; contraction of, 214. INDEX. 277 Interjections, 182 ; in common use, 182 ; derivation of some, 183 ; agreement of, 183. Interrogative pronouns, 50, 91 ; phrases, 50,91. Irregular plurals, 36. Irregular verbs, 166, 214 ; how varied, 214 ; jfirst conjugation, 214 ; second, 219-233 ; third, 234-241; table of, 242. (See " Verbs.") Issimo, 73, 74. Italian alphabet, 1 ; grammar, 1 ; idioms, 263; proverbs, 259. Italianisms, with possessive pronouns, 100 ; with tutto, etc., 112 ; with anddre, dare, 167 ; stare, fare, 168. L. JLa, 17 ; its plural, 17 ; contraction of, 23 ; as pronoun, 55, 162 ; as inflection of ilia, 11, 56 ; before verbs, 56 ; its place, 57 ; before numerals, 83 ; elision of, 18, 56, Ld, adverb, 173. Le, 17, 18; contraction of, 23; as pronoun, 48, 51, 55, 162; before verbs, 56; its place, 57 ; before numerals, 83 ; eUsion of, 18. Letters, 1 ; sounds of, 1. Li, article, 17 ; as pronoun, 55 ; before verbs, 56; its place, 57. Li, adverb, 173. Lo, 17 ; its plural, 17 ; contraction of, 22 as pronoun, 55, 162 ; before verbs, 56 its place, 57 ; used for preposition, 42 elision of, 17, 22, 56. Ldro, 48, 52, 97. M. Mdno, 125. Meco, teco, scco, etc., 51. Mcno or mdnco, 17, 68, 70, 74, 172, 174. Mezzo, 63. Monosyllables, union of, 55, 57. Months of the year, 39. N. Names, proper, 19, 35, 41, 65. Ne, 51, 55, 118, 142, 149, 162, 213, 215,219. (See "Jn.") Neuter verbs, 206 ; how varied, 208 ; be- come pronominal, 209. (See "Verbs.") Non, 56, 58, 117. 149, 160. 171. " Nothing," 93, 110, 116, 117, 174. Kouns, 26; general remarks on, 29; gen- der of, 27 ; plural of, 32 ; double plu- rals, 37 ; irregular plurals, 36 ; cases of, 40 ; terminations of, 27-36 ; proper, 19, 35, 41, 65 ; abstract, 19 ; invariable, 33 ; relation expressed by di, a, da, 40 ; vari- ation of nouns, 41 ; words used as, 19 ; possessive pronouns used as, 98 ; infini- tive used as, 20, 147, 160 ; numeral adjectives and, 83; nouns used as ad- jectives, 62; suppression of the noun after imo, 85 ; exercise upon the noun, 38. Number, 15 ; of articles, 17 ; of nouns, 32; of adjectives, 32, 61 ; pronouns, 36, 97. Numeral adjectives, 82 ; how divided, 82 ; cardinal numbers, 82 ; ordinal, 84 ; fractional and collective, 84. 0. O, sounds of, 2. Objective, repetition of, 66. "Of," rendered by il or lo, 42. Ogni, 109-111 ; og7iidi, 109. Onde, 93 ; donde, 173, 175. Ora. 83, 172 ; ogndra, 109, 172. Ordinal numbers, 84. Orthoepy, 1. Orthography, 1. 0550, 34. P. Paradigms of verbs. (See " Verbs.") Pari, 62. Participles, 161 ; agreement of, 161 ; place of 64. Present, 162 ; how expressed, 162 ; of active verbs, 188 ; prepositions and, 163; infinitive and, 163; che and, 162. Past, 161; of active verbs, 188; of passive, 204 ; of neuter, 206 ; avere, 161; cssere, 142, 161, 187. Pronouns and, 58, 162 ; irregular verbs and, 214 ; as qualificative adjectives, 73 ; contrac- tion of, 161. Particles, 41, 43, 211 ; expletive, 149. Parts of speech, 15. Passive verbs, 147, 204 ; much used, 147 ; formation of, 142, 204 ; how active verbs become passive, 147, 205 ; past participle of, 204. Per, with the article, 24; contraction of, 24 ; as preposition, 122, 129, 131. PercM, 175, 181. Perfect definite, 150, 192, 194, 214. Personal pronouns. (See " Pronouns.") Phrases, adverbial, 123, 124, 176; con- junctive, 181 ; idiomatical, 143, 263 ; in- terrogative, 50, 91. Pin, 17, 67, 70, 74, 172, 174. Plural of articles, 17 ; nouns and adjec- tives, 32, 61 ; pronouns, 36, 97 ; irregu- lar, 36. Poetical pieces, 176, 183. Possessive pronouns. (See " Pronouns.") Prepositions, 121, 129, 135 ; in commoD use, 122 ; union of articles and, 22, 41, 125 ; use of various, 137 ; after persona/ pronouns, 137 ; present participles and, 163 ; repetition of prepositions, 85. Pronominal verbs, 208 ; variation of, 208 (see " Verbs ") ; pronouns and, 51. Pronouns, 46; place of, 49, 57; suppres- sion of, 49 ; transposition of, 58 ; appo- sition of, 49 ; elision of, 52, .56 ; imper sonal verbs and, 49 ; pronominal verbs and, 61; infinitive and, 57; past parti 24 278 INDEX. ciples and, 58 ; euphonic rules, 57 ; doubling of consonants, 58. Personal pronouns in the nominative, 46, 49 ; in the objective, 47, 50, 55 ; verbs and, 148 ; past participles and, 162 ; preposi- tions and, 137. Possessive adjective, 20, 97; plural of, 36, 97; division of, 97; Tariation of, 98 ; agreement of, 98 ; per- sonal pronouns and, 99 ; as nouns, 98 ; as Italianisms, 100 ; as expletives, 149 ; use of, with article, 20, 98, 99 ; demon- stratives added to, 105. Indefinite, 109, 115 ; used in singular, 109 , in plural, 110. Relative, 89, 97. Demonstrative, 103 ; added to possijssive, 105. Interrog- ative, 50, 91. Conjunctive, 48, 55, 97, 209, 215, 219. Disjunctive, 97. Reflec- tive, 51. Pronunciation, 1 ; exercise in, 4 ; reading- exercise in, 5-15. Proprio, 98. Prosody, 1. Proverbs, Italian, 259. Ptire, 181. Q. Quale, 36, 90, 116, 155, 162 ; use of, 91. Qudnto, 62, 69, 70. Quello, 104. Questo, 104-106. E. Reading-lessons, 5, 20, 25, 30, 87, 44, 52, 59, 65, 70, 74, 86, 94, 100, 106, 113, 118, 126, 132, 138, 143, 150, 156, 164, 169, 176, 183. Reflective verbs, 208. (See " Pronominal Verbs.") Regular verbs, 188 ; synoptical table of the variations of, 202. (See " Verbs.") Relative pronouns, 89, 97. s. Se* 47, 50, 51, 118. Second conjugation, 192 ; division of, 192 ; first class, 192 ; second class, 194 ; irreg- ular verbs, 219-233. (See " Verbs.") " Self," 49. Si, 51, 57. 100, 117. 147, 149. 162, 205, 209, 219, 221, 228, 229. 230, 247. Signdre, Signdra, etc. y 19 , 56, 99; elision of, 19. " Some." 43, 110, 112. Sdmyno, 73. Sopra, used for su, 24. Sounds of vowels, 2 ; of consonants, 2 ; of e, 2 ; of 0, 2 ; compound, 3. Speech, parts of, 15. Sia, abbreviation of questa, 105. Stare, 160, 166; conjugation of, 218; its compounds, 166, 219 ; Italianisms with, 167 ; conjunctive pronouns and, 219. Stra, as particle, 73. Su, with article, 22, 24 ; contraction of, 24 ; preposition, 122 ; sopra used for, 24. Subjunctive mood, 153 ; when used, 154 ; tenses of, 156 ; irregular verbs and, 214 ; conjunctions and, 156. Substantives. (See "Nouns.") '• Such," 62, 106, 110, 112. Superiority, comparative of, 67. Superlatives of adjectives, 73 ; of adverbs, 172 ; of interjections, 183. Syllables, 4 ; termination of, 4 ; exceptions, 4 ; union of, 55, 57 ; suppression of, 63. Synoptical table of regular verbs, 202. Syntax, 1 ; of verbs, 146. Table, synoptical, of regular verbs, 202; of irregular verbs, 242. (See " Verbs ") Tale, 36, 62, 106, 110, 112. Tdnto, 69, 110. Tenses of dependent verbs in a compound sentence, 155. " Than," rendered by di and che, etc., 68; by come and cosi, 69. Third conjugation, 196 ; division into three classes, 196 ; first class, 196 ; second, 198; third, 201; irregular verbs, 234- 241 ; list of, 234. Titles, 19, 56, 99. " To be hungry," " thirsty," etc., 143. Tt'ttlo. 110, 149 ; its agreement with the noun. 111 ; as an Italianism, 112. u. Uomini, 36. TJnipersonal verbs, 210. (See " Impersonal Verbs.") tino, un, una, 16, 43, 85, 110; when sup- pressed, 85 ; elision of, 85. Usc'ire, 42, 125 ; conjugation of, 240 V. Variations of regular verbs, 202. Venire, 125, 142, 148, 160 ; conjugation of, 241. Verbs, 141 ; syntax of, 146 ; general rules, 147 ; irregularities of, 214 ; moods of (sec "Infinitive," "Indicative," "Im- perative," and " Subjunctive Moods"); tenses of (see "Imperfect," "Perfect Definite," and " Future Tenses "); par- ticiples of ( see " Participles " ). Place of the verb, 149, 160 ; terminations of, 147 Article and verbs, 20, 147. Noun<» * Se (himself) was formerly written with an accent, — se. INDEX. 279 and verbs, 20, 147, 159, 160. Pro- nouns and verbs, 49, 51, 57, 91, 148. Union with diminutives, 79. Auxiliary verbs, 141, 186 ; conjugation of avcre, 186 (see "^rere"); of cssere, 187 (see JEssere " ). Regular verbs. 188. Active verbs, 188 (see " Active Verbs " ). First conjugation, 188 ; conjugation of amdre, 188 ; of cercdrey 190 ; of prepare, 191. Second conjugation, 192 ; conjugation of temere, 192 ; of tdssere, 194. Third con- jugation, 196 ; conjugation of .sent'tre, 196; of esib'ire, 198; of cudre, 200; of abborr'ire, 201. Synopsis of the varia- tions of regular verbs, 202. Passive verbs, 204 (see *' Passive Verbs ") ; con- jugation of essere amdto, 204. Neuter verbs, 206 (see "Neuter Verbs"); con- jugation of partire, 206. Pronominal or rellective verbs, 208 (see " Pronominal Verbs) ; conjugation of pent'irsi, 208. Unipersonal verbs, 210 (see " Imperson- al Verbs) ; conjugation of pidvere, 210 ; of essere (unipersonally used), 212. Ir- regular verbs, 214 (see " Irregular Verbs "). First conjugation, 214 ; con- jugation of anddrCy 215 ; of dare, 216 ; of fare, 217; otstdre, 218 (see "ylnf/dre," ^'Ddre,^^ "Fare," ":ned to his sons have arrived. 11. The soldiers have come from Georgia. 12. The rules of this Grammar are easy. 13. Patriarchs are monarchs of the Church. 14. Mr. A. has received the catalogues from the bookseller. 15. Success is for him who seizes upon it. 16. Fanaticism is, to superstition, what excitement is to fever; what rage is to anger. 17. Woe to the man whose only ambition is to please mean men ! 18. The religious fanaticism of the Puritans was the promoter and the support of the revolution in England. Exercise VI and VII. Pronoims. Who are you ? I am your friend. What do you wish of me ? Have you money ? I have need of money. He has written a letter. What have you said to me? A daughter is born to him. Does it rain ? No ; it snows. They are with her in my father's house. Tell him and her that I love them. I wrote a letter to her. They are 'writing to you. I shall go to the post myself. Do you think of me ? I think of you. Give me a good stick. Think no more of them. What has he said to you of them? Let him do it. I do not wish to do as you do. Wlio is there ? It is I. It is he. He speaks of us. I give you this ring because I love you. Will you send this letter to him ? He loves his friend. I love you, and you love me. I will go with you. She speaks of you. Think no more of him. Go with them. I wish to see you. She can speak to him of it. Do not ask it of her. Behold him. Behold her. Behold us. He gives it to us. We lend them to you. He will give the flowers to her. I will give them to him. She does not deny it. Give it to her. She gives it to her neighbor. I do not wish to see them. Tell them so (it). 1. Silvio Pellico says, " We read, or meditate in silence, a great part of the day." 2. " I wrote the tragedy of * Leoniero da 12 EXERCISES FOR TEANSLATIOK. Dertona/ and many other things." 3. " From my heart, 1 pardon my enemies." 4. " Although Mr. M. was in a deplorable state, he sang, he conversed, and did every thing to conceal a part of his sufferings from me." 5. If you do not embrace fortune when she presents herself, you may hope for her in vain when she has turned her shoulders upon you. 6. Do not disturb opinions which render a man happy, unless you can give him better ones. 7. If we wish to know what any one says of us when we are absent, let us only observe what they say of others in our pres- ence. 8. Some one asked Diogenes what was the best method of revenging himself on his enemy. " You will succeed," .-^aid Diogenes, " by showing yourself an honest man." 9. A vag- abond dog went into a forest, and, finding a lion, he said to him, '' You go wandering through the woods ; you suffer from hunger and the inclemencies of the season. See me : I live, and enjoy much, without any trouble. Does my life please you ? Will you come with me ? You know it will be for your good." The proud and generous lion answered, " You eat ; you are sheltered ; you take pleasure, and have no trouble, it is true : but you are a servant, and I am free, and will never serve upon any terms." 10. It is not the abundance of riches we possess which can make us happy, but the use we make of them. 1 1 . Behold ! it is Rome which presents herself to your view ; it is Rome, the eternal city, the city of wonders. 12. Misfortunes shake hands; they seldom come alone. 13. The joys of friendship make us almost forget our misfortunes. 14. The prisoner said to the chief keeper, "What is your name?" To which he answered. " Fortune, sir, made fun of me, giving me the name of a greaJ man. My name is Schiller." 15. All the most amiable gifts oi mind and heart are united in Raphael to render him dear to me 16. Every one complains of his memory, and no one of his judgment. 17. The soul of Bice was worthy of the heaven which now possesses it ; and her example sustains me in the fear which often oppresses me since her death. 18. I heard Ellen praying ; and, kneeling down without interrupting her, I EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 13 followed her words, with my eyes filled with tears. 19. A bad poet had a satire printed against Benedict XIV. The pontiff examined, corrected, and returned it to the author ; assuring him, that it would sell better thus corrected. 20. Great men recognize, fraternize, and embrace each other, through the lapse of ages. 21. A crow dressed himself with the fallen feathers of a peacock, and, despising his companions, went among the pea- cocks, who, recognizing him, stripped him of his false plumes, and drove him away. Then he returned in confusion to his com- panions, seeking to unite with them again ; but they made fun of and refused to receive him. Let the misfortune of the crow be a lesson to us. Exercise VIII. Adjectives. The honest man. The diligent scholar. A sweet apple. Good books. Are you idle ? She is generous. They are obe- dient. We are merry. Who are weak? He is not strong. I am tired. Life is short. Who is ready ? That boy is a good scholar. The little girl has a new dress. We are poor. Mrs. S. is modest and amiable. Your friend (f ) is generous. I am not strong. Give him half a bottle of good wine. Have you seen the beautiful flowers in the king's garden ? Those strangers are not innocent of the great crime. We are in a small house. There are beautiful trees in this garden. Tiiat lady has fine eyes. I have many apples and few pears. Have you many friends ? Is he deaf, or is he dumb ? My dog is faithful. Tlie poor woman was lame. Your coat is not blue ; it is black. Her hat is white, and mine is yellow. That girl is not ill ; she is obstinate and ungrateful. Who is that proud young mtin? The lady is very polite. The streets of Boston are not large. What useless work! Is she inquisitive? This writing-paper is not good. They are imprudent. The men who are in that large white house are honest and wise. 2 11 EXERCISES rOK TRANSLATION. 1. Milton's "Paradise Lost" is a fine poem. 2. The Queen of England is a kind lady ; she loves the good and industrious. 3. The German lady is very generous ; she always thinks of the poor, and takes care of many orphans. 4. There are large forests in France and Germany. 5. A constant, sincere, and disinterested friend is rare. 6. The short dress, the close black- velvet waist, and the coarse red handkerchief which partly covered her face, clearly showed her to be an Alpine girl (to have come from, the Alps). 7. Doctor S. had great love for justice, great tolerance, great faith in human virtue and in the help of Provi- dence, and a vivid sentiment of the beautiful in art. 8. All social posts can be occupied by honest men. 9. The moral and political vicissitudes of nations transform a people of heroes into a horde of slaves. 10. Why are there upon the earth so much beauty and so many imperfections ? why, in man, so much gran- deur and so much misery? 11. Aosta, a Roman city, is full of beautiful ruins of the time of Augustus. 12. Columbus said, " My thoughts are such as please few (persons) : they are, as I think, wise, certain, reasonable, meditative ; but yet, to most men, they would appear vain, foolish, adventufous, and frivo- lous." 13. I love Torino : I love its beautiful squares, its large and clean streets ; and I love, more than all, its slow, but indus- trious, silent, and progressive life. 14. Crescenzio, of illustrious birth and fine person, was rich, and brave in arms. 15. The Dutch are generally a patient, laborious, neat, sober, frugal, and industrious people. 16. Death spares neither rich nor poor. 17. The diligent hand conquers want ; and prosperity and suc- cess accompany the industrious. 18. The tongue is a little member; but it says great things. 19. A mild, polite, and affable person is esteemed by everybody. EXEUCISES FOll TRANSLATION. 15 Exercise IX. Adjectives in the Comparative. Charles is more inquisitive than his sister. Maria is hand- somer than her mother. These pears are sweet ; but the plums are sweeter. The dog is more faithful than the cat. We are more tired than unhappy. He is happier than his brothers. You are more wicked than I. He is as dexterous as generous. You are happy ; but we are happier. Mr. L. is richer than his neighbor. In summer the days are longer than in winter. Gold is more valuable than silver. Tlie girls are more discreet than the boys. Rafaello is handsomer than his brothers. Her cheeks are red as roses. White as milk. 1. The richer man is, the more avaricious he is. 2. The more Napoleon conquered, the more he wished to conquer. 3. The term of life is short; that of beauty is still shorter. 4. The stork has a longer neck than the goose. 5. In summer the days are longer than they are in winter. 6. Brass is more useful than lead. 7. The General was less successful than skilful. 8. Charles fell into an indifference, which was worse than doubt. 9. There is more true glory in forgiveness than in re- venge. 10. Antonio was perhaps as great a man as Augustus ; but he was less fortunate. 11. The Savoyards have more active blood than we have : they have more of the impetuous temper of the French ; we, more of the blessed " far niente " of the Ital- ians. 12. Nothing is so contagious as example. 13. Generally, the ,more populous a country, the richer it is. 14. Few peo- ple liave a more celebrated, and, at the same time, a more mis- erable country. 15. It is in thy own power, O man! to be less unhappy. Arm thyself with firmness against present ills, and forget the happier days which are passed. 16. Women ])roduce much stronger sentiments in the heart of man by their wit than by their beauty. 17. A philosopher said, that it was better to consult women than learned men in doubts concerning language ; IG EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. because the latter do not speak so well or so easily as the former, who study less. 18. There are as many kinds of hypoc- risy as there are virtues. 19. Alphonso, King of Spain, said, " I am more afraid of the tears of my people, than the strength of my enemies." Exercise X. Adjectives : their Superlatives. How do you feel to-day ? I feel very well ; I have no pain m my head ; I am very strong. They have little bread, and less meat. Your liouse is convenient, ours is more so ; but that of Mrs. S. is the most convenient of all. That is the finest tree in the country. We have the best water in town. Your well is the deepest I ever saw. Her hat is more fashionable than hand- some, and very large. It is better to have too much than too little. Maria is more industrious than Sarah ; she is the most industrious person in the house. 1. The Campidoglio was the most celebrated edifice of Rome. 2. Nestor was the oldest and the wisest of all the Greeks who were at the siege of Troy. 3. It is a most bitter thing to be forever separated from our friends. 4. There are very valiant men upon the American battle-field. 5. Princes are often more unhappy than the greatest part of their subjects. 6. Self-love is the most cunning of all flatterers. 7. The most pernicious of all sins is calumny : it very often ruins the reputation of the most honest people, makes discord among the most intimate friends ; in fact, it is the most abominable sin in the world. 8. The most ngreeable quality that a man can have, is to be civil and courteous. 0. He who is difficult in selectins^, often chooses the worst. 10. A philosopher says, that the grandest object in the world is a good man struggling against adversity. 11. Intemperance and idleness are our most dangerous enemies. 12. It is said that there was a very happy and a very rare exuberance of loy- alty in C. Balbo, Avhich commanded love and respect. 13. " The Life of Dante" is a work about which history and literai^u^e EXERCISES FOR TRxVNSLATION. 17 dispute, as to which shall enumerate it among the best in their respective categories. 14. Naples and Florence are among the most ancient and most beautiful cities. 15. We call that medium distance, which holds the middle place between the longest and the shortest. 16. The most noted States are not those which possess the most fertile country, but those which give themselves up with the greatest activity to arts and trade. 17. The dis- covery by Columbus was the fruit of a most vivid intellect, exalted by a very warm imagination, and sustained by an iron and indomitable nature. 18. Fidelity, which comprehends in itself almost all virtues, has no merit, is almost no virtue, when it can be inculcated by fear ; but it is one of the sublimest vir- tues when it is inspired by love. Exercise XL Numerals. My sister has five books, and I have but two. Your brother has a new cane. The farmer has 54 apple and 10 pear-trees in his little orchard. I have two horses, three cows, one dog, and 50 hens. There are four weeks in a month. February has 28 days. A year has 12 months, 52 weeks, or 365 days. He is 25 years old ; he was born in the year 1840. Is your father 60 years old? No, he was born in 1810. I have bought three bottles of wine, and six bottles of cider. Give me 22 rolls for 20 cents. In Boston there are 104 churches, 19,500 houses, and nearly 185,000 inhabitants. How much is 5 times 25? 9 times 72? 40 and 50 make 90. 65 and 70 make 135. We sailed for Europe on 1st of June, 1820, and returned Oct. 17, 1827. The first day of the week. The third month of the year. We have had sixteen bottles of wine, and this is the seventeenth. My son is three years and a half old. Lula is the third in lier class. Give me five different kinds of fruit. We are in the nineteenth century. This is the sixth bird I have seen to-day. He has spent three dollars and three-quarters for trifles. Tell 2* 18 -EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. us what o'clock it is. It is a quarter past five, And almost time for supper. Fifteen gentlemen and ten ladies. Twenty boys and three girls. Twenty-one dollars and seventy-five cents. The poor old woman said she was eighty-one years old. 1. In our times, it is not rare to see decrepit people of twenty- five years. 2. Caesar conquered more than eight hundred cities in less than ten years. 3. Sophocles and Euripides, two famous tragedians, were both Athenians. 4. The exhibition which Titus gave to the Roman people, at one time, cost him eighty millions. 5. Lewis Fourteenth was said to be one of the greatest kings in the world. 6. Where do we see men of the stamp of those depicted by Dante in the fifteenth and sixteenth canto of his Paradise ? 7. Herodotus relates of the ancient Persians, that, from the age of five years to twenty, they taught their chil- dren only three things, — to manage a horse, to use the bow, and to tell the truth. 8. About the year one thousand, St. Bernard, a Savoyard, founded the useful and famous monastery on one of the highest summits of the Alps, which still flourishes. 9. A fool- ish young man asked an old lady how old she was. " I do not know exactly," she replied ; " but I have always heard, that an ass is older at twenty years than a woman at seventy." 10. Ma- sinissa. King of Numidia, died at the age of ninety-seven years, leaving forty -four children ; he had been an ally of Rome nearly seventy years. 11. Hospitality is one of the first duties of man. 12. The Venetians imposed a singular tribute upon the Patriarch of Aquila, in the year one thousand one hundred and seventy-three : every year, on Shrove-Tuesday, he was obliged to send a bull and a dozen pigs to Venice ; they represented the Patriarch and his twelve canons. They were led through the city in pomp, and then killed. 13. Henry Dandolo, whose eyes had been put out by order of the Emperor Manuel Comnene, was, however, elected Doge of Venice, in the year one thousand one hundred ninety-two, at the age of eighty-four years. Soon after, he took command of the Venetian fleet of five hundred vessels, and succeeded in taking possession of Constantinople in EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 19 the year one thousand two hundred and four. After this con- quest, he added to his other titles that of Lord of the Fourth and Eighth of the Roman Empire. 14. The activity of the Savoyards is shown on both sides of the Alps : it not only sends street- sweeps and servants into France, but soldiers also, fifteen or eighteen Savoyard generals having been in the French army. 15. Count Caesar Balbo expired on the evening of the third of June, one thousand eight hundred and fifty-three, after a few days of acute suffering. Exercise XII. Relative Pronouns. Who are you? What is that? Which is it? What have you for me ? To whom did you give the chocolate ? Whose coat is that ? What does he say ? Whose children are they ? Which of these oranges is the sweetest ? A man eats what he likes. He will give this book to her whom he likes best. The shoes which you bought are not good. Which flowers are the handsomest? Of whom have you bought this linen? What have you given for it ? To whom does she write ? For what do you study ? What is good for you ? What have you seen ? Tiiat is the lady of whom I spoke. He who is rich is not always happy. Upon what does he live ? What a beautiful tree ! What beautiful flowers ! He who is speaking is the teacher. The lady for whom she works has much business. Which of these two pears do you wish? What is the (f) domestic doing? Who is going with you ? The boy whom you have seen with me. Whose horse is that? It is mine; I bought it of your father's friend. What is the use of appetite without food ? That of which you think the least is to amuse yourself. 1. Cleopatra wore two pearls in her ears, each of which cost more than a million. 2. Tell me whose company you keep, and I will tell you who you are. 3. There are faces in which the character of goodness is well expressed. 4. He who acts con- scientiously may err ; but he is pure in the sight of God. 5. What 20 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. is learned in youth is easily impressed upon the mind. 6. Happy are those who can content themselves with the necessaries of life. 7. He who does not love his brother does not deserve to live. 8. Modesty is to merit what a gauze veil is to beauty : it diminishes its splendor, but augments its value. 9. That which is most delicate in a work is lost by translating it into another language. 10. There is a certain art in conversation whicli gives grace to the simplest thing. 11. Contact with other men is necessary for him who has to write history. 12. The cocoa- nut-tree is of medium size ; the leaves of which fall and shoot forth alternately, so that it is always covered with foliage. 13. Venice is a city unique in the world by its situation; it is precisely like an immense ship, which tranquilly reposes upon the water, and which no one can reach, but by means of boats. 14. There is nothing, however mean it may be, that is not useful for something. 15. Charles Bonnet, who was almost perfect in heart and mind, tells us that after death all the species mount one round of the ladder which leads to perfection. IG. At the commencement of a feast, the Romans used to present a list of the viands which were to appear upon the table to the guests, in order that each one might reserve his appetite for that which most pleased him. 17. A preacher had annoyed all his audience preaching upon the beatitudes. After the sermon, a lady told him that he had forgotten one. " Which ? " asked the preacher. " That," answered the lady, " blessed is he who did not hear your sermon;" 18. Listlessness is a disease, the only remedy for which is labor. 19. That which is called Eldorado is only a sandy desert, which will not offer you a drop of water if you are thirsty, nor the shade of a tree if you are weary. Exercise XHI. Possessive Adjective Pronouns. Is this your bi-other's pen ? No, it is mine. All that I have is hers. His book is very good. Our relations are not poor. EXERCISES FOR TRAJS\SLATION. 21 The daughter loves her father and mother. The son loves his mother and sister. I love you and your children. Do not speak against my relations. It is one of my sisters. She is in the kitchen with her aunt. To-day she will put on her best white hat, and her new shoes. Go in her stead. He spoke continually of his father, mother, and sister. Their female friends are not in the city. Is that your glove? No, it is not mine ; it is yours. Their good dog is not in our yard. Look at your watch. Give me my property. Go to his store. These are your apples, his pears, and my cherries. Who has her nice ribbons ? Where is my lace ? Give my aunt her money. My dear friend, I have nothing to give him. They were her people. Her neighbor was left to guard her house and her cows. She and her mother. My dear children. Put it in your pocket. She put it upon her head. He did it with his hands. 1. England owes her wealth to the protection which she accords to her commerce. 2. Oh, what a longing a prisoner has to see his fellow-creatures ! o. There is no doubt, that every human condition has its peculiar duties. 4. Nothing serves better to confound our enemies, than not to notice their offence. 5. Every condition has its pleasures and its pains. 6. The great wisdom of man consists in knowing his folly. 7. Our friends foi'sake us when fortune ceases to favor us. 8. A wise man often doubts : a foolish man never ; he knows every thing but his own ignorance. 9. Euripides complained to one of his friends, that he had been three days making a few verses. 10. Conscience is a just judge of our actions. 11. A sick man almost always says to his physician, My head and all my body pains me. 12. Hannibal distinguished himself from his equals not by the magnificence of his dress, but by the beauty of his horse and his arms. 13. Self-love is our prime mover. 14. "And he also, when he saw me, arose, and, throwing his •arms about my neck, embraced me." 15. A sim[)leton joked a man of wit about his large ears. " I acknowledge having them too large for a man," he answered ; " but you must at the same 22 EXERCISES FOR TRiVNSLATION. time agree, that yours are too small for an ass." 16. If you at- tempt to enter into conversation with an Englishman who does not know you, he will certainly take you for a knave. He will button up his vest, put his handkerchief well into his pocket, see that his watch is safe, and look crabbedly at you. Notice his face : it says to you, " Leave me alone." Yet this same person is perhaps the most friendly of mortals ; he only wishes to protect his own independence. 17. A fox seeing a crow, which had a piece of cheese in her beak, upon a tree, began to praise her very much. " What fine feathers ! " he said ; " what a beautiful body ! If you knew how to sing, upon my word there could bo no finer bird." The foolish bird, to allow her voice to be heard, opened her beak, and let the cheese fall ; and the fox, seizing it, carried it away. But the fox soon paid for his fraud ; for the shepherd came, and killed him for his skin. Exercise XIV. Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns. This is my penknife ; that is yours. These are her pens. Is that ink good ? Who is he ? Who is she ? Who are they ? This house no longer belongs to me. What have you in that trunk ? Who are those men ? What did your father buy to day ? AVho has given me this beautiful bouquet ? What is in that closet ? She will do what the master tells her. We shall go and take a little walk this evening. In the meantime you can go to our neighbors. Take this inkstand, and give me that. That is the lady of whom I was speaking. This rich man is sick. Those poor women are well. That poor child is hand- some and good. Give those gloves to that man. To this or to that? This man was learned, that was ignorant. That axe was lost. I have found this gold axe. Is this your axe, sir? This morning I worked in the garden. He planted those seeds which you gave him. This book is incorrect. That grammar is much used. He loves those dear children. Where have 1 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 23 seen those faces? To whom have you given those plums ^ Have you written to that lady? What did she say to that news ? I prefer this table to that. This hat is very becoming to your daughter. She likes these red ribbons, not those yellow ones. Give me that small piece of cheese. 1. Happy are those who love to read. 2. We love those who admire us ; but we do not always love those whom we admire. 3. Those who believe that happiness consists in riches deceive themselves. 4. We often forgive those who annoy us, but rarely those whom we annoy. 5. Ariosto is the poet of the ima";ination, Tasso that of the intellect. 6. James I. was one of those men who are discontented with their condition, and envious of others' glory. 7. Plato banished music from his republic. 8. All the works of nature merit our admiration. 9. The words of a sincere man are the thoughts of his heart. 10. " His eyes were closed by his physician, his friend from infancy, and a man all religion and charity." 11. "I have never known a more noble spirit than his, and few similar to his." 12. True grief weeps little ; the tear of the soul is much more bitter than that shed from the eye. 13. Those who flatter the great, ruin them. 14. We must do what God sets us to do, and take what he sends us. 15. There are human beings to whom nature shows herself a real step-mother ; poor Joanne was one of these unhappy creatures. 16. The hour of twilight exercises a mysterious influence upon gentle spirits ; that light and those shadows which seem to meet only to take leave of each other (to give an adieu) awaken a thousand delicate and affectionate thoughts. 17. From time to time, conscience wars against pride, and attempts to conquer its bad reasonings (the bad reasonings of this) by bearing witness to the truth. 18. That sky, that country, that distant motion of creatures in the valley, those voices of the country girls, those laughs, those songs, ex- hilarated us very much. 19. The wounds of the body are nothing in comparison to those of the mind. 24 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Exercise XV. Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. They have spoken of nobody. She gave it to somebody. I had nothins: for dinner. The children love each other. One goes, and another comes. Both are in the city. Give him all you have. Tell me all you know. The woman knows every- body. The good man loves everybody. Has any one been here ? It is said that Celia will go to France. No one is with- out faults. Some are good, others are bad. I hear somebody's voice. They are not going into Washington Street. They sny it was a long procession. Is there any thing new to-day ? 1. Every man is exposed to criticism. 2. All men are subject to death. 3. Every one has his faults. 4. Take those books, and put them each in its place. 5. Justice includes all other virtues. 6. Scipio displayed grandeur in all his actions. 7. All nations appear to desire to obtain merit from the splendor of their origin. 8. We must have patience, and every thing will come right in time. 9. People judge others' things in a different manner from that in which they would judge their own. 10. People drink good wine in France, and eat good meat in England. 11. Every period of life has pleasures proper and natural to it. 12. Whatever reasons one may have for being absent from his country, there can be none sufficiently strong to make him forget it. 13. Vice disunites men, keeping them on guard, one against the other. 14. That which thou desirest others to keep silent, keep thou silent. 15. Other times, other customs. 16. It is foolish not to wish to know any thing. 17. No language is perfect in itself. 18. It is easier to be wise for others than for ourselves. 16. Every body seeks happiness, few find it. 20. A preacher, who had not been invited to dine with any one through Lent, said, in his last sermon,, that he had preached against all sins except that of gluttony, because it had not appeared to him that such a vice EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 2o ruled in the country. 21. Some one asked an American, why there had not been a monument erected to Christopher Colum- bus. 22. Every beginning is difficult. Exercise XVI. Iridejinite Adjective Pronouns Continued. What is the best news? What is the talk about town? Tliere is no news. I have read no paper to-day. Do they still speak of war? No, they speak only of peace. Every flower has its beauty. Every man has his virtues. Our friends will remain in France some weeks. She spends her time in some useful occupation. They have some good books. One sees that he is only a child. No servant was ever more faithful. We shall remain in the city all summer. He goes somewhere every season. Every one is her friend, because she is good. One can do much. Every little helps. It is not well to do nothing. Some make money, others lose it. The girls were jealous of j one another. One has a fine face, the other a handsome hand. Both mother and child were here. 1. Any loss is more honorable than to lie. 5. All the laws and the prophets, all the collection of sacred books, is reduced to the precept of loving God and man. 3. The pleas- ure derived from things, in appearance almost nothing, when we wish well to some one, is indescribable. 4. Speaking with one and another is a pleasant recreation for every one. 5. No friendship, however intimate it may be, can authorize the vio- lation of a secret. 6. God knows how much more pleasant the name of Naples, the city of my fathers, is to me than that of any other name of Italian country. 7. Nothing is durable here below. 8. Every thing has its time; and the usages of war, perhaps, more than any other thing. 9. In plains we wish for hills, and on hills we naturally wish to walk on plains. 10. There is almost no great capital in Europe where they do not 9(5 JiXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. seek servants from some remote, hidden province, and for the most part from the mountains. Exercise XVII. Prepositions di, a, da. Have you come to find me ? Do not go near the bed. That boy has fallen from the tree. Give the boy milk to drink, and some bread to eat. Have you good writing-paper ? My sister ha>s a good saddlehorse to sell. They say that our enemy is out of danger. Whilst the child is starving at home, the mother goes to church to pray. Give that man something to do. Do not say it in jest. That domestic is not fit for many things. The little boy plays the teacher, and the little girl the mistress of the house. He lives out of the town, and keeps arms for defence in his house. Why have you not something to do ? I have been sick since last year. Those girls depend upon their aunt. Have you learned your lesson by heart ? 1. We must be careful not to expose ourselves to danger. 2. Caesar said to some one who was reading in his presence, " Are you reading, or are you singing ? If you are singing, you sing very badly." 3. When the gods love princes, says an ancient philosopher, they pour a mixture of good and evil into their cup of fate, so that they may never forget that they are men. 4. There is no true friendship without virtue. 5. Riches and poverty have great influence upon men. 6. The city of Florence enjoyed tranquillity and abundance under the government of the Medici. 7. Have three things open to your friend, — your face, your purse, and your heart. 8. Charlemagne sealed treaties with the hilt of his sword. 9. " Dying, we find an asylum against the misfortunes of life," said Seneca. 10. We ought to learn more from observation than from books. 11. "The eternal God has poured out happiness ; and I, I alone, am without help, with- out friends, without company." 12. God save you from living alone, by force (being forced to live alone) ! 13. It was ordered EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 27 by Providence, that, when man is struck with calamity, woman shall be his support and consolation. 14. The last of the Vallesa was one of the best and most noble — noble in actions — among the ministers of our good and popular king. 15. It is not pos- sible not to find some enchantment in the presence, in the looks, and in the conversation, of a good, vivacious, and affectionate old lady. 16. It is said that the suffering of man upon earth is for the good of mankind. Exercise XVIII. Prepositions in, con, per. From this time forward. From that time forward. My house is in one of the principal streets of the city. Are you angry ? Where is the bunch of grapes which your uncle had for me? Go to the tailor's for your father's coat. With whom do you study music? We study with the schoolmaster. Are you going to Mrs. G.'s to-day ? How did the boys go into the church ? They went four-by-four. The lady saw a little girl pass over (through) the meadow with a faggot of wood upon her head. I only wish to speak with you. We earn our bread by labor. Money is to pay the house- rent. What do you do to earn your food ? Will you come with me ? The hostess led us into a clean room. The father returned with the clothes which he had bought in the village. A dog was sleeping at his ease in a manger full of hay. An ox came to the manger to eat. The envious dog barked, and would not allow the ox to approach the hay. The poor hungry animal was angry at such an overbearing act, and said to the ribald dog, " May God reward you according to your deserts, uncharitable villain ! You do not eat the hay yourself, nor per- mit others to enjoy it. Make use of the good things given you by Heaven, and permit others to enjoy theirs." 28 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Exercise XIX. Prepositions. She will be here in ten days. It is said there is nothing new under the sun. We will go together after dinner. They praise her to the skies. Until now I have been your friend. He is beloved even by his enemies. Do not hesitate. I shall have finished this book shortly. He has been in France nearly three years. There are nearly one thousand souls in this town. I can do nothing without you. Poor w^omen ! They appear to be friendless. The good man cannot see my husband without speaking to him. There is no entrance for any one. Mary set out for the city with her mamma. She had a little bed at the side of the lady's bed. 1. Before pubHshing his poem, Tasso wished to submit it to the criticisms of the bravest men of his times. 2. The poet was presented to the king by the generous duke. 3. To that unfor- tunate woman, Rome alone appeared to be a secure asylum. 4. The soldier has every proof of esteem from the most cele- brated men who live here. 5. Mrs. U. presents her compli- ments to Mr. M. She cannot have the pleasure of seeing him to-day, and begs him to excuse her. 6. Mrs. U. presents her compliments to Mrs. M., and requests the favor of her company on Tuesday evening next. 7. If you do not call upon me in the morning, I shall certainly wait on you in the evening. 8. The country is submerged from time to time, and once Charles was up to his head in water. 9. Who lives according to the laws of nature, in this city ? 10. Caroline has found some strawberries between the two stones at the side of the wall. 11. Mr. L. was silent ; and sadly he fixed his eyes upon Peter, who cast his down to the earth. 12. Captain S. yields to civil orders, is a sincere lover of peace, and aspires to no other dignity than that of being able to be useful to his beloved country. 13. The cap- tain was named Schiller ; he was a Swiss, of a peasant family ; EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION". 29 he had served asrainst the Turks under General Landon in the times of Joseph 11. ; then in all the wars of Austria against France, until the fall of Napoleon. 14. The hospitality of the French is the most complete in the actual state of society. 15. Among the Sybarites, women invited to feasts and public dinners were notified a year previous, that they might have time to appear with all the pomp of beauty and dress. Exercise XX. The Verbs essere and avere. We are poor and sick. Are you not rich enough? Were they all here ? Have you had time to go to Rome ? I shall be at home next week. There is no time to lose. Why are you in such a hurry ? Be quiet, and you shall have some figs. Be so kind as to to give that old man a glass of wine. There are many people who do not love to work. We have no meat for dinner. I am ill, and have no appetite. The physician is charmed with the progress of his patient. They have a cold. The parents of those children have been too indulgent. He has been to the tailor's ; but the coat was not finished. I shall be happy to see her in my new house. They have been very polite to us. She is about to marry. I will come to your house to-morrow. It may be that I shall not be at home. Her things are all in a good way now. I look upon thee as a good friend. There is no hope left. Mr. R. is a rich man, or a man of great wealth. The rich are not always happy. Good health is bet- ter than wealth. What is the matter with you ? I am no longer hungry. That would be useless. Is his bird tame? Have they green worsted ? Give her needle, thread, and cotton. 1. The city of Briinn is the capital of Moravia. 2. To be a slave to the judgment of others, when you are persuaded that it is false is the height of baseness. 3. Happy are those who hate violent pleasures, and know how to be contented with an innocent life. 4. Whoever is capable of lying, is unworthy of being enu- 3* 30 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION". merated among men. 5. It was a sweet pleasure to hear those songs and the organ which accompanied them. 6. It is easy to give advice, but very difficult to follow it. 7. Albert R. had changed his hope of being one of the great of Europe, into that of being one of the first of his own little province. 8. Arduino, Marquis of Ivrea, was the last Italian king of Italy. 9. It is curious that Piedmont, one of the most picturesque countries perhaps in the world, was nevertheless one of the last to admit picturesque gardening. 10. The city of Tyre is refreshed by the north wind which comes from the sea. 11. The greater the number of men there are in a country, provided they are indus- trious, the more abundance they enjoy. 12. The ambition and avarice of men are the sole origin of all their misfortunes. 13. The most unhappy of all men is he who believes himself to be so. 14. The most free of all men, is he who can be free even in slavery. 15. Misfortune is the school of great intellects. 16. Friendship and religion are two inestimable advantages (goods). 17. Not to remember happy days is a great diminu- tion of misery, particularly when we are young. 18. General B. said, " I have always believed that the education of war is the best education that a man can have." Exercise XXI. The Verbs aiid their ■ Syntax, Have you seen the violets ? There are beautiful tulips in your cousin's garden. How fresh every thing looks ! Every thing looks alive. The rain has done a great deal of good. This is the warmest summer I can remember. I think we shall have more rain. I have a little business to do. I have had a very pleasant journey. You never will do like others. You wait for nobody. I will not stay a moment longer. I wish for a steel pen and a sheet of paper. Tell me to whom you write. I write to the dear friend whom you have seen at my house. What noise do I hear ? You said it. I thought you were mis- EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 31 taken. Come home before it grows dark. Take away those things. Never speak without thinking. They say that he has never enjoyed a moment's happiness. Do not go out ; it rains. She was about writing a letter when you entered. It is Henry's turn to go to the city. To-morrow I shall play the cook : will you come to dine with me? We shall have maccaroni with cheese for dinner. Now they ring the bell for supper, and we are not all ready to go. Let us wait a little. See, my suit of clothes is finished. How well he plays the violin ! it is a pleas- ure to hear him. 1. The music of Bellini says sadly, as he who hopes for noth- ing here below, " Weep and pray." 2. Let us remember that suffering is the common heritage of the sons of man ; that earth without heaven would be too hard an exile ; and that life without God is an insoluble enigma ! 3. " Heaven be thanked, that I can remember my good mother without the least remorse ! " said R. 4. The will of God be done. 5. It is a shame to the human race, that war is inevitable at certain times, or on certain occasions. 6. Labor and cares do not frighten the wise man ; they are the exercise of his mind, which they keep in vigor and health. 7. Those disasters which cast down, discourage, and mortify the spirits of a man, seem to rouse up the energies of the softer sex. 8. We should foresee danger, and fear it ; but, when it comes upon us, we have only to despise it. 9. In war, fortune is capricious and inconstant. 10. Men wish to have every thing, and make themselves miserable with the desire for super- fluity. 11. Great conquerors, like those rivers which overflow their banks, appear majestic, but lay waste all those fertile coun- tries- which they should only water. 12. Everybody says what comes into his mind. 13. When the heart of a man is exercised and strengthened in virtue, he ought easily to console himself for the wrinkles which come upon his face. 14. Justice, modera- tion, and good faith are the securest defence of a State. 15. Mis- fortune fraternizes souls, stifles bad passions, and binds around us ties of love. 16. St. Cecilia is a popular institution which 32 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. appears to be transmitted from the middle ages. 17. Letters ! are they not the children of heaven, descended to earth to console us in grief? 18. Ah! there is much comfort in the alternations of care and hope for a person who is all that is left to us. 19. Who, in the noise of our streets, with railways, the smoke of the engines, and the monotonous rolling of the omni- buses, would not sometimes sigh for the quiet of a country life ? Exercise XXII. Subjunctive Mood. The mistress of the house ordered her to go. I fear that you will be late to school. Tell her that she cannot do as she likes. He does not know if he ought to buy it of him. If he knew it, he would not tell it to me. We are assured that your friend (f ) has come. If you had studied, you would be more learned. It seems that she will not give the cake to her son. It is possible that she may give it to him to-morrow. I want to be home in good time. I am afraid the roads are very dusty. I think we shall have some rain. Do you not think that it is very warm for the season ? I want something good to eat. Here is a piece of toast, which I think will please you. Make yourself at home. What fruit do you like best? It does not appear to me that there is much difference. You say so, that you may not blame me. She seems to be growing homelier. The master asked me who I was, and where I went to school. What does he think that I know ? I wish to give her the flowers which please her. She appeared to me more beautiful than ever. More beautiful than any other lady in Boston. If I had such a house. He wishes to know who she is. I wish that yor would write to my mother. Let me feel your pulse. Is there any thing I can do for you ? It seems to me to be very late. Now I must see your flower-garden and your kitchen-garden. Although it is difficult, I will do it. If he knew how much he was beloved ! I must go. I am afraid that I shall not be able to go tliere. I EXERCISES Foil TRANSLATION. 33 cannot believe any such thing. What is it to you if he comes or not? 1. The preacher said to his hearers, "If I offered you only promises, you would be excused for not believing me ; but I offer you certain and present things." 2 " Let us see if you now have the courage to do better, and to allow yourself to be humil- iated by the truth which condemns your weakness." 3. Do not say things which are not true. 4. Do not go in search of perils, when necessity does not require it. 5. We must found public schools, where we can teach our youth to prefer honor to pleas- ure. 6. Very soon James and Charles had the same confidence as if they had passed their lives together, athough they had never seen each other before. 7. People generally pray that God would reward them for every good action. 8. If we do not flatter ourselves, the flattery of others will never hurt us. 9. " Alas ! " cried Mrs. P., " I fear that my son is dead ; and I know not what I shall do." 10. Whatever may have been Louisa's intentions, she has not done as well as she might. 11. The larger a kingdom is, the more ofiicers are required to do what the chief magistrate could not accomplish by himself. 12. What a shame it is, that the most elevated men make their grandeur consist in their money-bags. 13. Who has not need of a friend who loves the truth only, and who will tell you the truth in spite of yourself? 14. The statue of Zenobia was in so life like a posture, that one could almost believe that she would walk. 15. How many exiles have exclaimed, " Would to God that I had never left my country!" 16. When a good general is killed, all the camp is like a disconsolate family which has lost the father, who was the cherished hope of his tender little ones. 17. It was only with the good parent, that the discreet child did not use circumspection in manifesting all the secrets of his heart. 34 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Exercise XXm. Infinitive and Participles. "We are beloved by all our friends. I have been out of town all winter. They have arrived in England. "When he arrived at the church door, he found it shut. She is very acute at rail- lery. They have not found the dog which was lost. I have seen a orreeu worm on the rose-bush. It is not all in commenc- ing. The fire is spread throughout the city. Do not fear that I go away ; your manners please me too much. She has had time to repent of it. "Who can say much in few words ? Seeing her going away. It seemed to him that he saw his lady. "When I had said thus. "Who can have done that ? She must go very soon. I have always loved good old people. He has been very kind to us. She has given two dresses to her servant. Having rested his weary body, he got up. On his departure, he gave each child a dollar. I believe that you are all asleep. "Who has told all these things to our father ? Where has he bought that fine horse ? I have paid more for my feathers than they are worth. If I could have some pretty ribbon to trim my dress. That man has gained much money. Your son has spent more than you can ever earn. He has not rendered an exact ac- count of every thing. Never speak at random. "When the night was spent. He is oppressed by cares. To be master of a thing. He has been the Lord Mayor of London. They have spent about twenty crowns. I walked about ten miles. To condemn one without hearing. My friend is about to marry a rich woman. Have you fed that little white dog of yours ? Mr. S. has brought you a gold ring from the city. I have eaten so much that I cannot go. "Who would have believed it? How can that be ? It looks so very nice. "Will you have the good- ness to ring the bell ? My brother has taken three cups of tea, and asks for more. \. The providence of God keeps us from perishing ; the power EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 35 of God prevents us doing those things which displease him ; and the goodness of God preserves us from auffering. 2. There are but few people who are satisfied with their lot. 3. It is easy to give advice, but difficult to follow it. 4. Signor Domenico, believing himself a learned and wise man, but not knowing what to with his knowledge, made a physician of himself, without ever having studied medicine. 5. Even in prison, there are persons afflicted to console, sick to cure, weak to comfort, and strono- to confirm. 6. We are oblio;ed to confess that our soul, mind, heart, and all our affections, have too restricted limits, 7. Many cities have desired to become the capital of a great empire. 8. The lack of maritime power is a great injury to a nation. 9. We are machines moved by habit. 10. Let us write from the dictation of our heart, provided it is free and uncorrupt. 11. We see ruined churches, castles, and convents of the middle ages throughout all Europe ; the surface of Italy is covered with them. 12. "I stood at that window palpitating, shuddering, and staring about until morning, when I descended oppressed with a mortal sadness, and imagining myself much more injured than I really was." 13. It is always sad to be obliged to leave one's country through misfortune ; but to leave it in chains, and be carried into horrible climates, is so afflicting that no terms can express it! 14. Saint Nilo, moved to pity by the cruel treat- ment inflicted on his countryman Filigato, went to the young emperor Otto, and, supplicating and weeping, demanded mercy for the prisoner. 15. The twins Romulus and Remus, being exposed by order of the king, were found and secretly educated by a shepherd named Faustolo. Exercise XXIV. The Verbs andare, fare, stare, and dare. The sun sets. I have much to do. Three months ago. I have never harmed any one. He will go at daybreak. He did his best. He will set sail at three o'clock. We live a regular 36 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. life. He did not know how to wish a happy new year. He has just published my new work. That parrot has disturbed me very much. She pretended not to hear what the beggar said. I beg you to come to live with us. We are accustomed to take breakfast at seven o'clock. Can you not keep still ? Tell her, that I say she may do as she likes. How she stands like a marble statue ! How is it that this man is your husband ? Go for the doctor. Mr. Lewis has given me a beautiful white hen. I am on the point of leaving for Europe. Where do you live ? How do you do ? How is your mother ? Are your sisters well ? When I was standing at the window, I saw the soldiers pass by. Be quiet, child ! This is the question. Stay as long as you please. Where does she live ? This city stands in a plain. He is obliofed to live on bread and water. These clothes cost me twenty crowns. Why are you so thoughtful ? I am read- ing. I love to live friendly with everybody. When the worst comes to the worst, he will sell the house. You must welcome him. Give me good fruit, bread, and wine, and I shall be satisfied. 1. True dignity is not in pride. 2. So goes the world. 3. Minerva gave the olive, fruit of a tree planted by her, to the inhabitants of proud Athens. 4. Wild beasts are not so cruel as men : lions do not wage war upon lions, nor tigers upon tigers : yet man alone, despite his reason, does that which animals without reason never do. 5. Is there not land enough to give to all men more than they can cultivate ? 6. If we eat more food than is necessary, it poisons instead of nourishing us. 7. Hasten, O young man ! to go where destiny calls : go unhesitatingly to the field of battle. 8. As represented, the frightful Pluto was seated upon a throne of ebony. 9. Virtue is the greatest gift which the good God can give us. 10. We must not take the life of one man into account, when the safety of the nation is at stake. 11. " Go, good mother, go to heaven, and find your child." 12. When misfortunes commence in a house, it often happens that even indifferent people fear for themselves. 13. " Then I EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 37 saw how things came, how they went, and how they would go." 14. "This silence is not to my taste," said the captain; "it pre- sages no good." 15. The country of Phcenecia is at the foot of the Lebanon Mountains, whose tops pierce the clouds, and go to touch the stars. , 16. The unhappy father does not know where he is, what he is doing, or what he ought to do, and goes calling his lost son. 17. True praise is that which is given in the absence of the person praised. 18. Whilst we are in the midst of delights, we do not wish to see or hear any thing which can interrupt their enjoyment. Exercise XXV. Adverbs. Where are you going? Where is your stick? They are often unhappy. My aunt is seldom satisfied. Henceforth I shall do nothing for that family. They have treated me most ungenerously. Bravo my friend ! you have spoken very well. I am afraid it will be too late to do good. We will go directly. Have you finished already? You read newspapers continually. I shall finish in the twinkling of an eye. The young man came unexpectedly. We seldom go out. I am always in a hurry. How quickly he moves ! They must go very soon. I heard of it a short time ago. They were seen near the house. The men whom you wish to see are not here. The good general is wel- come everywhere. I am better to-day than I was yesterday. Now-a-days she is seldom at home. They are constantly coming here. I am almost asleep. I have waited a long time, and she does not come. In general, he is very proud to his inferiors. When he leaves, I shall leave also. You are advised to go immediately. At what o'clock does the packet start? Let us walk faster. Write to me immediately. Without fail. They can sleep here. Your rooms are ready. How much are we indebted to you ? It is very disagreeable to travel alone. T 4 38 EXEKCISES FOR TRANSLATION. have travelled this way several times. With best wishes, yours truly. Do not vrait longer. 1. Sextus v., when he was cardinal, pretended to be extenu- ated by years and infirmities, and went very stooping. 2. It often happens that men reap more advantage from their mistakes, than from the good deeds they have done. 3. Happy are those who have never wandered from the straight road of virtue ! 4. People are continually talking of virtue and of merit, without knowing what they are. 5. The wise man loves truth, and never tells a lie. 6. We seldom repent of speaking too little, but often of speaking too much. 7. Cato the censor never ceased to repre- sent to the Senate the sad consequences of luxury. 8. Perhaps there is no greater absurdity than that so often repeated, of the peace of mind of the just. 9. At any rate. Napoleon was cer- tainly, in a military point of view, greater than Charlemagne, or any other ; and particularly so in the conception of the wonderful campaign of 1800. 10. Good-luck, like ill-luck, never comes alone. 11. Behold me, then, in a sort of society, when 1 was prepared for a greater soUtude than before. 12. The secretary was very humane, and spoke of religion with affection and dignity. 13. In Germany, priests are accustomed to dress like laymen. 14. True dignity consists in being ashamed only of mean actions. Exercise XXVI. Promiscuous Exercises. Go ! what nonsense (childishness) ! And so ! What is it ? Speak, then. The man is never satisfied. Will you never have done ? The sky is as fine now as it ever was. He was near his end. Oh, how happy I am ! He is so-so. Such like. Whilst you read, I write. Come with me, and show me where I may go. He goes so well. I am very well. It would go ill with me if I had nothing else to live upon. 1. Alas, how full of contradictions is man ! 2. Oh, how pleasant is the sympathy of our fellow-creatures ! 3. Oh, how EXEKCISES FOR TRANSLATION. . 39 unjust are men, judging by appearances, and according to their owu superb prejudices ! 4. O Italy, Italy ! when shall I have the pleasure of seeing you again ? 5. Oh ! if I could do it, I would do it willingly. 6. He loves me because I merit it. 7. Oh, so ! let us speak of something else. 8. There is no honor- able retreat for a gotH|;id wise man, except in company of the Muses. 9. We should never be prejudiced against a man because he has a fierce aspect. 10. The rich, who have never experienced want nor the necessity of considering or paying for the comforts of life, know nothing of the pleasure of economy. 11. Have you made all your preparations for departure? 12. Every thing is ready. 13. Send for a porter to carry my luggage. 14. I shall take the railway omnibus, and start in five minutes. 15. It seems to me to be very late. 16. How soon shall we be at the terminus? 17. I am afraid of being too late for the nine o'clock train. 18. Here we are at the terminus : we are never too late. 19. The train will start in five minutes. 20. Make haste and take your ticket. 21. What luggage have you ? 22. I have two trunks, three carpet-bags, and one hat-box. 23. Here is the locomotive engine that is to draw us. 24. Have we two engines ? 25. It requires a very great force to draw a train of twenty-five carriages. 26. What is the power of those engines ? 27. They are each of twenty-horse power. 28. Are you going by the express train? 29. No, this is the accommo- dation train. 30. At what o'clock does the baorsrao-e train start ? 3 1 . There are two a day : one starts at ten o'clock in the morn- ing, and the other at three in the afternoon. 32. Does your father come with us? 33. No: he goes in the express train. 34. Make haste : the train is just going to start. 35. That is the signal for starting. We are off. 36. We are already far from the terminus. 37. We have already gone four or five leagues. 38. We have gone just six miles. 39. We went the last mile in two minutes. 40. We go a mile and a half in a minute. 41. This is quick travelling. 42. But for your assistance, I Bliould have lost all. 43. Should you have undertaken it, if you 40 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. had thought it so difficult ? 44. Persevere, and you will succeed. 45. I heard them firinf]j all the mornino;. 46. I felt her hand trembling in mine. 47. He saw his dog torn in pieces at his feet. 48. It would be necessary for him to see her. 49. I want some sealing-wax. 50. Do you want any thing else? 51. We often lose more time in idly J(|?etting an evil than would be necessary to remedy it. 52. I would certainly do it, if it were necessary. 53. You might have broken your neck. 54. You might have forwarded your letter by his servant. 55. He would answer though he had been advised not to speak. 56. It must not be told to any one. 57. I would not liave acted thus. 58. They would have neither roast beef nor pie. 59. His sister is ill : he must go and see her. 60. The fact must have taken place an hour after nightfall. 61. He owes me now a thousand pounds ; last year he owed me twelve hundred. 62. Always carry an umbrella when it is fine. 63. Is not friendship the greatest of earthly blessings? 64. Have you not been to see the crater of Mount Vesuvius ? 65. Did you not go as far as Turin by the railroad ? QQ. Is your uncle's agent yet arrived ? 67. Should you be displeased, if I gave you any more examples ? 68. Do you write to her sister to-day ? 69. He is so silly and so tiresome that I cannot bear him. 70. He has so much wealth that he does not know what to do with it. 71. I like neither his person, his family, nor his fortune. 72. In the sweat of thy brow shalt thou eat bread till thou return to the ground from whence thou wast taken ; for dust thou art, and to dust thou shalt return. 73. You shall not speak English : you shall speak Italian, nothing but Italian, with your teacher. 74. Do not go into the current : you will be drowned, as you cannot swim. 75. I shall die in a land of strangers, and not a tear will be shed upon my grave. 76. Yes ; and your death will be just as much felt in the world as that of a worm or a fly. 77. True ; but it will not be the less a matter of infinite moment to me. 78. Speak well of your friend; of your enemy, neither well nor ill. 79. The truly virtuous man EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 41 fears neither poverty, afflictions, nor death. 80. The poor man has neither relatives, acquaintances, nor friends. 81. Either say nothing of the absent, or speak like a friend. 82. The good man possesses a happiness which the world can neither give nor take away. 83. On the fifteenth of next month, when I have won tlie capital prize. 84. Chaucer, the father of English poetry, was horn in thirteen hundred and twenty-eight, and died in fourteen hundred, in the seventy-second year of his age. He had thus lived in the reigns of Edward the Third, Richard the Second, and Henry the Fourth. 85. Swans are an ornament to lakes and rivers. The swans of Australia are black. 86. Knowledge is the eye of youth, and the staff of age. 87. I flatter my- self you will be satisfied with your daughter's pronunciation. 88. One should avail one's self of every opportunity to acquire knowledge. 89. Mr. B. thinks himself a great man ; but he deceives himself 90. The horseman and horse that fell down the precipice are both dead. 91. Is this the lady from whom you received the letter which you mentioned? 92. That is the goldsmith by whom this ring was made. 93. The fruit of that forbidden tree, whose mortal taste brought death into the world. 94. The lishtnina: has blasted that beautiful tree, the fruit of which was so delicious. 95. Never defer till to-morrow what you can do to-day. 96. Shun poverty: whatever be your in- come, spend less. 97. This is bad ; that is worse : these are so-so ; those are the worst of all. 98. There is but one lasting afflic- tion, — that which is caused by the loss of self-esteem. 99. Share this melon with your play-fellows; give each of them a slice. 1 00, My brothers are both returned from college; each has obtained a prize. 101. All fools are not knaves ; but all knaves are fools. 102. Mr. A. has failed: shall you lose the money he owes you? 103. I shall have published the second edition of my Dictionary before the end of the year. 104. When you have studied Italian two years, you will understand what you read. 105. He will have spent half his fortune before inheriting it. lOG. He who listens through a hole may hear what will not 42 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. please him. 107. " Doctor, may ma eat oysters for. supper?" " Yes : she may eat shells and all, if she likes." 108. My brother might have made a fortune by his trade. 109. Before you say or do any thing, reflect what the consequences may be. 110. If I went by the steamer, I should be sea-sick. 111. You would arrive sooner if you went by the mail. 112. While you are passing through the Tunnel under the Thames, hundreds of large ships are sailing over your head. 113. Since habit is a second nature, let us early form good ones. 114. The universe is com- posed of two things only, — mind and matter. 115. In educating the mind, we should not forget to educate the heart. 116. In Italy the eye sees much, but the memory more. 117. Victoria the First, Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, is the grand-daughter of George the Third, and the neice of King William the Fourth. 118. The Arabs call the camel the ship of the desert. 119. Egypt was the cradle of arts and sciences. 120. There are, in your exercise, as many errors as words. 121. The prospect brightens as you ascend. 122. Beauty is potent, but money is omnipotent. 123. Though I had written the letter, I had not forwarded it. 124. He is still rich, notwithstanding his losses. 125. He has acted an unworthy part: nevertheless I will assist him. 126. I forgive him, on con- dition that I never see him more. 127. Tell the truth: other- wise you will be despised by every one. 128. She was both young and lovely, and rich also. 129. The earth is divided into five parts; namely, Europe, Asia, etc. 130. You might learn a great many things: as, for instance, music, painting, etc. 131. It has happened just as I expected. 132. Whence comes it that you are so melancholy? 133. You are young and inexperi- enced : therefore you ought to be guided by the advice of your elders. 134. You have promised: then you must perform. 135. Since she has written to you, you must reply. i EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 43 The pagan gods chose various trees. The oak pleased Jupiter ; the ash, IMars ; the pine, Cybele ; the poplar-tree, Hercules ; and the laurel, Apollo. Minerva and Pallas asked why they took unfruitful trees. Jupiter replied, " On account of the honor." " Say what you will," added Pallas, '' I like the olive on account of its fruit." " You are right, dear daughter," replied Jupiter ; and immediately they all called her the Goddess of Wisdom, because, if what we do is useless, the honor is vain. The celebrated Venetian painter, Titian, let his pencil fall whilst painting the Emperor Charles V. The emperor picked it up immediately, saying, " A Titian merits to be served by an emperor." There are few fine galleries where pictures of Titian and CoiTeggio are not to be found. Aspasia of Miletus was celebrated in Athens for her wit and her beauty. She was so skilful in eloquence and politics, that Socrates himself took lessons of her. She was the teacher and wife of Pericles, and lived 428 years before the Christian era. Count Mansfield, one of the greatest captains of the age, had certain proofs that an apothecary had received a considerable sum to poison him. He sent for him ; and, when he appeared before him, he said, " My friend, I cannot believe that a person whom I have never injured should wish to take my life. If necessity induces you to commit such a crime, here is money : be honest." Whilst a countryman was sowing his field, a young man passed by, who, trying to be witty, said with rather an insolent air, " Good man, you have to sow, and ive reap the fruits of your labors." To which the countryman replied, " It is very prob- able, sir; for I am sowing hemp." 44 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. A young man of distinction, having just returned from mak- ing the tour of Europe, and using the privilege of travellers to embellish things with the flowers of invention, was telling an officer, one day, of the magnificent presents which he had received from different reigning princes ; among others, he men- tioned a very superb bridle, which had been given to him by the King of France. " It is so elegantly ornamented with gold and precious stones," said he, " that I cannot persuade myself to put it into my horse's mouth ; what can I do with it ? " — " Put it into your own " (mouth), replied the officer with whom the traveller was speaking. Printed by John Wilson & Son. I TESTIMONIALS. New York, February, J 866. I have used " Otto's French Grammar " since its publication, and consider it the best book on the subject. It is based on the most modern grammars pubHshed in Paris ; it is thorough, and full of idiomatical expressions that can be found in no other work. LUCIEN OUDIN, A.M. Instructor of the French Langitage, N. Y, Free Academy. I have used " Otto's German Grammar." I consider it a very good book ; its abundant vocabularies, and its fulness in idioms, are especially useful. The appendix, also, is very valuable, con- taining, as it does, some of the most popular and characteristic German poems, which may be turned to many uses. Feb. 1, 1865. ADOLPH WERNER, Professor of German, New -York Free Acade7ny. Washington University St. Louis, Jan. 2, 1865. Mr. S. R. Urbino, Dear Sir, — It gives me great pleasure to inform you that I have introduced your edition of "Otto's German Grammar" in my classes in this University, and that I regard it as the very best German grammar, for school purposes, that has thus far come to my notice. Your Grerman editions of the "Immensee," " Vergiss- meinnicht," and " Irrlichter," are great favorites among my pupils ; »nd your " College Series of Modern French Plays," edited by Mr. Ferdinand Bocher of Harvard College, I regard as very useful for the recitation-room, and for private reading. Yours very truly, B. L. TAFEL, Ph. D. *rofe$sor of Modern Languages and Comparative Philology in Washingtom University. I use " Otto's French and German Grammar " at our College and the Collegiate School, and can confidently recommend it to all similar institutions. October, 1864. H. STIEFELHAGEN, Frofessor Modern Languages at Eing^s College, Windsor^ Nova Scotia. 1 have examined many works designed for pupils studying the French Language, and among them consider " Otto's French Con- Tersation Grammar," revised by Bocher, superior to any other. I use it in my classes, and take pleasure in recommending it as admirably adapted for the purpose. A. WERTHEIM, Fro/essor of Modern Languages at the University ^ Louisville, Kentucky. Among many works designed for pupils studying the German language, I consider " Otto's German Conversation Grammar " superior to any other. I use it in my classes, and take great pleasure in recommending it as the best work which has yet been pubHshed for the use of schools. A. WERTHEIM, I^o/essor of Modem Languages, Louisville, Ky. Boston, March, 1865. Mr. Uebino, Boston. My dear Sir, — " Otto's French Grammar " revised by Prof. F. Bocher, is the best Instructor ever pubUshed ; at present, it sur- passes Fasquelle and the Ollendorf System, by its simphcity. It has the advantage of teUing, in one page, what the others require three or four to express. The rules for the pronunciation do honor to the reviser ; besides, the lessons are so well placed, and so pro- gressive, that they bring the student into the difficulties of our language with very little exertion. At last, permit me to thank you for taking, by this pubhcation, the most tedious part of our labor as teacher. It is so clear, tliat any one could teach the Vrench Language without difficulty. I remain, Sir, yours, P. J. BORIS, Professor of French Language, ld« Boylston Place, Boston. Marlbobo', Mass , April 9, 1866 S. R. Urbino, Esq. Dear Sir, — I used Otto's Grammar in two classes at Edgar- town High School, — one class quite advanced. The testimonial of Mr. Hunt and others expresses my sentiments, and you may use my name if you choose. Yours truly, A. H. WENZEL, I^rincipal qf Marlboro'' High School, late Principal of Edgarlovm High School. WoBURN, April 12, 1866. Mr. Uebino. Dear Sir, — The opinion of Messrs. Hunt and others with respect to the merits of Otto's French Grammar, I indorse in fiiU. Yours truly, THOMAS EMERSON. Master of Woburn High School. ^. R. Urbino, Esq. My Dear Sir, — I am now using Otto's French Grammar, revised by Prof. Bocher ; and, so far as we have advanced, I am better pleased with it than with any other work of the kind which I have previously used. Yours truly, GEORGE N. BIGELOW, Principat. State Nor>iAl School, Framinoham, April 16, 1866. Boston, April 16. Mr. Urbino. Dear Sir, — I have used Otto's French Grammar for several years in all my schools, -and find it much superior to all those which I have as yet seen, for the simplicity and clearness with wliich the rules are explained. I am happy to say, also, that your series of French Comedies and your other French books can be highly recommended for school and private reading : they are well selected. Yours truly, O. BESSAU. Kew Haven, Conn., April, 1866 S. R. Urbino, Esq. Dear Sir, — I thank yotl for the specimens of your French and German series, which you have been kind enougli to send me from time to time. You are doing, as it appears to me, a leal service to the study of these two languages, especially of thp German, in our country, by putting at reasonable prices so excel- lent editions of classical and unexceptionable texts witliin the easy reach of teachers and scholars. I have used several of them in my classes, and can heartily recommend them to instructors of pupils of every grade. I am, sir, very respectfully, Your obedient servant, WILLIAM D. WHITNEY, Prqf, of Sanscrit and Instructor in Modern Languages at Yale College. Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Ferdi- nand Bocher. Boston : S. R. Urbino. It is with great pleasure that we direct the attention of all lovers of the French language to this pubUcation. ... It is particularly fit for a text-book in our schools, for the following reasons : 1, It is short, without being superficial. 2, It is logically arranged. 3, Its course of instruction is a progress, in a natural gradation, from the easy to the diflBcult. 4, Theory and practice go hand in hand. 5, Its outside appearance does credit to the publishers. — Michigan Teacher, May, 1866. Bates College, June 9, 1866. S. R. Urbino, Esq. Dear Sir, — Will you allow me to thank you for calling my attention to Otto's French Grammar, edited by Prof Boclier'? We have used it thus far this year with entire satisfaction. It will be but simple justice to award it the first place as a text-book for mature students, at least among all with which I am acquainted, whether published in this country or in Europe. Its chapter on Pronunciation is surpassingly complete and practical. Gratefully yours, B. F. HAYES. Enolish High School, Boston, March 31, 1866. Mr. Ubbino. Dear Sir, — After a six months* trial, we conclude that Otto's French Grammar, revised by Bocher, is superior in all respects to any other of which we have knowledge. Very respectfully yours, E. HUNT, WILLIAM NICHOLS, Jr., ROBERT EDWARD BABSON, THOMAS SHERWIN, Jr., Teachers in Enylish High School. I fully and emphatically indorse the above opinion respecting Otto's Erench Grammar. JOHN D. PHILBRICK, Superintendent of Public Schools State Normal School. Salem, Mass, April 3, 1866. S. R. Urbino, Esq. My Dear Sir, — We are using in our school several of your publications with much satisfaction. This is especially the case with Otto's French Grammar. As a class text-book, this grammar is, in my opinion, the best in the market. For the excellence of your school-books, both as to matter and typographical beauty, you richly merit the gratitude of teachers and pupils. Yours truly, D. B. HAGAR. Cambridge, April 6, 1866. Mr. S. R. Urbino. Dear Sir, — Otto's French Grammar, revised by Bocher, which we have been trying with a class in our "shorter course of study," has been adopted for all our French classes, in place of Fasquelle's book. We can heartily indorse the testimonial from the teachers in t^e Boston High School. Yours truly, W. J. ROLFE, Mailer of iMmbridtje High SchooL Vassar Female College, PouGHKEEPSiE, N.Y., April 19, 1866. Mr Urrino. Dear Sir, — I am now using many of your publications in this college, of which I am particulariy pleased with the German and Italian Grammars, and with Bocher's College Series of French Plays. Otto's German Grammar, I regard as a model of scholarly thoroughness and practical utility ; and the other works of your list, as far as I have examined them, recommend themselves, not only by the beauty of their mechanical execution, but also by the intrinsic merit of their redaction. Very truly yours, W. I. KNAPP, Professor of Ancient and Modern Languages and Literature. State University of Michigaw, April 20, 1866. I have adopted Otto's German Conversation Grammar as a text- book in this University, and have no hesitation in recommending it as by far the best grammar of the German language published in this country. No other work with which I am acquainted pre- sents such a happy combination of what are called the Analytic and Synthetic methods of instruction. The statement of princi- ples is clear and philosophical ; and the examples which illustrate the niceties of their application are all that could be desired. The French Grammar, by the same author, is similar in plan, and possesses equal excellences. I have examined the standard educational works for the study of foreign languages, published by S. R. Urbino, and take pleasure in recommending them to all students of the languages and litera- tures of Europe. They are well selected, amply elucidated by English notes, and, in convenience of form and excellence of typographTj are all that could be desired. E. P. EVAl^S, Professor of Modern Languages and Literature. S. R. URBINO, Publisher, 14 Bromfidd Street, Boston- RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY BIdg. 400, Richnnond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 5"/ 6^^642-6753 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date DUE AS STAMPED BELOW nCT 1 5 1992 I YB 41889 U. C. BERK EL EY LIBRARIES CDbim3DDM r 7 7 V^/-^ / UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY %